road maintenance performance contracts (open ... - world … edition... · this series of manuals...

Road Maintenance Performance Contracts (Open Competition) Volume 2

1st Edition Registration Number 87.104.2 Issued and prepared by: Capability and Delivery Division Queensland Department of Main Roads For document sales enquiries:- Research and Administration Advisor

Capability and Delivery Division Ph: (07) 3834 5466 Fax (07) 3834 5403

For document content enquiries:- Principal Advisor

Roadworks Performance Ph: (07) 3834 5469

For document distribution enquiries:- Document Control Officer

Road System and Engineering Ph: (07) 3834 2035

RMPC Open Competition 87.104.2 (June 2001)

Road Maintenance Performance Contracts (Open Competition) Volume 2 First Edition, June 2001 This series of Manuals comprises four volumes dealing with Road Maintenance Performance Contracts. Vol. 1 - RMPC Sole Invitee Vol. 2 - RMPC Open Competition Vol. 3 - RMPC Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance Vol. 4 - RMPC Management System User Guide COPYRIGHT © Capability and Delivery Division, The Queensland Department of Main Roads 2001 Copyright in this document remains with the Capability and Delivery Division of the Department. It is not to be sold, copied, or given to any person, other than the original recipient, for any purpose, except for fair dealing for study or review, without the prior, written permission of the Executive Director, Capability and Delivery Division.


Version 1.0 June 2001

VOLUME 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page

1 Preliminary..................................................................................................... 1 of 4

1.1 Introduction ........................................................................................... 1 of 4

1.2 Defined Terms in the RMPC Contract Documents................................ 2 of 4

2 Key Features of the RMPC Approach.......................................................... 1 of 7

2.1 Roles of the Parties............................................................................... 1 of 7

2.2 Emphasis on Planning .......................................................................... 2 of 7

2.3 Systematic Approach to the Management of Maintenance................... 3 of 7

2.4 Productivity ........................................................................................... 5 of 7

2.5 Other Performance Requirements ........................................................ 5 of 7

2.6 Financial Management.......................................................................... 6 of 7

2.7 Initiation of Work ................................................................................... 7 of 7

3 Key Contractual Elements ............................................................................ 1 of 5

3.1 Type of Contract ................................................................................... 1 of 5

3.2 Work included under RMPC ................................................................. 2 of 5

3.3 Liability for Non-performance of Maintenance ...................................... 3 of 5

3.4 Quality, Safety & Environmental Requirements .................................... 4 of 5

3.5 Other Significant Features .................................................................... 5 of 5

3.6 Dispute Resolution................................................................................ 5 of 5

4 The RMPC Process........................................................................................ 1 of 5

4.1 Forming the Contract ............................................................................ 1 of 5

4.2 Administration of the Contract............................................................... 4 of 5

4.3 Renegotiations...................................................................................... 5 of 5



APPENDICES

Appendix 1 Corporate Offer Documents/Forms

• Offer Document Cover Sheet

• Table of Contents

• Part 1: - Part Divider - Invitation for Offer/Offer/Agreement (C6262)

• Part 2: - Part Divider

Schedule - Schedule Summary (C6284.1) - Network Schedule (National Highways and State Controlled Roads) (C6284.2) - Daywork Schedule (Personnel, Plant, Equipment and Materials rates) (C6265) - Standing Offer Rates (for possible Activities / Scheme) (C6265.1) - Planned Cash Flow Schedule (C6266) - Intervention Level/Response Time Schedule (C6295) - Offer Schedules (C6268.1)

Schedule 1: Track Record Schedule 2: Allocation of Key Personnel;, Plant and Equipment Schedule 3: Facilities and Resources Schedule 4: Resume of Offers Understanding of the Scope of the Road Maintenance Services Schedule 5: Mobilization Strategy Schedule 6: Quality Plan/Safety/Traffic Management/ Environmental Management Plan Outlines

- Proposed Stockpile Sites (C6089)

• Part 3: - Part Divider - Conditions of Offer/Supplementary Conditions of Offer (C6260/C6263)

• Part 4: - Part Divider

- General Conditions of Contract/Supplementary Conditions of Contract (C6261/C6267) • Part 5: - Part Divider

- Brief: 1. Road Maintenance Services 2. Description of Road Network 3. Reference Points 4. Lane Closure Restrictions for the Road Network 5. Roadside Rest Area Locations 6. Emergency Phone Locations 7. Extract From District Road Status Report 8. Proposed Stockpile Sites for Principal’s Recovered Materials 9. Maintenance Responsibility Plans 10. Other

- Attachments:

1. Map of the Road Network incorporating Roadside Rest Area and Emergency Phone Locations 2. Lane Closure Restrictions 3. Extract from District Road Status Report 4. Maintenance Responsibility Plans



• Part 6: - Part Divider Performance Standards

• Part 7: - Part Divider - Other Documents and Forms

- Performance Report Form (C6292) - Progress Claim Summary (C6296) - Progress Claim (Network Schedule) (C6297) - Progress Claim Dayworks (Summary) (C6298) - Progress Claim Dayworks (Details) (C6299)

• Part 8: - Part Divider Registration of Interest (C6000)

Appendix 2 Major Reference Documents (not included)

• Vol. 1 - RMPC Sole Invitee (Attachments 1 to 5/Notes 1 to 15)

Document Number 87.104.1 • Vol. 3 - RMPC Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance

Document Number 87.104.3 • Standard Specifications Roads (3rd Edition)

Document Number 80.601 • MUTCD (Qld)

Document Number 1995 Edition


Version 1.0 June 2001 Page 1 of 4

1 Preliminary

1.1 Introduction

1.1.1 RMPC (Open Competition)

In conjunction with the RMPC (Sole Invitee), RMPC (Open Competition) since 1995 have changed the way the Department delivers its routine maintenance program. RMPC (Open Competition) are invoked upon the initiative of the Principal or a request by the RMPC (Sole Invitee) Contractor to opt out of that arrangement. By applying the open competition contractual agreement together with RMPC (Sole Invitee) arrangements, the Department is realising its Road Reform objective to achieve maximum efficiency in the delivery of maintenance services. By moulding pre 1995 arrangements with Contractors into a commercial, contractual framework and benchmarking these agreements against other sector performance, the Department is assured of obtaining ‘best value' for its maintenance dollar.

1.1.2 Competitive Environment and Best Value

The Transport Infrastructure Act 1994 requires the Department to obtain "best value" in the expenditure of maintenance funds on State-controlled roads. In addition, the Federal Department of Transport has required all works on National Highways to be subject to contract from 1 July 1994. As a result of the ongoing productivity based nature of the Road Maintenance Performance Contracts (Sole Invitee), the Department is able to demonstrate that "best value" is being attained whilst giving Contractors the opportunity to be increasingly more efficient in their maintenance operations. Road Maintenance Performance Contracts (Open Competition) enable the Department through benchmarking these agreements against other sector performance, to be assured of ‘best value’ for the overall maintenance investment.

1.1.3 The New Contractual Arrangement

Although the Road Maintenance Performance Contract has many key features, the major differences from pre 1995 arrangements for maintenance include: • Contractors perform a stewardship role acting professionally in the Principal’s interest.

• There is a strong emphasis on both planning of maintenance and planning for efficiency gains.

• Contractors need to demonstrate a systematic approach to maintenance management.

1.1.4 Strategy Driven Maintenance

The Department is committed to continual improvement in the way it manages the road system. A vital component of this task is asset maintenance or the management of the ongoing performance and condition of our road and bridge infrastructure. The aim of the Department’s Road Asset Maintenance Policy and Strategy is to optimise the performance of the road assets for which the Department is responsible. This optimum performance will be achieved by taking a “whole of life” view while recognising social, safety, environmental and community needs, and be



pursued within the level of available funding. These policies and strategies are being integrated with those of the broader Road Network Strategy. The maintenance strategy provides guidelines to provide the appropriate level of maintenance investment in infrastructure. It focuses on the implementation of efficient and effective maintenance practices. The delivery of road maintenance through open competition to achieve efficient and effective maintenance practices is seen by the Department as one way to support the overall aim to optimise the performance of the road assets for which the Department is responsible.

1.2 Defined Terms in the RMPC Contract Documents The following words used in the RMPC Contract Documents shall have the meanings as set out unless the context indicates otherwise: "Activity" means the work necessary to restore an infrastructure asset on a particular part of the Network to a specified condition. "Activity Standard" means the Department’s requirements for an Activity including:- • Unique reference number (Mandatory)

• Description (Mandatory)

• Applicable Specifications

• Restoration standards

• Units of measurement (Mandatory)

• Testing requirements

• Particular Planning Points to Consider

Note: These Standards are not mandatory requirements (except where indicated) but may be used in preparing the Contractor’s Quality Plan. They are set out in Appendix B, Part 6 of RMPC Open Competition. "Agreed Intervention Level" means the agreed magnitude of a Defect that requires rectification action by the Contractor. They are the General Intervention Levels and any changes recorded in the Intervention Level/Response Time Schedule and agreed to by the Principal during developments of the JMRA by the previous RMPC Contractor/Principal. “Contractor” means the person nominated in the Agreement Form. "Defect" means any deficiency in the condition of the road transport infrastructure. “Department” means the Principal. "Emergency Maintenance" means Activities undertaken by the Contractor in response to an emergency situation. "Forward List of Work" means the list of work on the Network where the magnitude of Defects has reached the Agreed Intervention Levels and may also include Defects that have reached the Initial Intervention Levels. "General Intervention Level" means the magnitude of a Defect as set out in Appendix 2 of Volume 3 – Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance and Part 6 Appendix A of RMPC Open Competition indicating the need for rectification action. "Indicative Network Schedule Total(s)" means the amount of money determined by the Principal to be available for Activities on the National Highway Network and the Other State-controlled Network respectively.



“Initial Intervention Level” means the magnitude of a Defect as set out in Appendix 2 of Volume 3 – Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance and Part 6 Appendix A of RMPC Open Competition that are be used by the Contractor for recording Defects into the Forward List of Works to assist in work planning. “Intervention Levels” means Initial Intervention Levels and General Intervention Levels. “Intervention Level/Response Time Standards” means the Principals requirements for Intervention Levels and Response Times as set out in Appendix 2 of Volume 3 - Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance and Part 6 Appendix A of RMPC Open Competition. "Joint Maintenance Requirement Assessment" means a joint Principal/Contractor assessment of the Network for the purpose of determining the extent of Activities required for the forthcoming Contract Period. "Maintenance" means all Activities required to correct Defects. "Maintenance Management System (MMS)" means the systematic approach to the management of road maintenance developed by the Department for its own use and supported by computer systems such as Contract Maintenance Management (CMM). "Maintenance Needs Survey" means a survey, (not directly relevant to RMPC) to identify the work required to maintain a Network to a specified standard for a nominated future period. "Maintenance Works Order" means an order for the carrying out of an Activity, which is produced from the Contractor's systematic approach to management. "National Highway Network" (NHN) means that part of the Network comprising Federally funded State-controlled Roads or parts of those roads. "Network" comprises only those roads included in the Contract. "Network Schedule Total(s)" means the amount(s) for completion of Activities on the National Highway Network and the Other State-controlled Network respectively. "Other State-controlled Network" (OSCN) means that part of the Network excluding the National Highway Network. “Principal” means the State Of Queensland acting through the Department of Main Roads. “Response Time” means the time to commence an Activity once the Agreed Intervention Level for the related Defect has been reached. "Restoration Standard" means the standard to which an Activity shall be completed as specified in the Quality Plan. "RMPC - Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance (the Guidelines)" means the Principal’s Manual for Routine Maintenance incorporating:

• Defect Classification, General Intervention Levels, Response Times, allowable Activities and units of measurement;

• Corporate Activity Standards.

“RMPC – Volume 1 Sole Invitee” means the Principal’s Manual for Routine Maintenance for Sole Invitees incorporating:

• Corporate systematic approach to managing maintenance; • RMPC Notes to guide operations.

"road" includes part of a road. "Road Maintenance Performance Contract (RMPC)" means the agreement between the Principal and a Contractor where the Contractor is responsible for the Maintenance of a Network.



"Road Reference System (RR)" means the Department's system for determining location within a Network when identifying Defect and Activity locations. “Roadworks Performance Contract (RPC)” means the contract system used by the Principal for construction of road transport infrastructure. "Routine Maintenance" means those Activities other than Emergency Maintenance as set out in Part 6 Performance Standards. "Routine Maintenance Amount" is the sum of the Network Schedule Total(s). "Systematic Approach to the Management of Maintenance (SMM)" means the documented systematic approach used by the Contractor in complying with the requirements of the RMPC. "Total Contract Amount" means the sum of the Network Schedule Total(s) and Minor Works Schedule Amount(s). “Total GST Amount” means the value of Goods and Services Tax payable by the Principal to the Contractor if the Total Contract Amount is expended on work under the Contract. "work" includes Routine Maintenance, Minor Works, Emergency Maintenance and any other variations.



2 Key Features of the RMPC (Open

Competition) Approach

2.1 Roles of the Parties

2.1.1 The Principal’s Roles

The Principal’s roles under RMPC include: • owner of the Network;

• administration of the Contract in accordance with Contract Conditions eg. Reallocation of Funds, consideration of Variation applications, auditing of Quality Systems, provision of relevant available information, etc;

• assessment of progress claims and authorising payment;

• co-operation with the Contractor in its Stewardship role; and

• assessment of Contractor performance.

2.1.2 Contractor’s Roles

The Contractor performs three roles under RMPC.

- Network Steward As the Principal’s agent for maintenance, the Contractor must act professionally in the Principal’s interest and must ensure: • that maintenance funds are wisely invested and that the infrastructure asset is maintained in the

best interests of the Principal;

• that discretionary changes to the agreed Network Schedule(s) are sound and justifiable;

• that maintenance concerns are primarily dealt with at Contractor level and only referred to the Principal when necessary; and

• that advice that is both timely and of a high standard is provided to the Principal as necessary.

The network stewardship role of the Contractor does not involve owner type functions such as operating the Pavement Management System or designing rehabilitation works; however the Contractor's ongoing inputs to future work of this nature is encouraged.

Maintenance Manager and Supervisor As the Maintenance Manager and Supervisor, the Contractor must plan and manage maintenance efficiently. The Contractor is responsible for: • ensuring a systematic approach to identification, prioritisation, scheduling, planning and doing of

Maintenance;



• accuracy of records;

• adequacy of quality systems; and

• sound financial and contractual management.

Operations Contractor The Contractor is responsible for undertaking Maintenance efficiently and in accordance with quality, environmental and safety procedures. RMPC Volume 1 Sole Invitee Attachments 1 to 5 and also RMPC Notes 1 to 15 provides guidance in this regard.

2.2 Emphasis on Planning

2.2.1 General

Under the RMPC arrangements, there is a clear focus on the Contractor knowing what is the most important work to be done (prioritisation) and then planning its operations so that the work is done in the most efficient way (implementation).

2.2.2 Planning Prior to Contract Period (by The Department and Contractor)

Prior to the commencement of each Contract period, the Principal must determine a realistic schedule of Routine Maintenance work. The process will vary across the State. However, it is required that both the previous Contractor and the Principal jointly inspect all roads in the Network to determine the type, quantities and Intervention Levels of Maintenance for the following Contract period. This process is called the Joint Maintenance Requirements Assessment. The value of this work, following an iterative process outlined in Section 4.1.3 of Volume 1 RMPC Sole Invitee, is to correspond to the indicative Network Schedule Total(s) for the following Contract Period. The indicative Network Schedule Total(s) should reflect the intent of the Road Network Strategy and the output of the Maintenance Needs Survey which must be undertaken concurrently with the joint inspection. As an output of the Joint Maintenance Requirement Assessment, the work on each road in the Network will be determined as follows: • the specific Activities required;

• when work is to be initiated on each road or part of a road (ie. by reference to Agreed Intervention Levels); and

• approximate quantities required.

Once the proposed Maintenance for each of the roads of the Network is decided, Network Schedules for both National Highways and other State-controlled Roads can be compiled (merely a summation of road quantities). The Contract is based on: • Network Schedule(s) - generally preferred;

• Schedules for individual Road Sections;

• Schedules for specific activities where economy of scale considerations provide best value; and

• any combination of the above, as determined by the Principal.

2.2.3 Planning During the Contract Period

The Contractor must plan the maintenance operation in order to maximise the efficiency of field operations. The RMPC requires work to be identified/prioritized/planned in advance and performed using a systematic approach.



The Contractor and the Principal must jointly inspect roads in the Network on a regular basis throughout the Contract period to monitor the performance of assets on the Network.

2.3 Systematic Approach to the Management of Maintenance

2.3.1 General

Under RMPC, Contractors have to use a systematic approach to the management of Maintenance. Any system, which is quality assured and complies with the generic requirements of Clauses 2.3.2 to 2.3.3 inclusive, is eligible for RMPC. The Contractor has two options. It can: • develop its own systematic approach to the management of maintenance (SMM)

The Contractor can develop and use its own systematic approach to the management of maintenance in accordance with the generic requirements as set out in Clauses 2.3.2 to 2.3.3 inclusive.

OR

• use the Principal’s Systematic approach to managing maintenance (MMS)

The Contractor could use the systematic approach to maintenance developed by the Principal for its own use and supported by computer systems such as Contract Maintenance Management System (CMM). The Principal’s software is available for those Contractors who wish to acquire and make use of it. However there is no requirement that the Contractor must use the Principal’s software, nor indeed the particular systematic approach to maintenance developed by the Principal.

The Principal’s process is as depicted in Volume 1 RMPC Sole Invitee: Attachment 1 – Part 2 RMPC Systematic Approach to Managing Maintenance.

2.3.2 System Procedures

Identification of Maintenance in Advance Outstanding Maintenance including its location, should be identified before Defects have reached the Agreed Intervention Level. The Contractor may record details of maintenance work into the “Forward List of Works” once the Defect Initial Intervention Level is reached to assist in work planning. It is required that routine inspections of the Network will be undertaken, and that procedures/inspections frequency be included in the Contractor Quality Plan. In order to keep this process manageable, it is preferable that the Contractor aggregate work into reasonable packages and estimate resources necessary to perform those Activities whilst still in the field. A schedule of routine inspections is to be defined as part of the RMPC in the Quality Plan and Contractors will need to retain inspection reports for auditing by the Principal.

Planning and Prioritising of Maintenance It is a requirement that to the maximum extent possible, work will be planned in advance and prioritised so as to achieve operational efficiencies. Where the Principal’s system is used, the method of Defect prioritisation associated with that system must be used. Where the Principal’s system is not used, the Contractor is to maintain a prioritised "Forward List of Work" to give tangible demonstration that works are being prioritised. It is not mandatory for Defects to be recorded with the Activity in the prioritised “Forward List of Work”. Where Defects are recorded, the Defects will be prioritised having regard to Response Time and safety,



preventative and useability considerations. Where Defects are not recorded, the Contractors Quality System shall clearly demonstrate the way in which Activities and their priorities are determined in the field. Work, when scheduled, shall be documented on Works Orders. Only work relating to the contract network shall be included on Works Orders. Copies of the Forward List of Work and Works Orders are to be retained for audit by the Principal.

Undertaking Maintenance The Contractor is required to have a third party accredited (or better) Quality System for the performance of maintenance with Quality Plans including the procedures for the undertaking of maintenance. All Maintenance must be undertaken to appropriate standards, including compliance with the Activity Standards included in Contractor's Quality Plan. In order to assist the Contractor with the preparation of its Quality Plan, Part 6 of RMPC Open Competition and Volume 3 - Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance provides details of the Principal’s Activity Standards and Intervention Level/Response Time Standards. The use of the Principal’s Road Reference System (RR) is mandatory. Details of the RR conventions is detailed in Attachment 4 of Volume 3, Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance.

Recording Completed Maintenance All work performed including its location, using RR, is to be captured and recorded. Where work is carried out without a Works Order being available in advance (such as Emergency Work), a Works Order is to be completed retrospectively with 24 hours, to ensure a record of all completed work is captured. Where the work actually performed differs from that which was scheduled on the Works Order, an as-completed Works Order is to be created to show the work actually performed. Records will need to be retained by the Contractor for at least five (5) years. A copy of all records is to be handed over to the Principal at regular intervals not exceeding three months and within 14 days of the end of the Contract.

Reporting Completed Maintenance All completed maintenance including its location, should be the subject of regular Progress Reports to allow network and contract performance monitoring to be undertaken. The level of report detail must be sufficient for the Principal to be satisfied that the Contractor is fulfilling its obligations as to Road Maintenance Services.

2.3.3 System Outputs

The systematic approach to management must produce the following outputs: • Network Inspection Reports

• Forward List of Maintenance - Refer Clause 2.3.2

• Work Orders - Refer Clause 2.3.2

• Record of Completed Activities

• Monthly Progress Claims

(1) Routine Maintenance Progress Claim(s) including:

�� signed progress claim certificate (mandatory requirement)

�� an electronic disk containing details of completed Activities in the format as set out in Attachment 2 Volume 1 RMPC (Sole Invitee)

�� progress against each Network and or individual Schedule(s), Dayworks and Variations (as required by the Principal)



�� completed updated Programmed Expenditure

(2) Minor Works

�� itemised Minor Works Schedules

(3) Emergency Maintenance �� completed relevant schedules

• Progress Reports

• To be prepared regularly (every month or as otherwise directed by the Principal).

• Unsatisfactory/unclear Progress Reports, or as otherwise directed by the Principal, may result in a formal Progress Meeting.

2.4 Productivity

2.4.1 General

The Principal demands ‘best value’ for its maintenance dollar and requires (via the RMPC) that Contractors, will achieve ongoing efficiency improvements in their maintenance operations. These efficiency improvements are achieved through agreed productivity improvement arrangements in the case of Road Maintenance Performance Contracts (Sole Invitee) and through the tender process in the case of Road Maintenance Performance Contracts (Open Competition)

2.5 Other Performance Requirements

2.5.1 General

The performance of the Contractor in each of its three roles will be evaluated regularly by the Principal throughout the Contract Period and at the end of the Contract (generally at Contract Review Meetings).

2.5.2 Form of the Report

Performance reports will be completed using the Corporate Form C6292. If an unsatisfactory report is given on any of the criteria, then specific details must accompany that report. Irrespective of the respective assessments, both parties are to acknowledge the content of the report and copies will be provided to each of the parties.

2.5.3 Formal Contract Review Meetings

At least four Contract Review Meetings shall be convened by the Principal, with the Contractor, for each 12 month period and pro-rata thereof for lesser periods. A final Contract Review Meeting should also be held, no later than two weeks before the completion of the Contract Period. Performance Report (C6292) shall be prepared by the Principal and forwarded to the Contractor prior to the Contract Review Meeting. The content of the Report shall be discussed at the Contract Review Meeting.

2.5.4 Consequences of Adverse Reports

Where the Contractor obtains a less than satisfactory evaluation in one or more areas, the issues must be addressed by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Principal before the next Contract Review Meeting. Any Nonconformance and Corrective Action Requests are to be raised by the Contractor for agreement with the Principal.



Where the Contractor incurs two successive less than satisfactory reports for the same Performance Criteria, the Contractor may be issued with a Show Cause Notice by the Principal in accordance with Clause 14.1 of the General Conditions of Contract. When the Principal has evidence that a Contractor may be involved in fraudulent behavior, or gross misconduct, it shall give notice to the Contractor to show cause. If, after expiry of the show cause period the Principal is still convinced that the fraud or gross misconduct occurred, the Principal may either take over the work under the Contract or cancel the Contract in accordance with Clause 14.3 of the General Conditions of Contract. Other circumstances where the Contract may be terminated are detailed in Clause 14.4 of the General Conditions of Contract and include for example, bankruptcy, appointment of a receiver and issue of a winding up order.

2.6 Financial Management

2.6.1 Discretionary Management of Expenditures

As maintenance manager of the Network, the Contractor has a responsibility to manage the varying maintenance needs and priorities of its Network over the Contract Period while containing expenditure to the Network Schedule Total(s). In order to assist the Contractor to manage these constraints, payment will be made on a Network and or individual Schedule basis as determined locally. The Contractor has the discretion to vary the agreed quantity of any Activity and or individual schedule total where multiple schedules are used by plus or minus 20% (or any other figure as determined locally by the Principal). Prior to undertaking Maintenance beyond the discretionary level, authorization from the Principal, will be required. The Principal’s options are either to: • re-allocate funds from some other Activity in the Schedule(s), but retaining the original Network

Schedule Total(s);

• adjust the Agreed Intervention Level thereby varying Activity quantities outside the discretionary limits but maintaining the agreed Network Schedule Total(s);

• approve the work as a variation to the Contract; or

• not approve the work.

On a cautionary note, the Network maintenance management role of the Contractor should not be seen by the Contractor as an opportunity to undertake more profitable activities at the expense of higher priority, less profitable activities, i.e. the Contractor is to act in the best interests of the Principal ( as owner of the asset). As such, the Principal will audit the Contractor's performance in this area.

2.6.2 Variations

Variations to the Contract involving a change to the Total Contract Amount at the Principal’s discretion will apply in a limited number of situations:

• additional funds for : − Scheduled Activities; − Nominated additional Activities (not in the Schedules); or − Nominated new or additional Minor Works Items.

(Note: such Variations may involve changes to scheduled rates / lump sums)

• Emergency Maintenance • Omission or decrease in work • Defective work accepted by the Principal at a reduced cost • Alterations to Public Utility Plant or Ancillary Works and Encroachments



• Quality of “prior work” • Provisional Sums • Dissemination of Traffic Changes

2.6.3 Progress Claims

Progress claims are to be made on a monthly basis. Claims are to be on a schedule of rates basis for quantities actually completed during the claim period except for lump sum activities, which are to be claimed on a pro rata basis and provisional sum activities which are to be claimed as a variation.

2.7 Initiation of Work

2.7.1 Intervention Levels/Response Times

Maintenance is to be undertaken once a Defect reaches the Agreed Intervention Level. This is not to say that in some in some instances and at some locations on the Network, maintenance may not be required for obvious safety reasons before the Agreed Intervention Level is reached. The Contract Documents will include an Intervention Level/Response Time Schedule for the Network, which will indicate any differences from the General Intervention Levels as set out in Part 6 of RMPC Open Competition. The Response Time for carrying out an Activity on each individual road within the Network, after the relevant Intervention Level is reached, shall be as set out in Part 6 of RMPC Open Competition except where otherwise indicated in the Intervention Level/Response Time Schedule for the Network. Response Times must be included in the Contractor’s Quality Plan. Because they are matched to quantities, it may be appropriate for Intervention Levels of one road to differ from that of another road within the same Network. The Intervention Levels may change over the Contract Period. However, they will only be changed by formal authorisation by the Principal. Initial Intervention Levels contained in Part 6 of RMPC Open Competition and Appendix 2 of Volume 3 - Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance are to be used for planning purposes. The use of Initial Intervention Levels is discussed in Attachment 5: RMPC Note No. 7 of Volume 1 - RMPC (Sole Invitee).

2.7.2 Department Initiation

The Principal may direct the Contractor to carry out scheduled Activities at specific locations within nominated time limits during the Contract Period. These “Direct Work Requests” covering timing and/or scope of work are to be undertaken by the Contractor in accordance with Clause 3.10 of the General Conditions of Contract and valued in accordance with Clause 7.4 of the General Conditions of Contract, if warranted.



3 Key Contractual Elements

3.1 Type of Contract

3.1.1 General

RMPC Open Competition can be categorised with regard to: • the duration of the Contract

• the composition of the Network

3.1.2 Duration

There are two different aspects relating to duration: • Unless agreed to in writing by the parties, there is a fixed Contract Period of twenty four (24)

months.

• The Principal guarantees to renew the RMPC for a further period of up to two (2) years provided the Contractor performs satisfactorily.

Grounds for earlier termination or modification to the agreement period could include: • by mutual agreement;

• fraud, maladministration or gross misconduct by either party (immediate termination);

• failure by either party to abide by the conditions of the Contract (possible termination);

• less than satisfactory performance by the Contractor (possible termination of the Contract at the end of the Contract Period); and

• unacceptable performance by the Contractor (possible termination).

3.1.3 Composition

The Network shall comprise those roads detailed in the Contract Documents. However, the Network may be subject to minor redistribution by the Principal. The composition of the Network may only be changed by the Principal. Such changes will be treated as a variation to the Contract.

3.1.4 Extent of Changes

For other than Commonwealth Government inspired changes to National Highways, any deletions from the Network must NOT be such as to significantly reduce the scope of Maintenance to be carried out by the Contractor.



3.2 Work included under RMPC Open Competition

3.2.1 Routine Maintenance

RMPC is predominantly an arrangement for carrying out Routine Maintenance of the Network. The types of routine maintenance Activities are detailed in the list contained in Part 6 of RMPC Open Competition and in Attachment 3 - Volume 1 RMPC Sole Invitee. Wherever possible Activities included in RMPC schedules should ensure that the agreements remain predominately output based. The Principal will, in the case of Routine Maintenance determine (as appropriate) Indicative Network Schedule Total(s) for: • Federally funded National Highways

• Other State - controlled roads

as well as discretionary percentage limits that apply to each Activity (on a Network basis) and or individual schedule totals where multiple road schedules are used. The Contractor, in carrying out its various roles, will be required to adapt to the changing maintenance needs of the Network by varying the various Network(s) Activity quantities and or individual schedule totals such that the relevant Network Schedule Total(s) are not exceeded. Changes outside the nominated discretionary limits require the Principal’s approval, as set out in Clause 2.6.1.

3.2.2 Emergency Maintenance

RMPC may also include Emergency Maintenance. The Contractor must advise the Principal no later than the next working day of Emergency Maintenance involving fatalities or where estimated expenditure is greater than $2000. There are two elements of Emergency Maintenance.

"Make safe" work This work is to be performed immediately by the Contractor once the emergency has been brought to the attention of the Contractor or the Contractor becomes otherwise aware of the emergency. The Principal must be notified as soon as possible after the emergency situation arises. The claim for the work undertaken is to be included in the next Progress Claim and the Principal will treat that part of the claim as a variation. There will be no scheduled amount within RMPC to pay for Emergency Maintenance Activities. These amounts will be funded from a District-wide Emergency Account on an as required basis and priced as a variation by reference to existing Activity scheduled rates, Standing Offers or Dayworks Schedules unless otherwise agreed.

Substantial further work After making the situation safe, the Contractor is not to undertake further work on the emergency activity until the Principal has been notified and the Contractor has received authorisation to proceed.

3.2.3 Dayworks/Variations

Dayworks Schedules include rates which may be used for payment of completed unscheduled Activities, Emergency Maintenance or other agreed work as variations. Clause 7 of the General Conditions of Contract sets out circumstances in which Dayworks apply.

3.2.4 Provisional Sums

Where Activity quantities are difficult to anticipate and pay on a unit rate or lump sum rate basis because of the unpredictable nature of the work, a Provisional Sum may be inserted in the Network Schedules. Part 6



of this document and Attachment 3 of Volume 1, RMPC Sole Invitee indicates those Activities that may be subject to a Provisional Sum method of payment. The procedure for using Provisional Sum Activities is as follows: • Provisional sums are allowed for those Activities that are difficult to estimate and pay on a lump

sum or unit rate basis in view of the unpredictable nature of the work.

• For the Activities identified, a Provisional Sum allowance is to be made in the schedule for the work based on records of past works and previous field inspections.

• When work is required during the year for these Activities, the Principal requests that the Contractor provides a quotation prior to carrying out the work.

• Work undertaken by the Contractor for a Provisional Sum is reimbursed as a variation and included in a payment claim for that that period.

• Quotations for the work may be based on RMPC Network Schedule rates, Standing Offer rates or Daywork rates.

The Principal may provide blanket approval for Provisional Sum work undertaken on a repetitive basis during the term of the Contract or for Provisional Sum work of relatively low dollar value where: • the risks associated with not obtaining a quotation are less than the cost of administering prior

approval,

• the Principal does not wish to delay the supplier unnecessarily for each component of work, and dissections of costs incurred are provided with each progress claim.

If this option is selected the Principal must included the appropriate details, say via the Supplementary Conditions of Contract.

3.2.5 Monitoring of Works On An Output Basis

The levels of unit rate/lump sum and Dayworks/Provisional Sum expenditure is to be monitored each year by the Principal to assess the extent to which RMPC’s facilitate delivery on an outputs basis. As a guide it is expected that no more than ten (10) per cent of the value of any individual Contract will be delivered on a Dayworks/Provisional sum basis.

3.3 Liability for Non-performance of Maintenance Normally under Queensland law, all "road construction authorities", which would include the Principal, Local Governments and other Contractors, would not be liable for damages for negligence for failing to carry out road maintenance (non-feasance). They are however liable where completed maintenance "creates a danger or adds to an existing danger" (mis-feasance). In addition, non-feasance does not cover situations where there is a failure to erect warning signs or where artificial structures (eg. tree roots) are involved. Under RMPC, the risks associated with non-performance of Maintenance for: • Defects that were unknown to the Contractor;

• Defects that were known to the Contractor and below the Agreed Intervention Level;

• Defects that were known to the Contractor and exceeded the Agreed Intervention Level but where the Contractor fulfilled its obligations under the Contract by prioritisation or by formally seeking a reallocation;

will be with the Principal. In addition, where the Contractor has performed its obligations in accordance with the Agreed Activity Standards, the risks will be with the Principal. This latter risk covers cases of non-feasance (for which neither the Principal nor Contractor would be liable in any case), as well as the prior cases where the Courts could construe non-performance as mis-feasance. The indemnity does not cover the situations where:



• the Contractor is negligent in carrying out any work; • the Contractor failed to identify any Defect which should have been identified as part of the

stewardship role; • the Contractor knows of the Defect but fails to remedy the Defect within the times prescribed

under the Contract or approved Activities Schedule; nor does it cover any legal costs that the Contractor may incur in responding to any consequential negligence claims. The best protection against liability for a Contractor carrying out Maintenance is: • to have demonstrated procedures for the identification of Defects and the scheduling of Activities to

remedy Defects according to safety considerations and funding constraints;

• to have appropriate Activity Standards; and

• to adhere to these procedures and standards.

Under no circumstances is identification or planning of Activities to be carried out on an ad hoc basis.

3.4 Quality, Safety & Environmental Requirements The Contractor is required to have a third party accredited (or better) Quality System to ISO 9002 together with the various Management Plans comprising the Quality System including the procedures to undertake the work. The Management Plans required are: • Quality Plan;

• Safety Plan including Traffic Management; and

• Environmental Management Plan.

Where the Contractor uses the Principal’s MMS then the Quality System for the systematic management of maintenance will be based on this system. The Contractor may use the Principal’s Activity Standards which are included in Part 6 of this document and Volume 3, RMPC Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance in developing the operational procedures and standards for Activities included in the Quality Plan for RMPC. The emphasis of the Safety Plan for RMPC revolves around the control and consequences of traffic in the vicinity of Maintenance operations and the provisions of the Workplace Health and Safety Act. The Contractor shall guide traffic safely past the work in accordance with Traffic Guidance Schemes based on the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). The Principal may require the Contractor to notify the public, by specific public notices, of significant changes to normal traffic in advance of work being undertaken. The Principal is committed to the implementation of Best Practice Environmental Management. Under current environmental legislation all members of the community are required to abide by a general environmental duty to ensure that environmental harm is not caused. Corporations and persons that cause environmental damage are liable for offences committed. To ensure the Principal complies with the Environmental Protection Act 1994 and other legal obligations (refer to the Principal’s publication “Queensland Environmental Legislation Register” 1997) each Contractor shall be responsible for: • environmental management associated with the works, including all sites;

• obtaining all licenses, permits and approvals and to pay all fees due as required by all relevant Acts, Regulations and local laws from the appropriate authorities and other Government Departments.



• environmental awareness training for all persons working for the Contractor;

• reporting of environmental incidents.

The Contractor is required to produce an Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance), EMP(Maintenance) in accordance with the Principal’s publication “Road Project Environmental Management Processes Manual” 1997. Contractors with an accredited Environmental Maintenance System may submit their EMP (Maintenance) in a format compatible with their existing system. The Principal may provide further information to the Contractor on the road system covered by the Contract to identify any additional specific environmental requirements to be included in the Contract and reflected in EMP(Maintenance). A Road Corridor Environmental Assessment (RCEA), i.e. a review of environmental factors within the road corridor, may be undertaken by the Principal on all road sections. Where an RCEA is undertaken by the Principal, the Principal shall install awareness signage within the road boundaries for significant environmental areas. The Principal will advise if there are any additional requirements to be included in the EMP (Maintenance) with regard to the RCEA and any signed areas. The Contractor is not required to carry out a detailed environmental impact assessment of the road corridor, however all legislative requirements shall apply.

3.5 Other Significant Features

3.5.1 Insurance

The Contractor is required to arrange its own insurance under RMPC. This includes: • Worker's Compensation;

• Insurance of the Works;

• Public Liability;

• Professional Indemnity (where works incorporating design is included).

3.5.2 Rework

The Contractor may use its discretion as a first approach, to undertake a low cost attempt to remedy a Defect. If that approach results in premature failure and requires a subsequent high cost thorough solution, then the Principal, where it agrees that this approach was an attempt to achieve best value for the Principal, will accept claims for payment by the Contractor for both approaches. To facilitate this approach the Principal must include both Activities in the Tender Network Schedules.

3.6 Dispute Resolution It is expected that any disputes that may arise under RMPC will be settled promptly. Clause 15 of the General Conditions of Contract details the dispute resolution process for the RMPC Open Competition.



4 The RMPC Process

4.1 Forming the Contract

4.1.1 General

In order to establish a Contract there are three (3) distinct processes that must occur: • Creation of the Offer Documents/Estimate;

• Expressions of Interest and/or Calling Offers; and

• Receiving Offers, Assessment and Acceptance

4.1.2 Creation of the Offer Documents/Estimate

A. Principal’s Responsibilities Offer Document and Forms are contained in Appendix 1.

Network Schedules (Part 2) These require completion by the Principal by inclusion of Network Schedule quantities

(amongst other schedules) after consideration of the following: • historical levels of maintenance expenditure;

• previous Maintenance Needs Survey (MNS);

• the current Departmental Road Network Strategy; and

• the Joint Maintenance Requirements Assessment (JMRA).

The JMRA will be based on an inspection of the network by both the Principal and the

previous RMPC Contractor staff and will also take into consideration: • current Forward List of Works for the Network;

• prior Maintenance Needs Surveys;

• any prior JMRA's;

• historical expenditure/quantities on the Network; and

• any relevant Works Program affecting the Network.

The JMRA’s should identify/quantify on a road basis for the full twenty four (24) months

Contract Period: • the nature of Maintenance required (based on observed Defects);



• Intervention Levels and corresponding estimated quantities for all Maintenance. (This will reflect the Activity Standards that are adopted by the Principal and is to take into account the previously listed information);

• any specific Response Time requirements;

• the relative priorities of the various Activities; and

• any Activities where a Provisional Sum is appropriate

Following the determination of Activities and Quantities from the above process the Principal is to develop an Estimate for the Network Schedule Total(s).

The development of an Estimate for the network Schedule Total(s) is an iterative process with the aim of matching: • Activity Standards;

• Agreed Intervention Levels/Response Times;

• Activity quantities; and

• Estimated Activity rates (obtained through benchmarking with other sectors), lump sums and provisional sums

such that the Indicative Network Schedule Total(s) budgeted for the network are not exceeded.

The above process is as depicted in Attachment 1 – Part 2 RMPC Systematic Approach to Managing Maintenance of RMPC Volume 1 Sole Invitee and described in RMPC Note No. 15 of RMPC Volume 1 Sole Invitee.

Schedule Summary (Form C6284.1) Schedules included in the Contract may be based on a number of criteria as detailed in Clause 2.2.2. The Total Contract amount is to include a separately identified amount for the Goods and Services Tax (GST) payable by the Principal to the Contractor. Form C6284.1 is to be completed and signed by the Contractor as a summary of details set out on Network Schedules Form (C6284.2).

Network Schedules (Form C6284.2) In preparing these schedules for inclusion in the Offer Documents the Principal must include the discretionary limits for various Activities and or individual Schedule totals where multiple Schedules are used. The quantities for the various Activities and allowances for Lump Sums and Provisional Sums are to be based on work anticipated for Year 1 of the Contract Period. Schedule Summary Form C6284.1 has provision for Year 2 Network Schedule(s) Total Dollars to be included by the Contractor. The totals are based on using the same totals as for Year 1 with the Contractor acknowledging they are subject to Contract adjustments. Form C6284.2 is to be completed and signed by the Contractor.

Intervention Level/Response Time Schedule (Form C6295)

• Intervention Levels

In preparing Form C6295, the Principal is to consider individual road requirements of the Network. Intervention Levels would generally apply on a Network basis but where there are individual requirements for specific roads these should also be noted and incorporated. • Response Times

Response Times for carrying out an Activity after the Intervention Level has been reached shall also be indicated in the Intervention Level/Response Time Schedule. Unless indicated otherwise in the Schedules the General Intervention Levels in Part 6 of RMPC Open Competition and Appendix 2 of Volume 3 – Guidelines for Undertaking Routine



Maintenance will be the Intervention Levels. It is a requirement that the documented Intervention Levels and Response Times as detailed in the Offer Documents are to be included in the Contractor’s Quality Plan. Should any conflict be identified in a Contractors Offer the Intervention Level and Response Times in the Intervention Level/Response Time Schedule shall apply. The Contractor should be requested to confirm the requirements of the Offer Documents where there are conflicts of any kind identified.

Form C6295 will be prepared by the Principal.

Daywork Schedules/Standing Offer Schedule (Form C6265 and C6265.1 respectively) The Principal shall prepare these schedules, for completion by the Contractor in its Offer, for items of manpower, plant, equipment and materials that are likely to be used by the Contractor in managing and carrying out work under the Contract.

Supplementary Conditions of Contract/Offer (C6267 and C6263 respectively) These will generally be initiated by the Principal to cater for local circumstances associated with the nature and operational procedures of the Contract.

Invitation for Offer/Offer/Agreement (Form C6262) In preparing Form C6262 the Principal is responsible for: • names, address, telephone, facsimile of Principal's delegate;

• advising location and time for offer lodgement, type of invitation and offer opening;

• advising the Contract Period and extension option period;

• defining the roads comprising the Network;

• advising minimum amounts to apply for Public Liability Insurance and Security for Performance;

• advising warranty period and maximum traffic delays for the work;

• defining documents comprising the Contract;

• determining the total funding to be made available i.e. the Indicative Network Schedule Total(s);

• list of Contract documents including schedules for completion; and

• other details specific to each Schedule

B. Contractor’s Responsibilities The Contractor is responsible for completing, signing and returning the Offer Documents, including providing details of:

• name, address, telephone, facsimile of Contractor and Delegate;

• ABN details;

• details of Insurance Policies;

• details of any Designer (if relevant).

• completion of Network Schedules (and others) by insertion of rates and prices and other details specific to each Schedule

4.1.3 Registration of Interest and/or Calling Offers

Once the offer documents are complete and ready for advertisement, the Offer process must be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions of Offer and Supplementary Conditions of



Offer. Further information as to Offer processes are found in the Department’s Contract Provisions Manual - Volume 2 for Roadworks Performance Contracts (RPC) and Project Delivery System Manual. The Principal may at this time initially call for Registration of Interest from Offerers to undertake the work. This two stage selection option may be exercised by the Principal to short list Offerers for the calling of Offers stage. This option if exercised will negate the costs involved with Offer preparation for those interested Offerers less likely to be awarded the work. The first stage of this two stage selection process is described in detail under Part 8 of RMPC Open Competition.

4.1.4 Receiving Offers, Assessment and Acceptance

Receiving Offers, assessment and acceptance is to be undertaken in accordance with the requirements of the General and Supplementary Conditions of Offer, Forms C6260 and C6263 respectively and, if required, the general principles, practices and processes contained in the Department’s publication Project Delivery System to ensure that best value is obtained.

4.2 Administration of the Contract

4.2.1 Contractor

A major aspect of Contract administration by the Contractor revolves around discretionary changes to the Network or individual Schedule(s) quantities within the nominated percentage limits to reflect the needs of the Network. When a discretionary change is made, the Contractor does not need to refer the matter to the Principal but any changes must be such that the Network Schedule Total(s) are not exceeded. When unexpected situations arise or there is no scope for further discretionary changes, the Contractor must obtain the Principal’s approval before the work is undertaken. The Contractor is also required to present Progress Reports regularly (every month or as otherwise directed by the Principal) to the Principal that highlight stewardship, management, financial or operational aspects for the Progress Period. The Principal may also require a formal Progress Meeting to discuss the content of a report.

4.2.2 The Principal

As part of the performance approach to RMPC it is necessary for the Principal to organise progress review meetings, certify progress claims as well as to provide detailed assessment of the Contractor for the Contract Review Meetings. It is desirable that the Contract Reviews be conducted every three months and at the completion of each Contract Period.

4.2.3 Additional Activities

The Contractor must advise the Principal of possible recommendations to add or change Activities to the existing list of Activity Types (Refer to Part 6 of RMPC Open Competition and Attachment 3 – Volume 1 RMPC Sole Invitee).

4.3 Renegotiations

4.3.1 Annual Cost Adjustment



Annual cost adjustment shall apply to rates and lump sums in the Network Schedule(s) and rates in the Dayworks and Standing Offer Schedules to reflect fluctuations in the cost of labour, materials and travelling expenses during the Contract Period. 4.3.2 Renewal For other than the initial Contract Period, there will be sufficient information available for the Principal to assess the Contractor's performance. It is essential then that the Performance Reports (C6292) be completed regularly and contain pertinent and relevant information for assessment purposes. It is expected the content of these Reports will heavily influence the Principal’s decision when considering whether to exercise the option to extend the Contract Period. The formal Contract Reviews provide a forum for demonstrating the stewardship features of RMPC Open Competition. This aligns with the RMPC Sole Invitee emphasis on adopting a co-operative working approach between the Principal and the Contractor and the fostering of a “partnering” approach in the relationship. Attachment 1 and RMPC Notes contained in Attachment 5 of RMPC Volume 1 Sole Invitee provide more information on RMPC processes and Stewardship features.


Offer Documents Road Maintenance Performance Contract (Open) Invitation No: District:

Offer Documents

Road Maintenance Performance Con

Road Maintenance Services

Part 1 Vers 1.0 June 2001

tract (Open)



Offer Documents Road Maintenance Performance Contract (Open)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Appendix 1 – Corporate Offer Documents / Forms Part 1 Invitation for Offer / Offer / Agreement Part 2 Schedules Part 3 General Conditions of Offer / Supplementary Conditions of Offer Part 4 General Conditions of Contract / Supplementary Conditions of Contract Part 5 Brief Part 6 Performance Standards Part 7 Other Documents (Progress Claim / List of Reference Documents) Part 8 Registration of Interest




Part 1

Invitation for Offer / Offer / Agreement

Standard Forms

Document Reference

Number of Pages

Title (or Description) of Document

C6262

7

Invitation for Offer / Offer / Agreement

RMPC Open Competition 87.104.2 (June 2001) Invitation for Offer/Offer/Agreement - Road Maintenance Performance Contract (Open)

Invitation Number

Summary Sheet District

Invitation for Offer (pages 2 and 3)

Forwarded to Offeror Offer (page 4)

Received from Offeror (with completed schedules)

Revised Offer

Revised Offer Letter of Acceptance

Sent to Contractor Agreement (pages 5, 6 and 7)

Signed by Contractor

Signed by Principal’s Delegate

Part 1 Vers 1.0 C6262

June 2001 Page 1 of 7

Date




Invitation for Offer - Road Maintenance Performance Contract (Open) Name & Address of Invitee Invitation Number

Public Invitation

Private Invitation

Offer Lodgement Box/Opening Location (where applicable)

Description of the Work (including location) The work described in the documents mentioned in the List of Documents below incl(without limiting what is contained in those documents):

List of Documents Offers are invited for the execution of road maintenance services in accordance with

Part 1 Invitation of Offer/Offer Form/Agreement

Part 2 Schedules

Part 3 General Conditions of Offer/ Supplementary Conditions of Offer

Part 4 General Con Supplementa

Part 5 Brief

Part 6 Performance

Part 7 Other Docum

Payment: Schedule of Rates/Lump Sum – cost adjustment for rise and

as indicated in the Offer Documents Contract Period

For a period of 24 months. The Principal has an optPeriod for a further period of up to

Any queries should be referred to – Approved Officer

Telephone Number

Signature of Approved Officer

Position

Public Opening

Private Opening

Closing time for Offers

Time

Date

uding

the following documents:

ditions of Contract/ ry Conditions of Contract

Standards

ents

fall in prices will apply

ion to extend the Contract 24 months.

Fax Number

Date




Network Description Invitation Number

National Highways Other State-controlled Roads

Road Number

Description

Approximate Length

(c’way kms)

Road Number

Description

Approximate Length (c’way

kms)

Note: Interchange ramps are not included in the above carriageway lengths, but included in the maintenance network

Security for Performance (CI 6.8)

Minimum Amount $

Insurance (CI 8.4) Public Liability Minimum Amount $

Warranty Period (CI 4.5)

Traffic Delays (CI 11.4) Maximum Traffic Delays will be Minutes, except for

Road Section Description Maximum

Delay (minutes)

Road Section Description

Maximum Delay

(minutes)

References to clauses are to the General Conditions of Contract




Offer - Road Maintenance Performance Contract (Open)

Invitation Num

I/We

Individual Partnership

Business

Company

Name (Full Name in Block Letters)

Of Individual

All Proprietors’/ Partners’ addresses Principal Place of Business

Street Address

Austr

Postal Address

offer to carryroad mainteservices in awith the OffeDocuments.

Authorisation

Name Telephone Nu

Signature Date

Insurance Worker’s Compensation

Policy Number

Expiry Date

Public Liability

Policy Number

Expiry Date

$

ber

Trustee Company

Registered Office of Company

Please supply the alian Business Number (ABN)

out the nance ccordance r

mber Facsimile Number

RMPC Open Competition 87.104.2 (June 2001) Agreement - Road Maintenance Performance Contract (Open)

Agreement between

Invitation Num

referred to as the Contractor, and

The STATE of QUEENSLAND acting through the Queensland De

referred to as the Principal

Recitals

1. The Principal invited the Contractor to offer to perform the road mainwith the Contract Documents.

2. The Contractor has offered to carry out the road maintenance service

Contract Documents.

Agreement

Payment under the Contract will be part schedule of rates / part lump sum.

The Contract Period will be for twenty four months from

The Principal has an option to extend the Contract Period for a further perio The Principal agrees with the Contractor and the Contractor agrees with

with all the conditions and matters as set out in or reasonably inferred from The Contractor agrees that it will not commence road maintenance oper

Contract Period but must commence defect logging and establishment prio

Authorisation

For the Contractor Name/Position

Signature

For the Principal

Name/Position

Signature



ber

partment of Main Roads

tenance services in accordance

s in accordance with the

to

d of up to two years.

the Principal that they will comply this Agreement.

ations until the start date of the r to this date.

Date

Date




List of Contract Documents

Invitation Number

A. This Agreement dated

B. Completed Schedules, etc

Description Identification Description Identification

Offer Form Network Schedule Summary Network Schedules for National Highways and Other State-controlled Roads for Years 1 and 2 Offer Schedules 1 to 6

C6262

(pages 4, 5) C6284.1

C6284.2

C6268.1

Daywork Schedule Planned Cash Flow Schedule

C6265

C6266

C. Conditions, Brief and similar documents that apply directly

Description Identification Description Identification

Invitation for Offer General Conditions of Offer Supplementary Conditions of Offer General Conditions of Contract Supplementary Conditions of Contract

C6262

(pages 2, 3) C6260

C6263

C6261

C6267

Brief Performance Standards

Date




D. Documents incorporated by Reference

Description Identification

Road Maintenance Performance Contracts – Volume 3 – Guidelines Maintenance Responsibility Diagram Guidelines for District Agreement between Local Government Association of Queensland Inc. and Department of Main Roads for Cost Sharing based on Responsibilities Within State-controlled Roads Department of Main Roads Standard Specifications – Third Edition 1999 Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) – 1995 Department of Main Roads Standard Drawings – 1976 Agricultural Chemicals Distribution Control Act 1966 - 1968, Commercial Operators Manual Rural Land Protection Act – 1985 Workplace Health and Safety Act Pavement Design Manual – Second Edition – 1990 Environmental Protection Act – 1994

87.104.3 (3/00)

3/00

E. Notices to Offerors

The terms of the following Notices to Offerors are part of the Contract




Part 2

Schedules

Standard Forms

Document Reference

Number of Pages

Title (or Description) Of Document

C6284.1 C6284.2 C6265 C6265.1 C6266 C6295 C6268.1

C6089

1 2 1 1 1 1 6

1

Schedule Summary Network Schedules Network Daywork Rates Standing Offer Rates (for possible Activities/Scheme) Planned Cash Flow Intervention Level / Response Time Schedule Offer Schedules: • Track Record • Allocation of Key Personnel, Plant & Equipment • Facilities and Resources • Resume Offerors Understanding of the Scope of

the Road Maintenance Services • Mobilisation Strategy • Offerors of Quality, Safety, Traffic Management

and Environmental Management Plan Outlines

Proposed Stockpile Sites


Schedule Summary

- Road Maintenance Performance Contract (Open)

Summary of Schedules/Lump Sums Invitation Nu

Di

Start Up-Process (lump sum amount) (See E)

Office/Depot Establishment (lump sum amount) (See F)

Quality / Safety / Environmental Management Plans Preparation and Maintenance (lump sum amount) (See AG)

Year 1

National Highways Network Schedule 1 Total

Pages Other State-controlled

Roads Network Schedule 21 Tota

Year 2 (Use same totals as for Year 1, but acknowledge they are subject to C

National Highways Network Schedule Total

Other State-controlled Roads Network Schedule Total

Office/Depot Disestablishment (lump sum amount) (See F)

Contract Value

Goods and Services Tax TOTAL CONTRACT AMOU

Authorisation (For the Contractor) Name Position

Signature Date

* Reference to Clauses are to the General (one alpha) and Supplementary Conditions of Offer (two alpha characters)


Page 1 of 14

mber

strict

$

$

$

$

l $

ontract adjustments)

$

$

$

$

$

NT $

Page

of

C6284.1




Page 2 of 14

Network Schedule


Fund Category Invitation Number

1. National Highway District

2. Other State-controlled Roads

Network Schedule

Note: Show amounts in whole dollars only. Treat 50 cents and over as n

Discretiona

Activity No.

Description of Activity Unit Unit Rate

$ ¢ Estimated Quantity +%

Total / Carried For

Fund Category


Signature Date

* Out of Hours Surcharge is for work undertaken at times other than normal wobut during normal working hours. For Standard Activities required at night (excthose nominated in the above Schedule); the site should be made safe using A452 (if required). Should the site remain unsafe to the road user after Activity Nwork, the Activity must be completed using normal Schedule Activities.

ext dollar.

ry

-%

Extended Amount

($)

Out of * Hours

Surcharge %

ward $

Total $

Page of

rking days, luding ctivity No. o. 452 C6284.2



Network Schedule


Fund Category Invitation Numbe

1. National Highway Distric

2. Other State-controlled Roads

Network Schedule

Note: Show amounts in whole dollars only. Treat 50 cents and over as ne

Discretion

Activity No. Description of Activity Unit

Unit Rate

$ ¢ Estimated Quantity +%

Amount Carried Forward from Page (where applicable)

Total / Carried Fo

Fund Category


Signature Date

* Out of Hours Surcharge is for work undertaken at times other than normal workinduring normal working hours. For Standard Activities required at night (excludinnominated in the above Schedule); the site should be made safe using Activity Nrequired). Should the site remain unsafe to the road user after Activity No. 452 wActivity must be completed using normal Schedule Activities.


Page 3 of 14

r

t

xt dollar.

ary

-%

Extended Amount

($)

Out of * Hours

Surcharge %

rward $

Total $

Page of

g days, but g those o. 452 (if ork, the

C6284.2 June 2001 Page 2 of 2



Page 4 of 14

Daywork Schedule


Invitation Nu

D

Daywork Rates – Personnel, Plant, Equipment and Materi

Reference No. Description Unit Base Rate

($) Profit (%) O

Note: Dayworks Base rates in this Schedule for plant shall include and are deemed

• all operator costs including, without limitation, mobilisation costs, trawages and salaries, site and leave allowances, worker’s compensatiosuperannuation costs;

• all mobilisation and demobilisation costs, fuel costs, maintenance andlimitation, the costs of replacement parts and lubricants; and

• all necessary safety equipment. Notes: (i) The above Base rates should not include any profit allowanc

which must be stated in the Profit percentage column arespectively.

(ii) Machinery classification must be in accordance with Australia(iii) All personnel, plant and materials that are expected to be us

schedule. (iv) The out of hours surcharge percentage should be applied to

is carried out outside the nominated working days and accordance with the Contract. No stand down will apply to this

only when the plant and equipment are actively engaged in w under this Contract.

Authorisation (for the Contractor) Name Position

Signature Date

mber

istrict

als

verhead (%)

Extended Unit Rate

($)

Out of Hours

Surcharge (%)

to include:

velling and accommodation costs, n, payroll tax, fringe benefits tax,

servicing costs including, without

e or on-site and off-site overheads nd Overhead percentage column

n Standard AS 2868. ed on Site must be included in the

the extended unit rate where work during normal working hours in Contract. The rates will apply

ork operations provided for

Page of

C6265 June 2001

Page 1 of 1


Standing Offer Rates - Road Maintenance Performance Contract (Open)

Invitation N

Standing Offer Rates

Activity / Item No. Description

Note:

• Activities not included in the Network Schedule(s) but with some pvariation or required due to a Reallocation should be included as Sta

Authorisation (for the Contractor) Name Position

Signature Date


Page 5 of 14

umber

District

Unit Rate ($)

ossibility of being ordered as a nding Offer Rates.

Page of

C6265.1 June 2001

Page 1 of 1



Page 6 of 14

Programmed Expenditure Flow


Contractor Invitation N

Network Schedule

Month/Year of Payment

Forecast Expenditure per month

Accumulative Total (all Activities)

($)

Amount ClaimedMonth

($)

July (1) August (2) September (3) October (4) November (5) December (6) January (7) February (8) March (9) April (10) May (11) June (12)

Am

ount

$

(For

ecas

t and

Act

ual E

xpen

ditu

re)

Gra

phic

al R

epre

sent

atio

n

Month 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Authorisation (For the Contractor) Name Position

Signature Date

umber

District

for Actual Expenditure (Accumulative Total) ($)

9 10 11 12

Page

of

C6266 June 2001

Page 1 of 1


Intervention Level/Response Time Schedule - Road Maintenance Performance Contract (Open)

These values apply to Network Schedule

Invitation N

Agreed Intervention Levels Response Time

Will be the General Intervention Levels as specified in the RMPC Vol. 3 - Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance, except for the following.

Response Times wiVol. 3 – Guidelines Maintenance, excep

Road Number/Description

Defect Code

Agreed Intervention

Level

Defect / Activity Code

ReT

Traffic Delays Maximum Traffic Delays will be minutes, except for

Road Number / Description

Delay (minutes) Ro

Number / D

Authorisation For the Contractor Name / Position

Signature

For the Principal Name / Position

Signature


Page 7 of 14

umber

District

ll be as specified in the RMPC for Undertaking Routine t for the following.

sponse ime

Exceptions / Comments

Eg. Road Number/Section

ad escription

Delay (minutes)

Date

Date

C6295 June 2001

Page 1 of 1



Page 8 of 14

Offer Schedule 1


Invitation N

Track Record

Please provide brief details in accordance with Section AA4 of the Su

Offer.


Signature Date

umber

District

pplementary Conditions of

Page of

C6268.1 June 2001

Page 1 of 7



Page 9 of 14

Offer Schedule 2


Invitation Number

Allocation of Key Personnel, Plant and Equipment District

Please provide brief details in accordance with Section AA4 of the Supplementary Conditions of

Offer.


Signature Date

Page of

C6268.1 June 2001

Page 2 of 7



Page 10 of 14

Offer Schedule 3


Invitation

Facilities and Resources

Please provide brief details in accordance with Section AA4 of the S

Offer.


Signature Date

N

u

umber

District


Page of

C6268.1 June 2001

Page 3 of 7


Offer Schedule 4


Invitation N

Resumè of Offeror’s Understanding of the Scope of the Road Maintenance Services


Offer.


Signature Date


Page 11 of 14

umber

District


Page of

C6268.1 June 2001

Page 4 of 7



Page 12 of 14

Offer Schedule 5


Invitation N

Mobilisation Strategy


Offer.


Signature Date

umber

District


Page of

C6268.1 June 2001

Page 5 of 7


Offer Schedule 6


Invitation N

Quality Plan / Safety Plan including Traffic Management / Environmental Management Plan Outlines


Offer.


Signature Date


Page 13 of 14

umber

District


Page of

C6268.1 June 2001

Page 6 of 7



Page 14 of 14

Proposed Stock Pile Sites for Principal’s Recovered Materials

Invitation N

No Road Chainage Area (m2)


Signature Date

umber

District

Description

Page of

C6268.1 June 2001

Page 7 of 7




Part 3

General Conditions of Offer/ Supplementary Conditions of Offer




General Conditions of Offer – RMPC Open Competition A. Definitions & Interpretations

In these Conditions and in the Offer Documents (as defined) all words and expressions shall have the meaning assigned to them in the General Conditions of Contract - Road Maintenance Performance Contract (Open), and the following words and expressions shall have the meanings assigned here to them, except where the context otherwise requires: • "Offer" means an Offer by the Offeror to

perform the services in accordance with the Offer Documents.

• "Offeror" means any person who submits

an Offer to the Principal in the form of an Offer - Road Maintenance Performance Contract (Open).

• "Offer Documents" means the documents

listed in the Invitation for Offer which are issued by the Principal to the Offeror for the purpose of inviting the Offeror to make an Offer.

• "Conforming Offer" means an Offer which: (a) contains all the information and other

requirements specified in the Offer Documents, and any Notice(s) to Offeror;

(b) contains only the information and other

requirements specified in the Offer Documents, and any Notice(s) to Offeror and contains no additional information or conditions;

(c) contains no alternative proposals for the

performance of the work referred to in the Offer Documents:

(d) has been received by the addressee by the

specified closing time and date. • "Notice to Offeror" means a notice issued

by the Principal to the Offeror relating to the Offer Documents after the date of issue of the Offer Documents by the Principal to the

Offeror but before the date of the written acceptance by the Principal.

• References to clause numbers are references to numbered clauses of these General Conditions.

• The singular includes the plural and vice

versa and words of any gender include the other genders.

B. General

B1 All liability for Stamp Duties shall be with the

Principal. B2 No unsuccessful Offeror shall have any

claim against the Principal on any ground whatsoever (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) arising out of or in any way connected with the manner in which Offers are invited or considered by the Principal, the discussion or negotiation by the Principal with any Offeror concerning any Offer or the failure by the Principal to consider or accept any Offer.

B3 By lodging an Offer, the Offeror :-

• unqualifiedly accepts these General Conditions of Offer;

• acknowledges that the Offeror has

not relied upon any promise, representation, statement, document, information, warranty or undertaking made, provided or given by the Principal or by any person on behalf of the Principal (whether written, oral or by conduct) which is not expressly set out or referred to in the documents mentioned in the List of Documents in the Invitation for Offer form or in the Offer itself.

B4 Subject to the provisions of any State or

Federal law dealing with freedom of information, the Principal shall not be obliged to disclose to any Offeror the contents of any Offer from another Offeror.

B5 The Principal reserves the right in its

absolute discretion to withdraw at any time and for any reason whatsoever the Invitation for Offer from all or any persons to whom it has been extended or given.

C. Offers Generally

C1 Offers must:




• be in writing on a duly completed Offer form (Form C6262 – page 4) supplemented by other nominated signed and dated documents;

• submit an original Offer marked

“Original” and three bound copies and one loose copy marked “copy”;

• where the Offeror is an individual –

state the Offeror’s full name and address and the registered business name (if any) under which the individual trades;

• where the Offeror is a firm or

partnership - state the business name under which the firm or partnership trades and the full names and addresses of all proprietors of the firm or all partners of the partnership and the address of the principal place of business of the firm or partnership;

• where the Offeror is a company -

state the full name of the company and the address of the company's registered office;

• in all cases - state the Offeror's street

and postal addresses in Queensland for delivery or service of notices, court documents (including originating proceedings) and other documents and things;

• in all cases – state the Offeror’s

Australian Business Number (ABN); • where the Offeror is a joint venture, -

state the business name under which the joint venture trades and the full names and addresses of all joint venturers, the address of the joint venture and a copy of the joint venture agreement;

• state all money amounts in Australian

currency; • have any alterations initialled by or on

behalf of the Offeror;

C2 The Principal shall nominate the closing time for Offers and may change such closing time by giving written notice to the Offerer.

C3 Any Offer lodged after the nominated

closing time for Offers will not be considered, but if there is evidence

satisfactory to the Principal that a late Offer had been despatched to the nominated Offer Lodgement Box/Opening Location in sufficient time to reach that place under normal circumstances and was still in the course of delivery at the specified closing time, then the Principal may consider that Offer. Franking machine stamps will not constitute satisfactory evidence or proof of the time or date of posting of an Offer.

C4 There shall be adjustment to the Contract

Amount as a result of fluctuations in the cost of labour and material during the Contract Period as described in the Offer Documents.

C5 Any Offer or alternative Offer shall remain

open for consideration by the Principal for a period of four months.

• The Offeror may withdraw its Offer after

the expiration of, but not during, this period.

• The Offer shall be deemed not to have

lapsed by reason of any discussions or correspondence, including (without limitation) any counter-offers which occur during the Offer validity period.

C6 Any clarification issued to the Offeror

concerning any aspect of the Offer Documents shall be issued in the form of Notice(s) to Offeror which may be issued by the Principal before the date of the letter of acceptance to revise, amend or modify any part of the Offer Documents.

D. Network Schedules to be Completed

D1 The Offeror must complete the Network

Schedules for National Highways and other State-controlled roads for the Contract Period by providing the unit rates to perform the Activity quantities and lump sums as set out in the Schedules and in accordance with the Activity Standards as set out in the Performance Standards.

• The quantities for the various Activities

have been estimated to correspond to the Intervention Levels as set out in the Performance Standards.

• The Planned Cash Flow Schedule shall

be consistent with the Offeror's Network Schedules.




• The rates and lump sums offered by the Offeror are to include and shall be deemed to include all costs of complying with the Offer Documents and that associated with carrying out all matters and doing all things necessary for the due and proper performance and completion of the work under the Contract, including but not limited to licence fees, royalty payments, all charges, taxes and stewardship, etc.

• Notwithstanding the previous paragraph

of D1, individual rates and lump sums offered by the Offereror in the Schedules shall be exclusive of the Federal Government Goods and Service Tax.

E. Start-up Process

The Contractor should include the following items in its assessment of the lump sum amounts for Start-up Process (not included in Establishment costs) :- • set up management/supervision procedures • training of employees, agents and sub-

contractors • personnel mobilisation • initial inspection of the Network and

recording of Defects • any other actions

F. Office/Depot Establishment/ Disestablishment

The Contractor should include the following items in its assessment of the lump sum amounts for Office/Depot Establishment/Disestablishment. Depot may include any Site facilities eg. Stockpiles used during the Contract Period. Office/Depot Establishment includes the cost of :- • Any furnishings

• Initial transport of equipment, plant,

materials and furnishings to the Office/ Depot (other than materials used for Activities)

• Installation costs associated with any services eg. telephone, sewerage etc

• Capital cost of any necessary Depot

improvements

Office/Depot Disestablishment includes the cost of:- • Disposal of furnishings, equipment • Final cleaning up of the Depot • Any required decontamination of Depot

G. Negotiations after Closing of Offers

G1 The Principal may enter into oral or written

negotiations with any Offeror regarding that Offeror's Offer after the closing time for Offers.

• Where an Offeror or the Principal is

prepared to amend or add to the Offer Documents, this must be done in writing. Where such an amended Offer is made, any Offer previously lodged will remain unaffected and open for acceptance in accordance with Clause C5

G2 In particular, an Offeror and the Principal

may negotiate to modify Network Schedules by a consideration of:

• whether the quantities should be varied

(with commensurate adjustment of Intervention Levels);

• whether Response Times should be

varied;

• whether Activity Standards should be modified.

G3 Notwithstanding any other requirements of

the Offer Documents, the Principal may require an Offeror to submit additional information to allow further consideration of its Offer before any Offer is accepted.

G4 Should an Offeror fail to submit any of the

additional information so required by the date and time stipulated by the Principal, the Principal may decline to consider the Offer any further.




H. Consideration and Acceptance of Offers

H1 Offers will be opened in public immediately

after the closing times for Offers. H2 The Principal is not bound or required to

consider or accept the lowest or any Offer or alternative offer.

H3 An Offer will not be deemed to have been

accepted unless a letter of acceptance from the Principal confirming such acceptance has been handed to the Offeror or posted to or left at the Offeror's address appearing in its Offer.

H4 Unless otherwise stated in the Principal's

letter of acceptance, the Contract will come into force:

(a) (where the letter of acceptance is

handed to the Offeror) on the date the letter of acceptance is handed to the Offeror;

(b) (where the letter of acceptance is left

at the Offeror's address appearing in the Offer) on the date the letter of acceptance is left at the Offeror's address appearing in the Offer;

(c) (where the letter of acceptance is

posted to the Offeror's address appearing in the Offer) on the date the letter of acceptance is posted to the Offeror's address appearing in the Offer

(d) as the case may be.

H5 Unsuccessful Offerors will be advised that

they were not successful and, on personal application or application in writing, will be advised of the name of the successful Offeror.

I. Nonconforming and Alternative Offers

I1 Any Offer may be rejected if it:

(a) does not comply with the requirements of or if it contains provisions not required or allowed by the Offer Documents; or

(b) contains alterations or erasures or

sets out prices which are not clearly and legibly stated.

I2 The Offeror may submit alternative offers but only if it has also submitted an Offer which conforms in all respects with the requirements of the Offer Documents and the Principal reserves the right to consider and accept any alternative offer.

I3 Where one or more alternative offers are

submitted, the Offeror must:

(a) mark the Conforming Offer and all copies thereof "Conforming Offer";

(b) submit an Original-Alternative Offer

marked "Original-Alternative Offer" and three bound copies and one loose copy marked "copy" and:

• in the event of any discrepancies

between the sets, the set marked "Original - Alternative Offer" shall prevail;

• if more than one alternative offer

is submitted, each set of each alternative offer must be further marked so as to distinguish it from the other alternative offers (for example, "Original-Alternative Offer 1");

(c) sign all 5 sets of each alternative

offer.

J. Withdrawal and Lapsing of Offer

J1 Offers may be withdrawn at any time prior

to the nominated closing time for Offers by notice in writing to the Principal. Such Offers will be set aside for collection by the Offeror after the opening of Offers.




Supplementary Conditions of Offer – RMPC Open Competition AA. Assessment AA1. Assessment

(a) Two stage Assessment Process (includes

Registration of Interest Stage) The Principal’s assessment of the Registered Applicant’s Offers will be based on: • Financial criteria (80% weighting)

• Non-financial criteria (20% weighting) as described below.

Non-financial criteria will be further broken down to: Key Personnel, etc. (60% weighting) Facilities and Resources (10% weighting) Understanding of Scope (10% weighting) Mobilisation Strategy (0% weighting) Quality Plan, etc. Outlines (20% weighting) (b) One Stage Assessment Process The Principal's assessment of the Offers will be based on: • Financial criteria (70% weighting) • Non-financial criteria (30% weighting) as described below. Non-financial criteria will be further broken down to: Track Record (20% weighting) Key Personnel, etc (20% weighting) Facilities and Resources (10% weighting) Understanding of Scope (30% weighting) Mobilisation Strategy (5% weighting) Quality Plan, Safety Plan and

Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance) Outlines (15% weighting)

and in accordance with the methodology described in Assessment of Offers for RMPC (Open) as attached in these documents.

AA2. Financial Assessment Criteria

Financial assessment will be based on the contents of: • Schedule Summary (incl lump sum items) • Network Schedules • Planned Annual Cash Flow Schedule for

the Contract Period • Dayworks Schedule

Offerors must include all lump sum amounts and rates in the appropriate spaces in the Schedules. The assessment methodology for financial criteria will be as follows: • The submitted Total Contract Amounts be

adjusted to equalise the Offers in respect of provisional sums and potential variations using submitted Day Work Rates and then compared directly against one another; and

• Sensitivity analyses based on changes to

estimated quantities of various activities be undertaken.

AA3. Non Financial Assessment Criteria

Non-financial assessment will be based on the contents of the following mandatory schedules; Offer Schedule 1 Track Record

(maintenance and construction)

Offer Schedule 2 Allocation of Key

Personnel, Plant and Equipment

Offer Schedule 3 Facilities and Resources Offer Schedule 4 Résumé of the Offeror's

Understanding of the Scope of the Road Maintenance Services

Offer Schedule 5 Mobilisation Strategy Offer Schedule 6 Quality Plan/Safety Plan/

Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance) Outlines




Note: Offer Schedule 1 Track Record is not required in a two stage selection process.

The assessment of the non financial Offer Schedules will be undertaken in accordance with AA4 using a comparative analysis technique known as the Matrix Comparative Method. The Matrix Comparative Method compares the attractiveness of each Applicant in a comparative scoring technique where Applicants are directly compared against each other, rather than being measured against a pre-set scale of expectations. In comparing Applicants the following guidelines apply. • Where two Applicants (Applicant 1 and

Applicant 2) are considered to be generally equivalent in their relative capability or attractiveness to the Department in respect of a particular issue, then both Registrants score one point in respect of that issue.

• Where Applicant 1 is considered to be

superior to Applicant 2 in its relative capability or attractiveness to the Department in respect of a particular issue, then Applicant 1 scores two points and Applicant 2 scores zero points in respect of that issue. Note that ‘superior’ indicates that a significant and meaningful differentiation between the two Applicants can be identified.

• Where Applicant 1 is considered to be

inferior to Applicant 2 in its relative capability or attractiveness to the Department in respect of a particular issue, then Applicant 1 scores zero points and Applicant 2 scores two points in respect of that issue. Note that ‘superior’ indicates that a significant and meaningful differentiation between the two Applicants can be identified.

AA4. Explanation of Non Financial Assessment Criteria

To assist Offerors in completing non financial Offer Schedules an explanation of these schedules is provided below: Offerors which are unable to demonstrate that they satisfy the "mandatory requirements" (as specified in sub-section (1), (5) and (6)) will be deemed to have submitted non-conforming offers and such offers may not be further considered.

Offerors shall complete Offer Schedule 1 providing all relevant information on applicable work by the Offeror or its nominated subcontractor(s). Note: Offer Schedule 1 is not required in a

two stage selection process.

(1) Track Record (maintenance and construction)

As a mandatory requirement, Offerors

must be able to demonstrate recent experience on construction and maintenance works of the type included in this contract of value greater than (insert $ value) over a twelve month or lessor period.

Two or three examples for each of

maintenance and construction projects will be sufficient for Offer Schedule 1.

It is important that the work listed in Offer

Schedule 1 should demonstrate recent experience (after 1995) in the activities required by this project.

The following information is required for

each example listed:

(a) Job Description (b) Name of Principal (c) Name and Telephone Number of

Principal's Contact Officer (d) Date Commenced, Contract/Works

Completion Date, Actual Completion Date

(e) Contract/Works Value at Award,

Contract/Works Value at Completion, reason for any major differences

(f) Aspects of jobs relevant to this

project (g) Any other points considered

relevant to this project, e.g. ability to mobilise within the specific time allowed.

(2) Key Personnel, Plant and Equipment

Allocation. Offerors must demonstrate that they are

able to provide key personnel who possess sufficient qualifications,




experience and availability to satisfactorily perform the management, supervisory and operational roles required under the Contract.

• list the key personnel who shall carry

out the three roles under the Road Maintenance Services together with relevant qualifications

• indicate the number of persons

engaged in field maintenance activities

• indicate the gang size and number of

gangs by grouping within relevant labour categories

• estimate the percentage of the total

time that each person will be engaged in the particular type of work during the Contract Period

• nominated proposed sub contractors

These details must be reflected in the organisational structure within the Quality Plan prepared by the Contractor. Offerors shall provide a copy of the organisational structure proposed with their Offer.

Offerors shall provide details of the proposed plant and equipment to be utilised in performing the Road Maintenance Services. This schedule shall include a description of the proposed plant, notation whether owned or leased as well as its classification in accordance with Australian Standard AS2868. An estimate of use by percentage of total time for the Contract Period shall be stated for each item of plant and equipment. The schedule shall include but shall not be limited to those items designated in the Dayworks Schedule.

(3) Facilities and Resources The Offeror shall provide brief details of

facilities and relevant sources particular to this Contract including but not limited to:

• site depot, • office facilities, • office management software, • emergency facilities,

• sources of roadmaking materials (including any proposed Subcontractors)

• communication facilities, and • safety equipment.

(4) Résumé of Offeror's Understanding of the

Scope of the Road Maintenance Services.

The Offeror shall provide a brief résumé

of its understanding of the scope of the Road Maintenance Services and particularly the various roles of the Contractor. The résumé shall include information which sets out the methodology for assessment of road defects and programming of activities. The résumé shall also include a brief summary of the proposed implementation and contents of a maintenance management system in relation to the Offeror's proposed work under the Contract.

(5) Mobilisation Strategy The Offeror must indicate with a Plan

how it proposes to be ready to commence the Road Maintenance Services after receipt of any letter of acceptance. Matters to be addressed should include but not be limited to the following:

• time required (a minimum of 3 weeks

and a maximum of 6 weeks after the date of the letter of acceptance applies);

• start-up process • depot/office establishment; • personnel, plant and equipment; • Quality Plan/Safety Plan; • set up a systematic management

approach and support management.

(6) Offeror's Quality Plan/Safety Plan /

Environmental Management Plan Outlines

The Offeror must have, or provide

satisfactory evidence that a third party accredited (or better) Quality System for




Maintenance activities will be in place by the date for letter of acceptance.

The Offeror shall provide an outline of its

Quality Plan for both the Management/Supervision and Operational aspects of the Road Maintenance Services including but not limited to the following:

• identification of Defects • planning and scheduling of Activities

(including prioritisation strategy

• reporting on completed Activities

• Activity procedures • Environmental management

The Offeror shall provide an outline of its proposed Safety Plan for carrying out the road Maintenance Services including: • applicable requirements of the

Workplace Health & Safety Act • measures to ensure the safety of the

public

• measures for traffic guidance

AA5. Additional Information

Clear, concise submissions addressing the non financial assessment criteria in point form in the supplied schedules is preferred. Offerors may submit additional documentation supporting their submissions for specific criteria but this is discouraged. If considered necessary, however, additional information should be inserted into the Offer immediately following the respective schedule. Offerors must complete and attach all schedules with their Offers. AB. Reference Documents

AB1. Nature of Documents

A list of reference documents will be provided to the Offeror with the Offer Documents. Document availability is as follows:

(a) Copies of these reference documents will be made available to the Offeror on request.

(b) These reference documents on the list

may be inspected by the Offeror. The list and the documents have been provided as background information for the Offeror and do not form part of the Offer Documents or Contract Documents. The list and documents have been made available in good faith and no responsibility is accepted by the Principal for any interpretations or conclusions drawn by the Offerors in respect of the list or the documents or any information contained in or omitted from them. The list and the documents were not compiled for the purpose of enabling the Offeror to prepare its Offer and the Offeror should not rely on such information in preparing its Offer. Any Offer must be based on the Offeror's own investigations and determinations. The Principal does not warrant or make any representation as to the accuracy, adequacy or completeness of the list or the documents or the information contained in the documents. The Principal shall not be liable (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) in respect of any fact, matter, thing or claim arising out of or in any way connected with the provision of the list or the documents to the Offeror or with anything contained in or omitted from the list or the documents.

AB2. Types of Maintenance

Various reference documents (Annual Reports) use the following terms which have the following meanings (unless the context indicates a contrary intention):- • "Rehabilitation" does not include Routine

Maintenance or Emergency Maintenance as referred to in the Performance Standards.

• "Special Maintenance", "Program

Maintenance" may be included in Routine Maintenance as referred to in the Performance Standards.

• "Ordinary Maintenance" includes Routine

and Emergency Maintenance.




AC. Estimated Quantities

ACI. Estimates of Quantities

The Network Schedule(s) contain estimates of quantities for Activities for the Contract Period for both National Highways and other State-controlled roads. The estimates are based on the Intervention Levels in the Performance Standards, knowledge of the current backlog list of maintenance work for the network, planned future program maintenance and rehabilitation works and on the Principal's understanding of climatic conditions, traffic behaviour and traffic volumes over previous years. The Principal does not warrant or make any representation as to the accuracy, adequacy or completeness of the estimates contained in the Schedule(s). The Principal shall not be liable (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) in respect of any fact, matter, thing or claim arising out of or in any way connected with the estimated quantities. In particular, the Principal will not be liable for any changes in the unit rates for the work under the Contract because actual quantities for completed Activities vary from the estimated quantities. The Offeror acknowledges and accepts that climatic conditions, traffic behaviour, actual Intervention Level when work is carried out, traffic volumes and Contractor inefficiencies will affect the actual quantities for Activities and the distribution of those quantities during the Contract Period. AD. Budgetary Constraints The following annual amounts have been allowed for in budgeting Road Maintenance Services for the Network for the Contract Period: Period 1 (24 months to insert date)

National Highways* $insert value/yr Other State-controlled $insert value/yr roads

Period 2 (24 months) National Highways* $insert value/yr Other State-controlled $insert value/yr roads

* Of this amount $insert value/yr has been allocated to fund variations, emergency callouts, linemarking, structural repairs and a transfer to programmed maintenance works for reseals and overlays.

AE. Adjudicator Nomination In accordance with the requirements of Supplementary Conditions of Contract Clause S19, Offerors must nominate their order of preference from the following list of proposed adjudicators: Nominee 1: insert name

Nominee 2: insert name

Nominee 3: insert name

AF. Goods and Services Tax Offerors completing the Offer Schedules must include a separate amount in Offer Schedule (C6284.1) which represents the Goods and Services Tax (GST) that applies to the supply provided by the Contractor to the Principal. Individual rates and lump sums in the Network Schedules, Dayworks Schedules, etc are to be exclusive of GST and less any direct or indirect savings which result form the removal or the reduction in Commonwealth or State Taxes, duties, imposts, levies, fees or charges where that removal or reduction is part of or related to the commencement and implementation of the GST Legislation. AG. Quality System Preparation and

Maintenance Offerors completing the Offer Schedules must include an amount in Offer Schedule (C6284.1) which represents the value of implementing and maintaining the Plans under the Quality System namely Quality, Safety including Traffic Management and Environmental Management (Maintenance) for the duration of the Contract Period.




Part 4

General Conditions of Contract/ Supplementary Conditions of Contract



General Conditions of Contract RMPC Open Competition

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Part 1 Definitions and Interpretations ........................................................................................ 3 of 27 Part 2 General Contract Framework ........................................................................................... 4 of 27 2.1 Co-operative Approach........................................................................................... 4 of 27 2.2 Nature of the Contract ............................................................................................ 4 of 27 2.3 Formal Agreement.................................................................................................. 4 of 27 2.4 Agreement Status................................................................................................... 4 of 27 2.5 Applicable Law ....................................................................................................... 4 of 27 2.6 Compliance with Laws............................................................................................ 4 of 27 2.7 Money, Measurement and Communications.......................................................... 4 of 27 2.8 Interpretation of the Contract.................................................................................. 5 of 27 2.9 Notices.................................................................................................................... 5 of 27 2.10 Assignment and Subcontracting............................................................................. 5 of 27 2.11 Confidential Information.......................................................................................... 6 of 27 2.12 Royalties, Fees & Intellectual Property Rights ....................................................... 6 of 27 2.13 Contractor’s Indemnity............................................................................................ 6 of 27 2.14 Option to Extend..................................................................................................... 7 of 27 Part 3 Contractor’s Responsibilities...........................................................................................7 of 27 3.1 Contractor’s Roles .................................................................................................. 7 of 27 3.2 Network Stewardship.............................................................................................. 7 of 27 3.3 Management/Supervision....................................................................................... 8 of 27 3.4 Operations .............................................................................................................. 8 of 27 3.5 Monthly Meeting Reports........................................................................................ 8 of 27 3.6 Design Standards for Minor Works ........................................................................ 8 of 27 3.7 Construction Standards for Minor Works ............................................................... 8 of 27 3.8 Warranties .............................................................................................................. 9 of 27 3.9 Work, Labour, Materials, Plant and Equipment...................................................... 9 of 27 3.10 Work Directed by the Principal ............................................................................. 10 of 27 Part 4 Time .............................................................................................................................. 10 of 27 4.1 Contract Commencement..................................................................................... 10 of 27 4.2 Working Days and Hours...................................................................................... 10 of 27 4.3 Not Used............................................................................................................... 10 of 27 4.4 Response Times................................................................................................... 10 of 27 4.5 Warranty Period.................................................................................................... 10 of 27 Part 5 Principal’s Responsibilities............................................................................................10 of 27 5.1 Monthly Meetings ................................................................................................. 10 of 27 5.2 Principal Supplied Information.............................................................................. 10 of 27 5.3 Contract Performance Reports............................................................................. 11 of 27 Part 6 Payment............................................................................................................................ 11 of 27 6.1 Network Schedule Totals...................................................................................... 11 of 27 6.2 Discretionary Changes ......................................................................................... 11 of 27 6.3 Reallocation.......................................................................................................... 11 of 27 6.4 Progress Claims ................................................................................................... 12 of 27 6.5 Supporting Documents for Progress Claims ........................................................ 12 of 27 6.6 Progress Payments .............................................................................................. 13 of 27 6.7 Set Off................................................................................................................... 13 of 27 6.8 Security for Performance...................................................................................... 13 of 27 6.9 Final Claim and Final Certificate .......................................................................... 13 of 27 6.10 Annual Cost Adjustment ....................................................................................... 14 of 27 Part 7 Variations ......................................................................................................................... 14 of 27 7.1 Preliminary............................................................................................................ 14 of 27 7.2 Allowable Variation Events ................................................................................... 15 of 27 7.3 Notification ............................................................................................................ 16 of 27 7.4 Valuation of Variations.......................................................................................... 16 of 27 7.5 Provisional Sum.................................................................................................... 17 of 27



Part 8 Risks and Insurances......................................................................................................17 of 27 8.1 Care of Completed Work, Materials and the Site ................................................. 17 of 27 8.2 Excepted Risks ..................................................................................................... 17 of 27 8.3 Professional Indemnity ......................................................................................... 17 of 27 8.4 Public Liability ....................................................................................................... 17 of 27 8.5 Insurance of Employees – Worker Compensation ............................................... 18 of 27 8.6 Notice of Potential Claims..................................................................................... 18 of 27 8.7 Excess/Deducible ................................................................................................. 19 of 27 Part 9 The Site .............................................................................................................................19 of 27 9.1 Extent of Site......................................................................................................... 19 of 27 9.2 Nature of Possession............................................................................................ 19 of 27 9.3 Protection of People and Property........................................................................ 19 of 27 9.4 Minerals, Fossils and Relics on Site ..................................................................... 20 of 27 9.5 Public Utility Plant, Ancillary Works and Encroachments..................................... 20 of 27 9.6 Contractor’s Accommodation................................................................................ 20 of 27 Part 10 Quality System Requirements........................................................................................20 of 27 10.1 General ................................................................................................................. 20 of 27 10.2 Quality System...................................................................................................... 20 of 27 10.3 Quality Plan........................................................................................................... 20 of 27 10.4 Safety Plan............................................................................................................ 21 of 27 10.5 Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance), EMP (Maintenance) .............. 21 of 27 10.6 Audits .................................................................................................................... 22 of 27 10.7 Keeping Records .................................................................................................. 22 of 27 Part 11 Safety ................................................................................................................................22 of 27 11.1 General ................................................................................................................. 22 of 27 11.2 Occupational Health and Safety ........................................................................... 22 of 27 11.3 First Aid Equipment and Transport ....................................................................... 23 of 27 11.4 Traffic Diversion at Work Sites ............................................................................. 23 of 27 11.5 Safety Plan Content/Safety Audits ....................................................................... 23 of 27 Part 12 Environment .....................................................................................................................24 of 27 12.1 General ................................................................................................................. 24 of 27 12.2 Auditing of the EMP (Maintenance) ...................................................................... 24 of 27 Part 13 Suspension.......................................................................................................................24 of 27 13.1 Notice.................................................................................................................... 24 of 27 13.2 Recommencement................................................................................................ 24 of 27 13.3 Contract Period ..................................................................................................... 24 of 27 13.4 Compensation....................................................................................................... 24 of 27 Part 14 Termination ......................................................................................................................25 of 27 14.1 Show Cause Notice .............................................................................................. 25 of 27 14.2 Notice Content ...................................................................................................... 25 of 27 14.3 Termination after Notice ....................................................................................... 25 of 27 14.4 Termination – Other .............................................................................................. 25 of 27 14.5 Preservation of Rights .......................................................................................... 26 of 27 14.6 No Prejudice ......................................................................................................... 26 of 27 Part 15 Dispute Resolution ..........................................................................................................26 of 27 15.1 Facilitation............................................................................................................. 26 of 27 15.2 Other Methods ...................................................................................................... 26 of 27 15.3 Time-bar................................................................................................................ 26 of 27 15.4 Expert Appraisal.................................................................................................... 26 of 27 Part 16 Goods and Services Tax .................................................................................................26 of 27 16.1 General ................................................................................................................. 26 of 27 16.2 Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 27 of 27 16.3 Tax Invoice............................................................................................................ 27 of 27 16.4 Regulated Supplied .............................................................................................. 27 of 27




General Conditions of Contract – RMPC Open Competition PART 1 Definitions and Interpretations In these General Conditions of Contract and in the other Contract Documents, unless the context indicates a contrary intention: • "Confidential Information" means any

information which is confidential to the Principal and of which the Contractor is aware for the purpose of providing the Road Maintenance Services or otherwise and includes, without limitation, information concerning or relating to past, present or contemplated activities, internal or external business operations or other information of the Principal or which may either directly or indirectly be relevant to the Principal's business and includes any compilation of otherwise public information that is in a form not in the public domain.

• "Contract Amount" means the amount

determined by adding the lump sum amounts for Start Up Process, Office/Depot Establishment Quality System/Safety System Establishment Office/Depot Disestablishment and the Network Schedule Totals for each of National Highways and other State-controlled roads and adding the amount of GST.

• "Contract" means the Road Maintenance

Performance Contract between the Principal and the Contractor constituted by the Contract Documents.

• "Contract Documents" means:

- The signed Agreement - Letter of Acceptance - Offer including completed Schedules - General Conditions of Offer - Supplementary Conditions of Offer - General Conditions of Contract - Supplementary Conditions of Contract - Brief - Performance Standards - Any Notice(s) to Offeror - Contractor's Quality Plan/ Safety Plan - Documents incorporated by reference

including: − Manual of UniformTraffic Control

Devices (MUTCD)

− Standard Specifications Roads Manual – 3rd Edition

- Other agreed written materials

• "Contract Material" means all Materials brought into existence in association with the Contract, including but not limited to documents, equipment, information or data stored by any means.

• "Contract Period" means the period

shown in the Contract Documents. • "Contractor" means the person nominated

in the Agreement Form. • "Existing Work" means the literary,

dramatic, musical or artistic work or any cinematographic film, sound recording, television or sound broadcast or any other work capable of being the subject of copyright or other intellectual property rights, which is already in existence at the time that the Road Maintenance Services commenced.

• “GST” means the goods and services tax

imposed under the GST Legislation. A reference to an amount of GST is reference to the GST liability in respect of the supply in question.

• “GST Legislation” means the A New Tax

System (Goods and Services Tax) Act 1999, associated legislation and any additional or substituted legislation providing for a value added tax, consumption tax, retail tax or other goods and services tax.

• "Intellectual Property" means all

copyright, patents, registered and unregistered trademarks, registered designs, trade secrets and know-how and all other Intellectual Property as defined in Article 2 of 26 April, 1970 Berne Convention establishing the World Intellectual Property Organisation.

• "Materials" includes documents, drawings,

calculations, photographs, equipment, information and data stored by any means.

• "Network" means the National Highways

and other State-controlled roads described in the Contract Documents.

• “Network Schedule Total” means the sum

of the extended amounts for the Network Schedule (Form C6284.2).




• "Option Exercise Date" means the date which is 1 month prior to the expiration of the Contract Period.

• "Principal" means the State of Queensland

acting through the Queensland Department of Main Roads.

• "person" includes individuals, bodies corporate and unincorporate.

• “provisional sum” includes monetary sum,

contingency sum and prime cost item identified as a provisional sum.

• "Road Maintenance Services" means the

services to be provided by the Contractor as described in the Contract Documents.

• "Site" means the nominated road Network

and any other places where the Road Maintenance Services or any part of the Road Maintenance Services are to be carried out.

• “supply” has the meaning given in the

GST Legislation. • "work under the Contract" means the

work that the Contractor is or may be required to carry out under the Contract and includes any temporary work, work ancillary to the Road Maintenance Services and variations.

• The terms "Maintenance", "Routine

Maintenance", "Emergency Maintenance", have the meanings given to them in the Contract Documents.

• References to Clauses and Parts are

references to Clauses and Parts of these General Conditions of Contract.

• The singular includes the plural and vice

versa and words of any gender include the other genders.

Headings and subheadings shall not form part of the Contract and shall not be used in the interpretation or construction of the Contract. Where the Contractor consists of two or more persons, the Contract shall bind them jointly and severally.

PART 2 General Contract Framework 2.1 Co-operative Approach The Principal and the Contractor shall, at all times: • act in a manner which will contribute to the

planning, management and completion of the Road Maintenance Services to the required quality within agreed time frames;

• co-operate in the resolution of any disputes as soon as possible after they arise;

2.2 Nature of the Contract The Contractor shall generally manage and perform the Road Maintenance Services on the specified Network in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Principal shall generally administer the Contract including paying the Contractor for work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2.3 Formal Agreement The Contractor shall, within 28 days of the date of the letter of acceptance, execute two original Agreements (Form C6262) and return them to the Principal who will forward one of the Agreements to the Contractor after execution. 2.4 Agreement Status This Contract is the entire agreement between the parties regarding Road Maintenance Services on the Network. 2.5 Applicable Law The Contract shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws for the time being in force in the State of Queensland. 2.6 Compliance with Laws The parties shall observe and comply with the laws, regulations and other rules of the Australian Parliament, the Queensland Parliament and relevant Local Authorities as appropriate, including any necessary giving of notices or obtaining of consents. The costs and expenses associated with such compliance, including laws, regulations and rules introduced during the period of the Contract, shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise agreed in writing.




2.7 Money, Measurement and Communications

All prices, sums of money and payments under the Contract shall be in Australian currency. All measurements of physical quantities shall be in legal metric units of measurement within the meaning of the National Measurement Act 1960 of the Commonwealth of Australia as amended from time to time. Except where otherwise provided, all Contract Documents and all communications between the parties shall be in the English language. 2.8 Interpretation of the Contract Where a doubt arises as to the correct interpretation of any words, phrases, sentences, clauses or parts of the Contract, the Principal will notify the Contractor in writing of the interpretation that will apply. The following order of priority shall be used in resolving ambiguities in the Contract Documents: • Agreement • Letter of Acceptance • Post Offer Correspondence • Notice(s) to Offerors • Supplementary Conditions of Contract • General Conditions of Contract • Brief • Network Schedules • Performance Standards • Invitation for Offer • Contractor's Quality Plan/ Safety Plan/

Environmental Management Plan • Documents incorporated by reference

(including MUTCD, Standard Specifications- Roads)

• Drawings (if applicable) • General Conditions of Offer • Other Schedules • Offer • Other Contract Documents Any ambiguity between documents shall be resolved by reference to the highest ranking document. 2.9 Notices All notices under the Contract shall be in writing. Where the Contractor is the receiving party, the address for service of notice shall be: • the street address, or postal address, or

facsimile number as indicated in the Offer

Documents, or last notified in writing by the Contractor to the Principal.

Where the Principal is the receiving party, the address for service of notice shall be: • the street address, or postal address or

facsimile number notified to the Contractor by the Principal in the Offer Documents or last notified in writing by the Principal to the Contractor.

Notice may be served: • by hand delivery to the Principal or

Contractor at their respective address in which case notice is deemed to be served at the time the document is handed over;

• by prepaid post in which case notice is

deemed to be served at the time at which such notice is received; or

• by facsimile in which case notice is deemed

to have been received on the day of transmission except where the receiving party notifies the sending party by 4.00 pm on the day following transmission that the copy received is not legible in which case no service shall have been effected.

2.10 Assignment and Subcontracting 2.10.1 The Contractor shall not assign the Contract or any payment or other benefit under the Contract without prior written consent of the Principal and except on such terms and conditions as may be imposed by the Principal. 2.10.2 The Contractor shall not subcontract the whole of the work to be performed by the Contractor under the Contract. 2.10.3 The Contractor shall not subcontract any part of the work to be performed by the Contractor under the Contract without prior written consent of the Principal. 2.10.4 Where the Contractor seeks the Principal's consent under Clause 2.10.1 or Clause 2.10.3, the Contractor must supply the following to the Principal: • details of the identity, financial standing,

experience and business reputation of the proposed assignee or subcontractor; and

• any other information that is relevant to

assessing the ability of the proposed assignee or subcontractor or carry out any part of the work under the Contract.




2.10.5 Subject to the Contractor complying with Clause 2.10.4, the Principal's consent under Clause 2.10.1 and 2.10.3 shall not be reasonably withheld. 2.10.6 The consent of the Principal under Clause 2.10.5 shall not relieve the Contractor from any liability or obligation under the Contract and the Contractor shall be liable to the Principal for the acts, defaults and omissions of all subcontractors and assignees or any of their employees or agents as if they were the acts, defaults and omissions of the Contractor. 2.11 Confidential Information 2.11.1 The Contractor shall:- • treat as confidential and not disclose, copy,

use or permit the use of at any time or in any way, the Confidential Information, other than for the purpose of performing this Contract;

• ensure and protect the confidentiality of the

Confidential Information; • limit the disclosure of the Confidential

Information to those persons to whom such disclosure is strictly necessary for the performance of this Contract and shall ensure that those persons are bound by obligations of confidentiality in respect of the Confidential Information equal to those contained in this clause and shall use its best endeavours to ensure that those persons abide by such obligations of confidentiality;

• accept full liability for and indemnify the

Principal against any loss, cost or damage which it may suffer or incur as a result of any wrongful use, copying or disclosure of the Confidential Information; and

• not use the name of the Principal in publicity

releases, advertising or promotion of the Contractor's business (including client lists) unless the Principal has first given its written consent, which consent will not be unreasonably withheld.

2.11.2 The obligations of the Contractor under

Clause 2.11.1 survive the termination of the Contract by either party upon any grounds whatsoever.

2.12 Royalties, Fees & Intellectual Property Rights

2.12.1 Copyright in Contract Materials Intellectual Property rights in all Contract Materials prepared by or on behalf of the Contractor in the performance of the Contract shall vest in the Contractor. The Contractor as owner of Intellectual Property rights of such Contract material grants a royalty-fee licence to the Principal to use the Contract Material for the full period for which such rights subsist. 2.12.2 Royalties and Other Fees All payments (whether or not accrued due and payable at the date of the Contract) for royalties and patent rights, registered designs, trade marks or names, copyright and other protected rights and all fees then or thereafter to become payable for or in connection with any land, matter or thing used or required to be sued in the performance of the Contract or to be supplied under the Contract, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be paid by the Contractor to those to whom and at the time at which they become payable. 2.12.3 Contractor's Warranty The Contractor warrants that all designs, materials, documents and methods of working provided by the Contractor in the performance of work under the Contract will not infringe any patent, registered design, trade mark or name, copyright or other protected right. 2.13 Contractor's Indemnity 2.13.1 The Contractor indemnifies the Principal against any action, suit, proceeding, claim or demand in respect of all costs or expenses arising whether directly or indirectly from or incurred by reason of any infringement or alleged infringement of letters patent, registered design, trade mark or name, copyright or other protected rights in respect of any design, materials, documents or methods of working provided by the Contractor in the performance of the Contract. 2.13.2 Subject to Clause 2.13.3, all Materials (and the Intellectual Property in them) provided by the Principal to the Contractor are and remain the absolute property of the Principal and the Contractor shall not use those Materials in any way without the prior written consent of the Principal. Nothing in this Clause will prevent the Contractor from using any Materials provided by the Principal to the Contractor for the purpose of providing the Road Maintenance Services subject




to and in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract. 2.13.3 The authorisation granted by Clause 2.13.2 does not constitute a grant to the Contractor of any property right or interest in any or all Materials provided by the Principal to the Contractor and the Contractor acknowledges the validity of the Principal's title in and to such Materials. 2.13.4 The Contractor will promptly bring to the attention of the Principal any unauthorised use of the Contract Material, any Materials provided by the Principal to the Contractor, or the infringement of any other Intellectual Property or licence rights of the Principal, which may come to the Contractor's notice. 2.14 Option to Extend 2.14.1 On or at any time before the Option Exercise Date the Principal may in its absolute discretion, by notice in writing to the Contractor, extend by up to a further 24 months the period during which the Contractor is to provide the Road Maintenance Services and perform the work under the Contract. Any extended period shall commence on the date upon which the Contract Period would have expired. 2.14.2 Subject to Clause 2.14.3, the terms of this Contract shall apply during any extended period pursuant to Clause 2.14.1. 2.14.3 If the Principal exercises the option in Clause 2.14.1, the Contractor's payment for performance of the Contract during the extended period shall be as follows: • for work done in performance of the

Contract and for which the Principal accepted a rate in the Network Schedules and Daywork Schedule, the sum ascertained by multiplying the measured quantity of the item/work item work actually carried out in accordance with the Contract by the rate accepted by the Principal as adjusted in accordance with Clause 6.10;

• for items/activity codes supplied or carried

out by the Contractor and for which the Principal accepted a lump sum, the lump sum as adjusted in accordance with Clause 6.10,

adjusted by any additions or deductions resulting from any variations ordered in writing by the Principal under Part 7 during the extended period. Payments shall be made in accordance with Part 6 save that any adjusted lump sums shall be pro-

rated having regard to the extended period rather than the Contract Period. Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph of Clause 2.14.3:- • there shall be no adjustment to the lump

sums for Office/Depot Establishment, Start-Up Process, Establishment of Quality/ Safety/ Environmental Systems.

• the Contractor shall only be paid the lump

sums for Office/Depot Establishment, Start-Up Process, Establishment of Quality/ Safety/ Environmental Systems once;

• The Contractor shall only be paid the lump

sum for Office/Depot Disestablishment once subject to any adjustment thereto at the end of the extended period in accordance with Clause 6.10.

PART 3 Contractor’s Responsibilities 3.1 Contractor’s Roles The Contractor, in its various roles under the Contract must act in the best interests of the Principal. 3.2 Network Stewardship The Contractor shall be responsible for Stewardship of the Network, act professionally in the Principal's interest and must ensure:- • that initiation of Road Maintenance Services

is based on sound engineering principles; • that maintenance funds are wisely invested

and that the infrastructure asset is maintained in the best interests of the Principal;

• that discretionary changes to the Network Schedules are sound and justifiable;

• that requests for reallocation and variations are soundly based;

• that maintenance concerns are primarily dealt with at Contractor level and only referred to the Principal when necessary;

• indicate when public safety is at risk; • indicate when Intervention Levels will cause

future expenditure to exceed planned expenditure; and

• that advice provided to the Principal regarding the condition and preservation of the Network is timely, accurate and of a high standard.




3.3 Management/Supervision The Contractor shall be responsible for the management and supervision of the Road Maintenance Services in accordance with the Contract Documents. This will include: • developing and ensuring a quality assured

systematic approach to the:

- inspection; - backlogging; - prioritising; - programming;

- planning; - scheduling; and - recording of all Maintenance. • providing accurate up to date records

including:

- Network Inspection Reports and Backlog

- Forward List of Work - Issued Works Orders - Completed Activities; • auditing maintenance operations;

• adopting appropriate financial and contract

management policies and procedures;

• providing adhoc information regarding the Network and the Contract to the Principal by 9 am on the next working day after such request for information;

• take account of the Principal's Works

Programme. 3.4 Operations The Contractor shall carry out the work under the Contract in accordance with: • an accepted Quality Plan • an accepted Safety Plan including Traffic

Management • an accepted Environmental Management

Plan and other relevant provisions in the Contract Documents (including Intervention Levels). 3.5 Monthly Meeting Reports The Contractor shall, in addition to providing information required by the Principal in accordance with Clause 5.1, provide at least 4 days before each monthly meeting, the following:

• programmed Activities for the following month;

• completed Activities for the previous month together with a comparison to the activity quantities planned for that month;

• non conformances for the previous month; • prioritised current defect backlog list; • explanations where applicable for each of

the Network Schedules, where actual Activity quantities vary by more than 15% of the programmed quantity for the previous month;

• forecasts of Activity Quantities and cash flow for the following month as well as forecast cash flow for each of the following 11 months, or if less than 11 months remain of the Contract Period the remaining months, for approval by the Principal. (see Form C6266)

These cash flow forecasts are required for

any Activities (nominated in the Contract Documents), as well as the total of all Activities in the relevant schedules.

In addition the Contractor must be prepared to discuss the following: • current requests for reallocation and

variations (including changes to Intervention Levels);

• weather, traffic and safety issues; • public comment/complaints.

3.6 Design Standards for Minor Works The Contractor shall carry out any design work that is necessary under the contract consistent with but not limited to those standards described in the latest version of the Main Roads’ Design References including any referred documents. If in doubt, the Contractor should request details of applicable references from the Principal. Design references include all manuals, texts, guidelines, specifications, standards, policies etc., used currently by Main Roads in the design of road transport infrastructure. Where the Contractor wishes to base any design on other design references, it shall obtain prior written agreement from the Principal before carrying out such design. 3.7 Construction Standards for Minor Works The Contractor shall unless otherwise agreed in writing between the parties, adopt construction standards not less than those referred to in the Activity Standards contained in the Supplementary Conditions of Contract and




Specification or in the absence of such standards, the appropriate Australian Standard. The Contractor shall address construction standards, and procedures for Minor Works in the Quality, Safety and Environmental Management Plans (Maintenance) for RMPC generally in accordance with Clauses 10.3, 10.4 and 10.5 respectively, which will be subject to the requirements of Clause 10.2. 3.8 Warranties The Contractor: • warrants that the Contractor, its employees

and any approved subcontractors or assignees have the necessary skills, experience and expertise to carry out the work under the Contract;

• warrants that any design work necessary

under the Contract will be fit for purpose and the designer will exercise the skill, care and diligence of a reasonably competent professional engineer or appropriate specialist designer engaged in the same or similar work;

• warrants that the Road Maintenance

Services will be carried out in accordance with the Contract Documents and will be fit for the purpose or purposes for which it is intended;

• warrants that all materials used by the

Contractor or incorporated into any work performed by the Contractor shall be, unless inconsistent with any express requirement of the Contract, new, in conformity with its description, of merchantable quality, free from defects and fit for the purpose or purposes for which they are used or supplied.

3.9 Work, Labour, Materials, Plant and

Equipment 3.9.1 The Contractor shall supply everything including labour, materials, plant and equipment necessary to complete the work under the Contract unless otherwise provided for under the contract or agreed in writing. 3.9.2 If the Principal discovers material or work which is not in accordance with the Contract, including the rate of progress, the Principal may direct the Contractor at the Contractor’s cost to: (a) remove or not to remove any material plant

and equipment or any part thereof from the Site;

(b) demolish the work or any part thereof; (c) reconstruct, replace or correct the material

or work or any part thereof; or (d) not deliver the material or work or any part

thereof to the Site. The Principal may direct the times within which the Contractor must commence and complete the work, removal, demolition, replacement or correction. If the Contractor fails to comply with a direction issued by the Principal under this clause within the time specified by the Principal in the direction, and provided the Principal has given the Contractor notice in writing that after the expiry of 7 days from the date on which the Contractor receives the notice the Principal intends to have the work carried out by other persons, the Principal may have the work or the work of removal, demolition, replacement or correction carried out by other persons and the cost incurred by the Principal in having the work so carried out shall be a debt due from the Contractor to the Principal. 3.9.3 The Principal may from time to time direct the Contractor to remove from the Site or from any work under the Contract any person (including a subcontractor) employed in connection with work under the Contract. The Principal must provide details of that employee's misconduct, incompetence or negligence and any time limits and the Contractor shall comply with such a direction. Such a person shall not be re-employed by the Contractor for work under the Contract without the written approval of the Principal. 3.9.4 The Contractor shall not represent itself and shall take all the steps to ensure that its employees, and any approved subcontractors or assignees do not represent themselves as being employees or agents of the Principal. It is the express intention of the parties that such relationships do not exist. Nothing in the Contract will be deemed or construed by the parties or any third party as creating the relationship of partnership, joint venture or principal and agent and accordingly (except to the extent permitted and provided for in the Contract Documents) neither party shall enter into any agreement or make any representation or warranty on behalf of or otherwise bind the other party to such an agreement, representation or warranty.




3.10.1 Work Directed by the Principal Where the Principal directs the Contractor to carry out scheduled activities at specific locations, the Contractor shall programme and carry out the work in accordance with the Principal’s time constraints. Where warranted, the Principal may increase the rates for such work and indicate an appropriate reallocation. Where the Contractor refuses or fails or is otherwise unable to complete the work within the nominated time, the Principal may have the work carried out by others, and the Contractor shall make a discretionary change in accordance with Clause 6.2, or where this is not possible, initiate action for a reallocation in accordance with Clause 6.3. PART 4 Time 4.1 Contract Commencement The Road Maintenance Services shall commence on the date specified in the letter of acceptance. The Contractor must be fully mobilised and able to commence work under the Contract by that date. The Contractor shall at all times perform the Contract diligently and at a rate of progress and in a manner satisfactory to the Principal. 4.2 Working Days and Hours For other than emergency maintenance Activities, work under the Contract shall be carried out between the hours of 6 am and 6 pm on week days (other than Public Holidays and industry rostered days off), subject to lane closure restrictions, unless otherwise agreed in writing between the parties. 4.3 Not Used 4.4 Response Times The Contractor shall commence each Activity after which the corresponding Defect reaches the Intervention Level within the time as set out in the Contract Documents. 4.5 Warranty Period 4.5.1 The Warranty Period in respect of work done by the Contractor shall commence on the date upon which the work is completed to the satisfaction of the Principal and continue for the

period of time as nominated in the Contract Documents. 4.5.2 Any defects in work done by the Contractor, or defects in other work caused by defects in the work done by the Contractor shall be rectified at the Contractor's own cost. 4.5.3 If it is necessary for the Contractor to carry out rectification under Clause 4.5.2, the Contractor shall do so at times and in a manner which causes as little inconvenience to the Principal, the public and adjacent land owners as is reasonably possible. 4.5.4 In addition to any other right or remedy which the Principal may have against the Contractor, if the Contractor fails to carry out any rectification work as required by Clause 4.5.2, the Principal may itself carry out or engage others to carry out the rectification work and the cost so incurred by the Principal shall be a debt due from the Contractor to the Principal. PART 5 Principal’s Responsibilities 5.1. Monthly Meetings The Principal shall convene monthly meetings with the Contractor. The Principal shall give the Contractor at least two (2) weeks notice of such meetings and shall indicate in such notice: • the time and place of the meeting; • agenda; and • documents, records, reports and other

specific information (in addition to that required under Clause 3.5), to be made available at the meeting.

The Contractor shall attend such meeting and provide the information requested in the notice. The Principal shall be responsible for the preparation of minutes for Monthly Meetings. 5.2 Principal Supplied Information The Principal shall supply the following current information relative to the Network to the Contractor as required from time to time: • Pavcon Surface Condition Survey, including

any videos • Surface history records • Road Inventory Information • Surveyed road boundaries




• Traffic Counts • Annual Construction and Major Works

Program • Road Reference Network Details The Contractor shall use this information in planning and carrying out work under the Contract. 5.3 Contract Performance Reports 5.3.1 General The Principal shall, prepare a Performance Report on the Contractor using the Performance Report Form (C6292) prior to Contract Review Meetings. The Contractor must be given the opportunity to read and acknowledge a completed Performance Report before a Contract Review Meeting. At least four Contract Review Meetings shall be convened by the Principal, with the Contractor for each twelve month period and pro rata thereof for lesser periods. A final Contract Review Meeting should also be held no later than two weeks before the completion of the Contract Period. 5.3.2 Less than Satisfactory Performance Where the Contractor is given a less than satisfactory assessment in one or more areas of the Assessment Criteria the issues must be addressed by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Principal before the next Contract Review Meeting. Where the Contractor incurs two successive less than satisfactory reports for the same Assessment Criteria the Contractor may be issued with a Show Cause Notice by the Principal in accordance with Clause 14.1 of the General Conditions of Contract. PART 6 Payment 6.1 Network Schedule Totals Each Network Schedule Total shall not be exceeded except by a variation approved in accordance with Part 7. No payment will be made by the Principal for Activities carried out by the Contractor outside the discretionary limits as set out in the Network Schedules unless the Principal has approved a reallocation under Clause 6.3 or a variation under Part 7.

Network Schedule Totals are not minimum amounts - payments for all schedule of rates items will be based on completed quantities. 6.2 Discretionary Changes The Contractor may vary the quantities for each of the Activities (within the agreed discretionary limits) in the Network Schedules provided that the Network Schedule Totals are not exceeded. The Contractor must keep current up to date Network Schedules to reflect any discretionary changes made by the Contractor. 6.3 Reallocation Where the Contractor cannot satisfy the Intervention Levels/Response Times and priorities by discretionary changes to the Network Schedules, the Contractor must give notice to the Principal that there is no further scope for discretionary changes to the Network Schedules. The Contractor should clearly set out the current state of the Network Schedules and indicate where reallocation could take place in the best interests of maintenance of the Network. In doing so, the Contractor must indicate any consequential changes to Intervention Levels/Response Times that may result from such action. The Principal may authorise:

• a change of estimated quantities outside the

agreed discretionary limits within a Network Schedule such that the Network Schedule Total is not exceeded

• changing Defect priorities • changing Intervention Levels/Response

Times for certain Defects The Contractor shall update the Network Schedules and Intervention Level/Response Time relationships to reflect any changes so authorised by the Principal. Any reallocation shall not entitle the Contractor to any additional payment in excess of the Network Schedule Totals because of such a change. Where the Principal does not authorise a reallocation, the Contractor may refer the matter to the Principal for a variation in accordance with Part 7. Where the Principal does not direct a variation, the Contractor must complete Activities where the




corresponding Defect Intervention Levels have been reached, within the response times. Such work is at the Contractor's cost. 6.4 Progress Claims The Contractor shall submit a progress claim to the Principal on a monthly basis (or such other period as agreed in writing). Each claim shall include: • a progress claim summary on Form C6296; • for each schedule of rates item in the

Network Schedule(s), the quantity completed since the certified quantity in the previous progress payment, together with the amount claimed for each item, adjusted where applicable in accordance with Clause 6.10;

• for each lump sum item in the Network

Schedule(s), a pro-rata amount based on the period of time since the period included in the previous progress payment, adjusted where applicable in accordance with Clause 6.10;

• where the Contractor is required to carry out

emergency maintenance Activities, the Contractor shall claim for this in accordance with the requirements of Clause 7.4;

• for any variations ordered by the Principal in accordance with Part 7, the amount based on the rates and/or lump sums nominated in the Variation that is relevant to the claim period, adjusted where applicable in accordance with Clause 6.10;

• any other claim by the Contractor; arising

out of or in connection with the Contract or for any alleged breach thereof;

• the amount of GST; • the total amount claimed to date by the

Contractor;

• the total amount paid to the Contractor in previous progress payments;

• the payment now claimed by the Contractor; • GST invoice in the form required by the

Australian Tax Office. For the sake of clarification the supply (whether work done or otherwise) in respect of which the claim is made (other than a claim for release of

retention) shall be treated as a separate taxable supply for the purposes of calculation of the GST.

Relevant claims for lump sum items shall include: • in respect of Office/Depot Establishment,

the lump sum for Office/Depot Establishment, provided that this amount shall only be claimed after such establishment has been completed and approved in writing by the Principal;

• in respect of Office/Depot Disestablishment,

the lump sum for Office/Depot Disestablishment, provided that this amount shall only be claimed once and only after such disestablishment has been completed and not before the completion of the Contract Period or any extended period;

• in respect of Start-Up Process, the lump

sum for Start-Up Process, provided that the amount shall only be claimed once and only after such work has been completed and approved in writing by the Principal;

• in respect of establishment of a Quality

Plan/Safety Plan/Environmental Plan, one half of the lump sum amount shall be paid when the Principal approves the Contractor's initial Plans, the remainder being paid six months after the Date of the Letter of Acceptance, subject to the Contractor having, as a minimum, a third party accredited Quality System in place.

The Principal may request at any time the following information in support of the Contractor's progress claim: • relevant calculations relating to

measurement of completed quantities; • test results during the period of the claim in

accordance with the testing requirements in the Contractor's Quality Plan.

6.5 Supporting Documents for Progress

Claims Without prejudice to any other right or remedy which the Principal may have, the Principal may withhold any payment otherwise due to the Contractor until the Contractor has :- • provided an itemised list of all completed

Activities on computer disk in specified electronic format. The format specified shall be determined by the Principal;




• signed and returned two (2) original formal Agreements as may be required under Clause 2.3;

• provided security as required under Clause

6.8; • provided an approved Quality Plan/ Safety

Plan/ Environmental Management Plan in accordance with Parts 10,11 and 12;

• provided information at the prior monthly

meeting in accordance with Clause 3.5;

• provided proof of insurance as required under Clause 8.4 and Clause 8.5;

• provided details of completed Activities in

accordance with Clause 3.5; and

• provided an explanation where an Activity quantity has varied from the forecast provided under Clause 3.5 for the previous month by more than 15%.

6.6 Progress Payments The Principal shall within 28 calendar days of receipt of the Contractor's Progress Claim and GST invoice or such time as agreed by the parties: • pay the claimed amount; or • seek clarification or amendment of the claim

and pay the claimed amount (within fourteen (14) days of receipt of such response) where such clarification or amendment is acceptable to the Principal; or

• defer payment of the claimed amount until

the Contractor has satisfied the Principal as to the amount of the claim. (The Principal may pay that part of the claim that is not in dispute within twenty eight (28) days after advising the Contractor that the whole or part of the claim is in dispute).

Prior to the Principal making payment to the Contractor the Contractor shall issue to the Principal a tax invoice complying with the GST Legislation in respect of the relevant supply. The Contractor is to ascertain from the Principal prior to issuing the tax invoice the amount of the progress payment to be made by the Principal. The tax invoice issued is to be consistent with the amount of the progress payment to be made by the Principal.

6.7 Set Off The Principal, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies, may deduct from any monies due to the Contractor any sum that is payable by the Contractor to the Principal or recoverable by the Principal from the Contractor under this Contract or any other Contract or on any other basis. 6.8 Security for Performance 6.8.1 The Contractor shall lodge with the Principal no later than seven (7) days after the date of the letter of acceptance, security for the due and faithful performance of the Contract. 6.8.2 The amount of such security shall be the amount stated in the Offer form and shall be in the form of an Unconditional Bank Guarantee from a Bank and on the form provided by the Principal (Form C6038) or such other form as may be approved in writing by the Principal. 6.8.3 The Principal may reduce the amount of security by 50% at: • the expiration of the Contract Period; or • the expiration of any extended term

pursuant to Clause 2.14.1; upon completion to the satisfaction of the Principal of the last of the Activities. 6.8.4 The Principal may convert any security to cash where: • the Contractor has defaulted in its

obligations under the Contract; or • the Contractor owes any sum of money to

the Principal. 6.8.5 Within fourteen (14) days after the end of the Warranty Period, the Principal shall: • return any security then held by the

Principal to the Contractor; or • where the security has been converted into

cash, return any balance then held by the Principal to the Contractor,

subject to the Principal's rights of set-off under Clause 6.7. 6.9 Final Claim and Final Certificate 6.9.1 Within four (4) weeks after the expiration of the Warranty Period for completed Activities (as set out in the Contract Documents), which commences on the day after the expiry of the




Contract Period or any extended period under Clause 2.14 which ever is the later, the Contractor shall submit to the Principal a Final Claim in writing and endorsed "Final Claim". The Contractor shall include in that claim all monies which the Contractor considers to be due from the Principal under or arising out of the Contract or any alleged breach thereof. 6.9.2 After the expiration of the period for lodging a Final Claim, any claim which the Contractor could have made against the Principal and has not made shall be barred. Nothing in this clause shall limit the operation or effect of any other time bar provision or condition precedent contained in the Contract. 6.9.3 Within four (4) weeks after receipt of the Final Claim, the Principal shall issue to the Contractor a Final Certificate in which the Principal shall certify the amount which in the Principal's opinion is finally due from the Principal to the Contractor or from the Contractor to the Principal under or arising out of the Contract or any alleged breach thereof. 6.9.4 Within fourteen (14) days after the issue by the Principal of the Final Certificate; • where the Final Certificate certifies an

amount payable by the Principal - the Principal shall pay that amount to the Contractor;

• where the Final Certificate certifies an

amount payable by the Contractor - the Contractor shall pay that amount to the Principal, subject to the Principal's rights of set-off under Clause 6.7.

6.10 Annual Cost Adjustment For the purposes of Clause 2.14.3 and Clause 6.4 to reflect fluctuations in the cost of labour and materials and travelling expenses during the Contract Period, the rates in the Network Schedules for year (n-1), the rates in the Daywork Schedule and the lump sums in the Network Schedules for year (n-1) shall be adjusted (up or down as the case requires) by the percentage calculated as follows to provide the corresponding rates and lump sums for year (n), or part thereof, of the Contract Period, where n has the values 2, 3 and 4. (Values of 3 and 4 only apply where the Contract Period is extended in accordance with Clause 2.14).

(CPI (n) - CP (n-1) x 100 CPI (n-1)

where:

"CPI (n-1)" means the Consumer Price Index published at the end of the last quarter (or such other period in respect of which the Consumer Price Index is published from time to time) immediately preceding the date of the Contractor's Offer (for year 2 - (n) equals 2) or 1 year and 2 years after that date for values of (n) of 3 and 4 respectively. "CPI (n)" means the Consumer Price Index published at the end of the last quarter (or such other period in respect of which the Consumer Price Index is published from time to time) which precedes the date one year, two years, and three years after the date of the letter of acceptance of Offer for each of the values of (n). "Consumer Price Index" means the Consumer Price Index (All Groups) for Brisbane published from time to time by the Australian Bureau of Statistics. In the event that there is any suspension or discontinuance of this Consumer Price Index or its method of calculation is substantially altered, or made indeterminate then Consumer Price Index shall mean an index published at the date of the Contractor's Offer and at the date on which the Contract Period expired which reflects fluctuations in the cost of living in Brisbane to be determined by the Principal in the Principal's absolute discretion. "n" means the value of 2, 3 or 4 corresponding to the year, or part thereof, of the Contract. (Values of (n) of 3 and 4 only apply where the Contract Period is extended in accordance with Clause 2.14). PART 7 Variations 7.1 Preliminary 7.1.1 The Contractor shall not vary the Road Maintenance Services or the work under the Contract except as directed in writing by the Principal pursuant to this Part 7. 7.1.2 No variation directed by the Principal pursuant to this Part 7 shall vitiate this Contract. 7.1.3 The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment in respect of a variation directed by the Principal unless that variation has been directed or approved in writing by the Principal and the warranties under Clause 3.8 shall remain unaffected by the variation.




7.1.4 The power to order variations mentioned in Clause 7.1.1 includes the power to direct the Contractor to :- • increase or decrease the scope of the

services or work to be provided or carried out by the Contractor;

• change the character or quality of any

services or work to be provided or carried out by the Contractor;

• change the levels, lines, positions or

dimensions of any part of the work to be carried out by the Contractor;

• execute additional work;

• omit any part of the Road Maintenance

Services or the work under the Contract. Without limiting the effect of the preceding paragraph, the Principal may direct a decrease in the scope of services to be provided by the Contractor or the omission of any Road Maintenance Services so that the Principal might itself carry out or engage others to carry out those deleted or omitted services. 7.1.5 A direction from the Principal pursuant to Clause 7.1.1 shall not be required by reason only that the quantity of work or items required to perform the Contract may exceed the estimated quantities in the Network Schedules. 7.1.6 Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Principal, the rates or lump sum for each variation shall be determined as provided in Clause 7.4 before the variation is effected. 7.2 Allowable Variation Events The following are the only allowable events that may result in variations in accordance with Clause 7.1: 7.2.1 The Principal provides additional funds in the Network Schedule(s) for nominated additional Activities. 7.2.2 The Contractor completes an emergency maintenance Activity. 7.2.3 The Contractor completes work to a standard less than that indicated or referred to in the Quality Plan and the Principal accepts such defective work. 7.2.4 The Principal agrees to change the Intervention Level/Response Time for a particular Defect such that additional quantities for the

Activity that remedies that Defect causes the relevant Network Schedule Total to be exceeded. 7.2.5 The Contractor must carry out alteration of Public Utility Plant or Ancillary Works and Encroachments in accordance with Clause 9.5.1. 7.2.6 Where the proper execution of the work under the Contract is dependent upon or appreciably affected by the quality or completeness of any work to be carried out or that has been carried out by any other person (“the prior work”). To be entitled to a variation under this clause the Contractor shall: (a) inspect the prior work as soon as is

practicable after the Principal gives the Contractor possession of the Site;

(b) if it discovers any defects or matters in or

connected with the prior work which in its opinion renders or is likely to render the prior work unsuitable, unsatisfactory or detrimental in any way to the proper execution of the work under the Contract, forthwith notify the Principal in writing providing:

(i) full particulars of the defects or

matters identified; and

(ii) the reasons for the opinion formed by it with respect to the defects or matters identified; and not commence or continue with the execution of any part of the work under the Contract dependant upon or appreciably affected by the prior work the subject of the notice referred to in subparagraph (b).

On receipt of the Contractor’s notice the Principal shall investigate the prior work the subject of the notice and: • if the Principal agrees that there are defects

or matters in or connected with the prior work which render or are likely to render the prior work unsuitable, unsatisfactory or detrimental in any way to the proper execution of the work under the Contract and that they are defects or matters which the Contractor is not obliged to rectify, overcome or accommodate as part of the work under the Contract, the Principal shall issue a direction to the Contractor and value any work carried out by the Contractor by reason of that direction as a Variation under Clause 7.4.1; or




• if the Principal disagrees with the Contractor, issue an instruction to the Contractor to commence or continue with the work under the Contract.

If the Contractor fails to: • inspect the prior work as required by this

clause; or • notify the Principal of any defects or matters

which should have been detected at the time of such inspection by a competent and experienced contractor and which may render the prior work unsuitable, unsatisfactory or detrimental in any way for the proper execution of the work under the Contract,

and the prior work subsequently proves to be unsatisfactory for the proper execution of the work under the Contract, then any work which is required to be executed in order to render the prior work suitable, satisfactory and non-detrimental for the proper execution of the work under the Contract shall be performed by the Contractor at its own expense. 7.2.7 The Principal directs that work that relates to a Provisional Sum is to be performed or supplied by the Contractor. 7.2.8 The Principal directs that work that relates to dissemination of information to the community of significant traffic changes to be undertaken by the Contractor in accordance with Clause 11.4.2. 7.3 Notification 7.3.1 Where the Contractor determines that no further discretionary changes to the Network Schedule(s) are possible and refers the matter to the Principal for reallocation (in accordance with Clause 6.3) the Principal, where it has decided that reallocation is not appropriate and it is essential that work he carried out under the Contract, may advise the Contractor that additional funds will be made available for such work under Part 7. 7.3.2 Where the Principal determines that additional work is required, or additional funds are available, the Principal may advise the Contractor that such additional funds will be made available for additional Activities and the Contractor must complete such work. 7.3.3 Where the Principal becomes aware that work has not been completed by the Contractor in accordance with the standards in the Operations Guidelines, the Principal shall give notice to the Contractor of its acceptance or rejection of the work and indicate any reduction in the quantities

or lump sum that will apply to the next progress payment. Any such reduction may be made available for additional quantities/lump sums for that Activity. 7.4 Valuation of Variations 7.4.1 Where a variation event arises in accordance with Clauses 7.2.1, 7.2.2, 7.2.4, 7.2.5, 7.2.6, 7.2.7 or 7.2.8 then the value of additional work shall be determined as follows: • where the additional work involves a

schedule of rates item in a Network Schedule (except for Clause 7.2.4), the scheduled rates shall apply which are exclusive of GST,

• where there is no applicable Network

Schedule item but there are Daywork Schedule items that are applicable then those rates shall apply which are exclusive of GST,

• where the parties can not agree, the

Principal shall determine the value of the work in question having regard to:

• the amount of wages and allowances

paid or payable by the Contractor at the rates obtaining at the place and at the time at which the work is done as established by the contractor to the satisfaction of the Principal or such other rates as may be approved by the Principal;

• the amount paid or payable by the Contractor in accordance with any statute or award applicable to labour additional to the wages paid or payable under the preceding subparagraph;

• the amount of hire charges in respect of constructional plant approved by the Principal for use on the work in accordance with such hiring rates and conditions as may be agreed between the Principal and the Contractor or, in the absence of agreement, in accordance with such rates and conditions as may be determined by the Principal;

• the amounts reasonably paid for services, subcontracts and professional fees;

• the actual cost to the Contractor (at the place at which the work is done) of all materials supplied and required for work;

• a reasonable charge to cover overheads, administrative costs, site supervision attendance and profit; and




• the amount of GST in respect of the relevant supply being valued shall be added.

Amounts payable for such work shall not be subject to adjustment for rise and fall in costs notwithstanding that the Contract may provide for adjustment for rise and fall in costs. 7.4.2 Where a variation event occurs in accordance with Clause 7.2.3. the Principal shall determine the reduced payment that shall apply, having regard to the expected life of such work if it had been completed to the required standard. 7.5 Provisional Sum A provisional sum included in the Contract shall not itself be payable by the Principal but where at the direction of the Principal, the work or item to which the provisional sum relates is performed or supplied by the Contractor, the work or item shall be valued under Clause 7.4 as dayworks. PART 8 Risks and Insurances 8.1 Care of Completed Work, Materials and

the Site The Contractor shall be responsible for: • any work done (including temporary work)

from the time such work is commenced until the time such work is completed

• any materials, goods or other things in the

possession of the Contractor from the time of possession until the time of completion of work that incorporates such materials, goods or other things

• the Site or other land occupied by the

Contractor for the purpose of doing work under the Contract from the time of possession until the possession ceases

and where any loss or damage (except loss or damage arising directly from an Excepted Risk) occurs to any work, materials, Site or other land, while under the Contractor's care, such loss or damage shall be made good at the expense of the Contractor. 8.2 Excepted Risks Excepted risks are:

• any negligent act or omission of the Principal or the employees, consultants or agents of the Principal (except the Contractor);

• war, invasion, act of foreign enemies,

hostilities (whether war be declared or not), civil war, rebellion, revolution, insurrection or military or usurped power, martial law or confiscation by order of any Government or public authority;

• ionising radiations or contamination by radioactivity from any nuclear fuel or from any nuclear waste from the combustion of nuclear fuel not caused by the Contractor or the Contractor's employees, subcontractors or agents;

• use or occupation by the Principal or the employees or agents of the Principal of any part of the Site under the Contract;

• in the case of the Site, any loss or damage

caused by third parties, except where the Contractor approved or encouraged such action;

• defects in the design of any work where that

design is provided by the Principal. 8.3 Professional Indemnity The Contractor shall indemnify the Principal, its employees and agents against any claims by persons in respect of personal injury or death or loss of or damage to property, due to any design work under the Contract of the Contractor, its employees or agents. 8.4 Public Liability 8.4.1 The Contractor shall indemnify the Principal against: • loss of or damage to property of the

Principal, including existing property in or upon which work under the Contract is carried out;

• claims by any person against the Principal

in respect of personal injury or death or loss of or damage to any property;

arising out of or as a consequence of the performance of the Contract by the Contractor, but the Contractor's liability to indemnify the Principal shall be reduced proportionally to the extent that any act or omission of the Principal or its employees or agents may have contributed to such loss, damage, injury or death. This indemnity shall not apply to:




• exclude any other right or remedy of the Principal against the Contractor, including any other right to be indemnified;

• things for the care of which the Contractor is

responsible under Clause 8.1; and • damage which is the unavoidable result of

the performance of the Contract. 8.4.2 Before commencing work, the Contractor shall take out a public liability policy of insurance in the joint names of the Principal and the Contractor which insures the Principal and the Contractor, in relation to the work under the Contract for their respective rights and interests to cover their liabilities to third parties. The policy must also cover the Contractor's liability to the Principal for loss of or damage to property and the death of or injury to any person (other than liability which is required by law to be insured under a worker's compensation policy of insurance). The Contractor shall ensure that all subcontractors employed from time to time in relation to the Contract are similarly covered. The public liability policy of insurance shall include a cross-liability clause in which the insurer agrees to waive all rights of subrogation or action against any of the persons comprising the insured and for the purpose of which the insurer accepts the term "insured" as applying to each of the persons comprising the insured as if a separate policy of insurance had been issued to each of them (subject always to the overall sum insured not being increased thereby). The public liability policy of insurance shall be for an amount in respect of any one occurrence not less than the sum stated in the Invitation for Offer and, unless otherwise specified in the Contract, shall be effected with an insurer and in a form both approved in writing by the Principal which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld. The policy shall be maintained during each term of the Contract. 8.4.3 The Principal shall indemnify the Contractor against claims by a person against the Contractor in respect of personal injury or death or loss of or damage to any property arising from or as a direct consequence of any Defect in the Network but only when the Defect: • was one of which the Contractor had no

knowledge, or could not reasonably have been expected to have had knowledge; or

• was one which though known to the

Contractor

- was below the relevant Intervention Level:

or - was above the relevant Intervention

Level, but

* there was insufficient time to remedy the Defect, having regard to its priority;

or * the Defect did not represent a

significant safety hazard and the Contractor shall have the onus of proving such matters. The Principal shall indemnify the Contractor against claims by a person against the Contractor in respect of personal injury or death or loss or damage to any property arising from completed Activities where such Activities had been carried out in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Plan or the standards set out in the Performance Standards. 8.5 Insurance of Employees – Worker

Compensation Before commencing work, the Contractor shall insure against liability for death of or injury to persons employed by the Contractor, including liability by statute and at common law. The insurance cover shall: • be unlimited in amount; • be maintained until all work including

remedial work is completed; • extend to indemnify the Principal for the

Principal's statutory liability to persons employed by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall ensure that every subcontractor employed from time to time under the Contract is similarly insured. 8.6 Notice of Potential Claims The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable, inform the Principal in writing of any occurrence that may give rise to a claim under a policy of insurance required by Clause 8.4 and shall keep the Principal informed of subsequent developments concerning the claim. The Contractor shall ensure that subcontractors in respect of their operations similarly inform the Principal. Where a policy of insurance required by the Contract has been effected by the Principal the Principal shall similarly inform the Contractor.




The Contractor shall comply with the terms of the policies of insurance effected under Clauses 8.1, 8.3 and 8.4 (including, but not limited to, the notification requirements under those policies). 8.7 Excess/Deducible The Contractor shall bear or pay any excess or deductible which is applicable to any claim made under any of the policies of insurance effected under Clauses 8.1, 8.3 or 8.4 except where the claim is with respect to loss or damage which is the direct consequence, without fault or omission on the part of the Contractor, of an Excepted Risk defined in Clause 8.2. PART 9 The Site 9.1 Extent of Site The Site shall comprise all of the National Highways and other State-controlled roads as indicated in the Invitation for Offer as the Network as well as other land used by the Contractor including depots, quarries, etc. 9.2 Nature of Possession 9.2.1 The Contractor shall have such possession of the Site as defined in Clause 9.1 to enable the Contractor to carry out the work under the Contract for the Contract Period. 9.2.2 The Contractor acknowledges and accepts that public use (as well as use by the Principal, its agents and contractors and owners of Public Utility Plant and approved Ancillary Works and Encroachments), of the Site will continue during the performance of the Contract. 9.2.3 Possession of the Site shall confer on the Contractor a right to only such use and control as is necessary to enable the Contractor to perform the work under the Contract. 9.2.4 The Contractor shall not destroy or remove naturally occurring materials, trees, shrubs or other vegetation on or from the Site (except where such destruction or removal is part of the work under the Contract) without prior approval of the Principal. 9.2.5 Work may be carried out on the Site by the Principal or by person(s) engaged or approved by the Principal. The Contractor shall co-operate with such persons and co-ordinate the Contractor's work with their work.

9.2.6 The Contractor shall not store materials, equipment or huts on the road part of the Site without the written approval of the Principal. 9.3 Protection of People and Property 9.3.1 The Contractor shall: • provide all things and take all measures

necessary to protect people and property using or on the Site;

• avoid unnecessary interference with the

passage of road users through the Site; • prevent nuisance and unreasonable noise

and disturbance to persons using or adjoining the Site.

9.3.2 Without limiting the generality of Clause 9.3.1, the Contractor shall provide, install and maintain all necessary signs, traffic control devices and measures (to be in accordance with Principal's Roadworks Signing Guide), barricades, guards, fencing, temporary roads, footpaths, warning signs, lighting, watching, traffic flagging, safety helmets and clothing and shall remove all obstructions and protect all services. 9.3.3 If the Contractor or its subcontractors, employees or agents damage property, including but not being limited to Public Utility Plant and property on or adjacent to the Site, the Contractor shall promptly make good the damage and pay any compensation which the law requires the Contractor to pay. 9.3.4 The Contractor shall keep the Site clean and tidy at the location where and at all times during which work is being performed. 9.3.5 If the Contractor fails to comply with an obligation under Clause 9.3.1 to 9.3.4, the Principal may, in addition to any other right or remedy it may have, perform the obligation on the Contractor's behalf and the costs so incurred by the Principal shall be a debt due from the Contractor to the Principal. The Contractor shall indemnify the Principal against cost, loss, liability or damage which the Principal may suffer or incur as a result of the Contractor's failure to comply with Clauses 9.3.1 to 9.3.4. 9.3.6 If it becomes necessary for the Principal to carry out urgent protective, remedial or similar work in order to protect or prevent damage to or loss of any work under the Contract, and the obligation to provide the protection or carry out the remedial or other work was the Contractor's responsibility, then the costs so incurred by the




Principal shall be a debt due from the Contractor to the Principal. 9.4 Minerals, Fossils and Relics on Site The Contractor, its agents or employees shall not take any action to exploit the discovery of valuable minerals on the Site, but shall immediately advise the Principal of such discovery. Any fossils, articles of antiquity or of anthropological or archaeological interest, treasure trove, coins and articles of value found on the Site shall, as between the parties, be the property of the Principal. 9.5 Public Utility Plant, Ancillary Works and

Encroachments 9.5.1 Where any of the work under the Contract involves the alteration of (including relocation, repairs and protection) Public Utility Plant (PUP) or Ancillary Works and Encroachments (AWE's) located on the Site, the Contractor shall liaise with the owner of such plant or AWE and accept responsibility for arranging and co-ordinating such alteration. Subject to the prior written approval of the Principal the cost of any alteration shall be included as a variation in accordance with Part 7, subject to Clause 9.5.2. 9.5.2 Where PUP or AWE's are altered as a result of the Contractor's activities or to facilitate the Contractor's work and such work is not necessary for the work under the Contract, the cost of such work shall be borne by the Contractor and paid directly to the relevant owner by the Contractor. 9.5.3 The Contractor indemnifies the Principal against any damage or loss of PUP or AWE's caused by the Contractor while carrying out work under the Contract. 9.6 Contractor's Accommodation Unless specified or otherwise agreed in writing, the Contractor shall provide at its own cost, suitable accommodation and equipment necessary to perform the work under the Contract. The Contractor shall at all reasonable times give to the Principal, or to any other persons authorised in writing by the Principal, access to any premises where the work under the Contract is being undertaken and shall permit those persons to inspect the performance of the Road Maintenance Services and any Contract Material.

Where the Contractor uses the Principal's premises or facilities to perform any of the work under the Contract, the Contractor shall comply with all reasonable directions and procedures relating to security and to occupational health and safety which are in effect at those premises or in regard to those facilities, as notified by the Principal. PART 10 Quality System Requirements 10.1 General The Contractor must develop and implement a Quality System for work under the Contract. The Quality System must be presented for approval by the Principal within 30 days after the date of the letter of acceptance, such approval not being unreasonably withheld. The Contractor’s Quality System must be certified to ISO 9002 (second or third party). The Contractor must include in its Quality Manual details of the Contractor's maintenance organisation structure clearly setting out the nominated persons and their responsibilities for achieving the Quality requirements. 10.2 Quality System The Contractor shall establish, review, maintain and update the various Plans comprising the Quality System including: • Quality Plan; • Safety Plan including Traffic Management

Plan; and • Environmental Management Plan

(Maintenance). The Contractor shall submit any changes to its existing Quality System Plans to the Principal for direction as to their suitability immediately after any audit and in any case, at least four (4) weeks prior to commencement of any work under the renewed Contract. In the case of the Principal indicating that any of the Plans are not suitable, the Contractor must amend and resubmit the relevant Plans to the Principal. 10.3 Quality Plan 10.3.1 The Contractor's Quality Plan for management must evidence a systematic approach to the management of the maintenance of the Network.




The Contractor must include in its Quality Plan, its procedures for: • identification of work in advance • planning, prioritising and scheduling of

Maintenance • recording all completed work • making progress payment claims • managing the process • changing/improving the system • auditing the Contractor's

management/supervision procedures

The Contractor must maintain accurate up to date files (whether computer based or manual) of the following: • Network Inspection Reports • Forward List of Work • Issued Works Orders • List of Completed Activities The Contractor must use these files to provide any reports requested by the Principal. 10.3.2 The Contractor must provide its standards and procedures in its Quality Plan for recording of Defects and carrying out the various Maintenance Activities. Standards must be in accordance with the Activity Standards and Intervention Level/Response Time Standards as set out in Appendices 2 and 3 respectively of Volume 3 - Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance unless otherwise varied in the Contract for the following:

• Initial and General Intervention Levels • Response Times • Testing Requirements • Applicable Specifications • Restoration Standards

The Quality Plan must adopt the Principal’s Activity Standards as set out in the Volume 3 – Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance for the following:

• Activity Numbers and Descriptors • Units of Measurement The Contractor must also provide the following information in its Quality Plan:

• Work Procedures including: • sequential steps and check points

These procedures may be based on the details contained in the Activity Standards as set out in Volume 3- Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance.

10.4 Safety Plan The Safety Plan must clearly indicate the Contractor's hierarchy and responsibility for managing safety including traffic guidance together with details of the Contractor's procedures including the following matters:

• advice to the Principal of incidents involving third parties

• management of traffic at Work Sites in accordance with Part 3 of the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Qld)

10.5 Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance), EMP(Maintenance)

The Contractor shall be responsible for environmental management associated with the maintenance activities of the Contract. The Contractor’s Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance), EMP (Maintenance) shall reflect these responsibilities. The EMP(Maintenance) must clearly indicate the Contractor’s strategy and responsibility for environmental management of the work under Contract, the name and qualifications of the Contractor’s environmental representative and include details of the Contractor’s procedures for monitoring, review and periodic update of the EMP(Maintenance). It should also detail the method for providing advice to the Principal and the Environmental Protection Agency or other relevant State or Federal Departments regarding incidents causing “material” or “serious environmental harm” (Environmental Protection Act, 1994) as a result of works carried out. The content of the Contractor’s EMP(Maintenance) shall be in accordance with the Departments publication “Road Project Environmental Management Processes Manual 1997", and shall as a minimum include: • Statement of Environmental Management

Policy relevant to Activities carried out under the Contract.

• notes describing the Contractor’s document control for the EMP (Maintenance);

• list of permits, licences, etc. obtained relevant to the work to be undertaken;

• Procedures in respect of: • erosion and sedimentation control • minimising the impact on flora and

fauna • waste management and contamination

of land and waterways (including recycling and spills)

• cultural heritage • control of noise, dust, vibrations and

other nuisances




• chemical handling and storage (including bituminous materials and herbicides)

• solvent spillage • integration of environmental

considerations into water sourcing and disposal

• specific environmental measures as nominated by the Principal

• monitoring, auditing and corrective action

• environmental training • environmental complaints and incident

reporting • emergency response

Procedures developed by the Contractor to minimise or mitigate potential environmental harm when undertaking maintenance activities are to be included in the Contractor’s Work Instructions and/or Quality Manual, and should include: • Identification of Activities/Locations on the

Site that have the potential to cause environmental harm.

• Assessment of the risk/significance of the potential environmental harm of these activities generally and at specific locations.

• Where there is significant risk of potential environmental harm the Contractor must;

• adapt work procedures for identified activities to minimise potential environmental impacts,

• develop location specific procedures, where warranted, in accordance with Departmental Standards or as agreed by the Principal and the Contractor.

10.6 Audits The Principal may carry out audits of the Contractor's Quality System at any time. Such an audit may be one or a combination of the following: • compliance with the Contractor's approved

Quality System; • compliance with the Contractor's Quality

procedures • independent testing on Completed Activities The Principal shall immediately advise the Contractor in writing, of any non conformance in the Contractor's Quality System. Where the Principal directs the Contractor to change its Quality Plan, the Contractor must comply within a reasonable time.

10.7 Keeping Records All records must be kept by the Contractor for a period of at least 6 years notwithstanding the requirements of any relevant legislation (including the Local Government Finance Standards). PART 11 Safety 11.1 General The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of: • the Contractor's employees, subcontractors

and agents; • the Principal's employees and agents; • road users; and • occupiers of adjoining land while carrying out work under the Contract and shall develop and implement a Safety Plan for that purpose. The Contractor must present its initial Safety Plan to the Principal for approval within 30 days after the date of the letter of acceptance. The Safety Plan shall be updated and maintained during the Contract Period 11.2 Occupational Health and Safety 11.2.1 The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the Workplace Health and Safety Act 1995. The Contractor is assigned all obligations contained in Section 30 of the Act - Obligations of Persons in Control of Workplaces. The Contractor shall nominate the person in control of the work place within 7 days of Possession of Site and immediately advise the Principal of any proposed replacement person during the period of the Contract. 11.2.2 The Contractor shall indemnify the Principal against liabilities which may be imposed under or which may arise out of enforcement of any section of the Act or the regulation in force under the Act. 11.2.3 The Contractor shall notify the Principal in writing of every work-related illness or work injury and of every serious bodily injury which occurs on the Site as soon as possible but no later than twelve (12) hours after such occurrence. 11.2.4 The Contractor shall, within two (2) days of being given possession of the Site or any part




of the Site, nominate a Health and Safety Officer for the duration of the Contract. The Health and Safety Officer shall possess the qualifications according to Section 92 of the Act, and exercise the functions according to Section 96 of the Act. 11.2.5 The Contractor shall advise the Principal of the name and qualifications of the nominated Health and Safety Officer within three (3) days of such nomination and shall immediately advise the Principal of any proposed replacement Health and Safety Officers during the period of the Contract. 11.3 First Aid Equipment and Transport 11.3.1 The Contractor shall establish and maintain first aid equipment in accordance with the Code of Practice for Construction Workplaces and which may reasonably be required during the performance of the work under the Contract. 11.3.2 The Contractor shall arrange for any necessary transport of any person working on the Site and carrying out work under the Contract (including without limiting the generality thereof, employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, and the Principal) who requires medical attention. 11.4 Traffic Diversion at Work Sites 11.4.1 The Contractor shall make all arrangements and do all things necessary to guide traffic safely past any of the work under the Contract and take all precautions for the safety of workers and road users. The Contractor shall supply, install and maintain all traffic signs and control devices and make arrangements for control of traffic in accordance with a Traffic guidance scheme based on Part 3 of the "Manual of Uniform Control Devices (Queensland)", and shall generally comply with the requirements of that Manual. The Contractor shall also comply with the Workplace Health & Safety Act and any relevant Prohibition Notices.

Where any work under the Contract involves:

• expected traffic delays exceeding the times

as set out in the Intervention Level/ Response Time Schedule (Form C6295)

• closure of the normally travelled access from residential or commercial premises

• likely traffic queues across intersections • detours using local roads • closure of the normally travelled

carriageway • maintenance of sidetracks, detours, etc.

then the Traffic Guidance Scheme shall be documented and submitted at least 2 days in advance, or as otherwise agreed, to the Principal, for direction as to its suitability.

11.4.2 The Principal regards as important the dissemination of information to the community regarding the nature and impact of work under the Contract on any traffic. Where directed by the Principal to provide information to the public regarding significant traffic changes, the Contractor shall ensure that: • adequate information is advertised publicly

to keep the community informed of significant changes to normal traffic movements such as detours over other roads, and of any possible disruptions

• as much notice as possible of such changes must be given to the public, but it must not be less than 24 hours or as otherwise agreed

• the agreement of the Principal to the extent and nature of all such publicity prior to implementation is obtained.

The cost of any dissemination of information ordered and agreed by the Principal shall be included as a variation in accordance with Part 7. 11.4.3 No motor vehicle traffic lane shall be left closed overnight without first obtaining the Principal's written approval of the closure and of the traffic arrangements to apply.

The Contractor shall ensure that all persons who divert traffic are qualified Traffic Controllers.5 11.5 Safety Plan Content/Safety Audits 11.5.1 The Safety Plan shall include the following information: (a) Statement of Contractor’s Safety Policy. (b) Contractor’s hierarchy and responsibility for

managing safety and traffic guidance. (b) Statement of Contractor's procedures and regulations in respect of:

• Safety induction program; • Safety meetings with employees; • Accident reporting and accident

prevention; • Employee conduct; • Fire and other emergencies; • Traffic guidance schemes (refer also to

Clause 11.4); • Prohibition Notices issued under the

Workplace Health & Safety Act: • Use of mobile equipment; • Use of explosives; • Use, transportation and disposal of

hazardous materials/chemicals;




• Internal safety audits; 11.5.2 The Principal may carry out audits on the Contractor's Safety Plan at any time.

During any audit the Contractor shall provide the Principal with all documents, access and assistance necessary for its completion.

Auditing may take one or a combination of the following forms:

• a check on whether the Contractor is

complying with the requirements of the Safety Plan; or

• a check on the Contractor's individual procedures and records.

The Principal shall immediately advise the Contractor, in writing, of any non-conformance in the Contractor's Safety Plan.

If any non-conformance in the Contractor's Safety Plan is detected, the Contractor shall immediately rectify the non-conformance. PART 12 Environment 12.1 General Further to Clause 10.5 of these General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for environmental management while carrying out work under the Contract on the Site and shall develop and implement an Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance) (referred to as “EMP(Maintenance)”) for that purpose. Where a Contractor has a certified Environmental Management System, the Contractor may submit its EMP (Maintenance) in a format compatible with their existing system. The EMP(Maintenance) is the Contractor’s management plan to ensure that all works undertaken by the Contractor, its employees, agents and subcontractors, shall have minimal impact on the environment and any damage to the environment is repaired in an effective and efficient manner. The EMP(Maintenance) shall be in accordance with all relevant State, Federal and Local Government laws, regulations and rules and shall comply with and incorporate the requirements of this Contract. The EMP(Maintenance) describes the requirements for the protection of the environment and the management of environmental impacts during the Contract Period.

12.2 Auditing of the EMP(Maintenance) The Principal may carry out audits of the EMP(Maintenance) and its implementation at any time. The Contractor and/or its environmental representative shall be present during the audit and shall supply the Principal with all documentation, access and assistance as required. The Contractor shall undertake regular audits as part of the EMP(Maintenance) to ensure any relevant operational changes are made to reduce the risk of environmental harm. PART 13 Suspension 13.1 Notice The Principal may by notice in writing to the Contractor given at any time and for any reason the Principal thinks fit, suspend the progress of the whole or any parts of the Road Maintenance Services for such time as the Principal thinks fit. 13.2 Recommencement When the Principal considers that the reason for any suspension no longer exists, it shall direct the Contractor in writing to recommence the Road Maintenance Services or the parts thereof which were suspended and the Contractor shall recommence such work promptly upon receiving such notice. 13.3 Contract Period No suspension by the Principal under Clause 13.1 shall result in any extension to the Contract Period. 13.4 Compensation The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional remuneration from the Principal by reason of any suspension ordered by the Principal under Clause 13.1 except where all the following conditions are satisfied: • the suspension was due to an act, breach

or omission of the Principal and not the direct or indirect result of any breach, act or omission of the Contractor or of persons for whom the Contractor is responsible;

• the Contractor has as a direct result of the

suspension incurred additional costs in respect of the lump sum items of office establishment, office running costs, quality




system development or office disestablishment;

• the Contractor within twenty-eight (28) days

after the commencement of the suspension gave the Principal written notice of its intention to make a claim for such additional costs and submitted a written claim for such additional costs (including detailed particulars) to the Principal within twenty-eight (28) days after receipt of the Principal's notice under Clause 13.1

The Contractor's entitlement (if any) to additional payment pursuant to this clause shall be limited to the additional costs of the type mentioned in this clause which were necessarily and reasonably incurred by the Contractor as a direct result of the suspension. PART 14 Termination 14.1 Show Cause Notice If the Contractor fails to observe or perform any requirement of the Contract to be observed or performed by the Contractor, the Principal may give the Contractor a written notice to show cause. 14.2 Notice Content A notice to show cause under Clause 14.1 shall: • state that it is a notice under Clause 14.1; • specify the alleged breach; • require the Contractor to show cause in

writing why the Principal should not terminate the Contract;

• specify the time and date by which the Contractor must show cause (which time shall not be less than seven (7) days after the notice is given to the Contractor;

• specify the place at which cause must be shown.

14.3 Termination after Notice If the Contractor fails within the period specified in the show cause notice to show cause to the reasonable satisfaction of the Principal why the powers given to the Principal in this clause should not be exercised, then without prejudice to any other rights, powers or remedies that it may have against the Contractor (whether under the Contract or otherwise), the Principal may either: (a) take over the whole or any part of the work

under the Contract remaining to be

completed, and for that purpose and insofar as it may be necessary, exclude from the Site the Contractor and any other person concerned in the performance of the work under the contract; or

(b) cancel the Contract, and in that case

exercise any of the powers of exclusion conferred by subparagraph (a).

If the Contractor notifies the Principal in writing that it is unable or unwilling to complete the work under the Contract, or to remedy the breach, refusal or neglect stated in the show cause notice, the Principal may act in accordance with the provisions of subparagraph (a) or subparagraph (b) as it thinks fit. Nothing in this Contract shall prejudice the common law right of the Principal to terminate the Contract if the Contractor commits a fundamental breach of the contract or repudiates the Contract. 14.4 Termination - Other If:- • the Contractor informs the Principal in

writing or informs creditors generally that the Contractor is insolvent;

• the Contractor commits an act of bankruptcy;

• a meeting of the Contractor's creditors is called with a view to: • entering a scheme of arrangement or

composition with creditors; or • placing the Contractor under statutory

administration; • the Contractor enters a scheme of

arrangement or composition with creditors; • a resolution is passed at a meeting of the

Contractor's creditors to place the Contractor under statutory administration;

• the Contractor is placed under statutory administration;

• a receiver is appointed to the property or part of the property of the Contractor;

• an application is made to a court for the winding up of the Contractor;

• a winding up order is made in respect of the Contractor;

• execution is levied against the Contractor by creditors, debenture holders or trustees or under floating charge;

• a mortgagee of the Contractor enters into possession of all or any of the Contractor's property;

• a secured creditor of the Contractor appoints an agent in respect of all or any of the Contractor's property;

• a bankruptcy petition is presented against the Contractor;

• the Contractor is made bankrupt;




then the Principal may by notice in writing given to the Contractor in accordance with Clause 2.9, terminate the Contract. 14.5 Preservation of Rights If the Principal terminates the Contract under Clause 14.3 or Clause 14.4, the rights and liabilities of the parties shall be the same as they would be at common law if the Contractor had wrongfully repudiated the Contract and the Principal had elected to treat the Contract as at an end and recover damages. 14.6 No Prejudice Nothing in Clauses 14.1 to 14.5 shall prejudice any other right or remedy which the Principal may have against the Contractor. PART 15 Dispute Resolution 15.1 Facilitation Any dispute or difference between the parties connected in any way with this Contract shall first be subject to facilitation at the request of either the Contractor or the Principal, administered by the Australian Commercial Disputes Centre (Qld) Ltd. (ACDC) or similar organisation. Such facilitation will be held in Brisbane or such other place as subsequently agreed in writing between the parties. In the event that a dispute or difference arises, facilitation shall be a condition precedent to any other form of dispute resolution being initiated by either party. 15.2 Other Methods In the event that the dispute or difference has not been resolved within twenty-eight (28) calendar days (or such other period as is agreed in writing between the parties) of the first meeting with the facilitator, the parties may agree to submit the matter to:- • a mediator through ACDC or similar

organisation agreed to by the parties, or • an arbitrator in accordance with the laws

currently in place in Queensland, or • an examination by a Independent Expert in

accordance with Clause 15.4 whose decision will be binding, or

• any other method available for settling such disputes or differences.

15.3 Time-bar Any dispute or difference that has not been referred to facilitation within twenty-eight (28) calendar days after the completion of the Contract Period and any claim associated with such dispute or differences shall be time barred. 15.4 Expert Appraisal Where the parties agree to refer the matter to a person for expert appraisal they shall agree on the expert. In determining the dispute, the expert shall act as an expert and not as an arbitrator. The parties shall each bear half of the expert's fee in determining the dispute and shall indemnify the expert against any liability incidental to his acting as an expert. The expert shall, in its sole discretion, regulate the manner in which the dispute is to be determined including the convening of a hearing in relation to the dispute. The decision of the expert shall be in writing and shall have reasons annexed if the expert considers that reasons should be given. A copy of the decision shall be given to each party. The determination of the dispute or difference shall be final and binding on both the Principal and the Contractor. PART 16 Goods and Services Tax 16.1 General This Clause 16 applies in respect of any supply under or in connection with this Contract for which the method of calculating the GST in respect of that supply has not been specified. The consideration for any supply to which this clause applies does not include GST. To the extent that any supply made under or in connection with this Contract is a taxable supply, the consideration for that supply is increased by an amount determined by the supplier, not exceeding the amount of that consideration (or its market value) multiplied by the rate at which GST is imposed in respect of the supply. The amount so determined must be paid by the recipient of the supply even if the recipient disputes the determination.




If either party is entitled under this Contract to be reimbursed or indemnified by the other party for a cost or expense incurred in connection with this Contract, the reimbursement or indemnity payment must not include any GST component of the cost or expense for which an input tax credit may be claimed by the party entitled to be reimbursed or indemnified, or by its representative member. 16.2 Adjustment If an adjustment event, as defined in the GST Legislation, occurs: (a) the supplier must make a determination as

to the amount of the consideration payable for the supply; and

(b) if the GST component of that consideration differs from the amount originally determined, the amount of the difference must be paid by, refunded to or credited to the recipient, as the case may be.

16.3 Tax Invoice A supplier must issue a tax invoice which complies with the requirements of the GST Legislation to the recipient of a supply to which Clause 16.1 applies, or in respect of which an adjustment has been made under Clause 16.2 prior to payment by the recipient of the GST inclusive consideration or the adjustment amount, as the case may be. 16.4 Regulated Supplies For a supply which is a Regulated Supply (as that term is defined for the purposes of section 75AT of the Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth)), the supplier must, if requested by the recipient and at the cost of the recipient, provide evidence that in making a determination as to the amount of GST payable the supplier took account of benefits obtained as a direct result of the New Tax System changes (as that term is defined for the purposes of 75AT of the Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth)).



Supplementary Conditions of Contract RMPC Open Competition

TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Description Page

S1 Not Used……………………………………………………………………………... 3 of 10

S2 Not Used……………………………………………………………………………... 3 of 10

S3 Protective Equipment and Clothing……………………………………………….. 3 of 10

S4 Not Used……………………………………………………………………………... 3 of 10

S5 Work on Private Land…………………………………………………………….… 3 of 10

S6 Advertising on Site………………………………………………………………….. 3 of 10

S7 Solvent Spillage…………………………………………………………………….. 3 of 10

S8 Notice of Traffic Changes………………………………………………………….. 4 of 10

S9 Construction of Side Tracks……………………………………………………….. 4 of 10

S10 Control of Noise, Dust, Vibrations and…………………………………………… 4 of 10

Other Nuisances

S11 Operation of Vehicles with Excessive Axle………………………………………. 4 of 10

Loads Within The Site

S12 Haulage Over Local Government Streets………………………………………... 5 of 10

S13 Not Used…………………………………………………………………………….. 5 of 10

S14 Response Times……………………………………………………………………. 5 of 10

S15 Not Used…………………………………………………………………………….. 5 of 10

S16 Warranty Period…………………………………………………………………….. 5 of 10

S17 Design for Activity No. 143 and 144……………………………………………… 6 of 10

S18 Not Used…………………………………………………………………………….. 6 of 10

S19 Disputes About Variations…………………………………………………………. 7 of 10

S20 Not Used…………………………………………………………………………….. 8 of 10

S21 Not Used…………………………………………………………………………….. 8 of 10

S22 Maintenance Responsibilities……………………………………………………... 8 of 10

S23 Storage of Principal’s Materials…………………………………………………… 8 of 10

S24 Goods and Services Tax (GST)…………………………………………………... 8 of 10

S25 Electronic Claim File Requirements for Monthly Reporting and Payment…… 8 of 10




Supplementary Conditions of Contract – RMPC Open Competition S1 Not Used

Not Used.

S2 Not Used

Not Used.

S3 Protective Equipment and Clothing

The Contractor must supply all of its employees and agents and ensure that its sub-contractors are so supplied with the requisite protective equipment and clothing in accordance with Section 9 of the Workplace Health and Safety Act. Such personnel must use and wear that equipment and clothing while on the Site in accordance with Regulation 60 under that Act. In particular, all personnel, at any location on Site, including any visitors, shall wear High Visibility Safety Garments at all times. Failure by the Contractor to comply with the above requirements shall be a substantial breach of the Contract enabling the Principal to terminate the Contract in accordance with Part 13 of the General Conditions of Contract.

S4 Not Used

Not Used.

S5 Work on Private Land

Where work is to be undertaken on private land, the Contractor shall, at least seven (7) days prior to the proposed entry, notify the owner of the land and advise the Principal of the anticipated period of occupancy. The Contractor shall, by the action of entering on to the private land, be deemed to have indemnified the Principal against any claims which

may arise from such entry or subsequent operations on the land. The Contractor shall, upon completion of work on private land, forward to the Principal statements signed by the respective land owners to the effect that the owners are satisfied that any damage to their land which may have arisen from the Contractor's operations has been adequately repaired or otherwise compensated by the Contractor.

S6 Advertising On Site

Further to Part 9 of the General Conditions of Contract, no advertising shall be permitted on Site other than :- • the names of the manufacturer and/or

owner painted on items of construction plant; or

• the names of the project and/or Contractor

on a single approved sign erected on Site. If the Contractor wishes to erect such a sign, it shall submit details of the sign (size, wording, etc) for approval by the Principal. The sign shall be erected adjacent to the Contractor's Site office, clear of visibility lines for traffic, at a location approved by the Principal. The sign shall be removed from Site upon completion of the Contract or at such other time as directed by the Principal. All expenses incurred in the provision, erection, relocation (if necessary) and removal of the sign shall be borne by the Contractor.

S7 Solvent Spillage

The Contractor shall at all times during the course of the Contract comply with the requirements of the Environmental Protection Act (EPA). The refuelling of plant, use of plant which leaks fuel or oil, mixing of cutting oil with bitumen, or any other action which may result in the spillage of any solvent shall not be carried out by the Contractor on any bituminous surface (including asphalt) or on any other surface on which bitumen is to be placed. In the event of a solvent spillage, as described above, the Contractor shall replace the




contaminated material as ordered by the Principal at no cost to the Principal.

S8 Notice of Traffic Changes

Lane closure restrictions are as detailed in the Brief. Lane closures are not to be implemented on the day prior to a public holiday or the start or end of school holidays. Planning of lane closures is to include any special events so that such events such as yearly sales, school fetes, sporting or community events are not affected. If the Contractor proposes any significant change to traffic movements, at any stage of the Contract it shall submit details in writing to the Principal for approval. Where changes in traffic movements necessitate the relocation of bus routes and/or bus stops, at least ten (10) working days notice is required.

S9 Construction of Side Tracks

Construction of side tracks by the Contractor shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Department of Main Roads Standard Specifications Roads (Form MRS 11.04 and Form MRS 11.05). Unless otherwise approved by the Principal, side tracks shall be constructed to the following minimum standards:- Formation Width : 9.0m Pavement: Unbound pavement (sub-

base) Type 2.4 (200mm) Crossfalls: 4% except where

superelevated Superelevation Generally 4% - shall match Values: into existing adjoining pavement Sidetracks adjacent to sealed roadway or others which will be open for more than 1 day, must be primer-sealed.

AMC4 Primer-Seal 0.8L/m2 7mm Cover Aggregate

1m3/150m2 The Contractor shall submit its proposed side track alignments and crossfall details to the

Principal for written approval, prior to the commencement of side track construction. The following work operations shall be carried out in construction of side tracks by the Contractor :- • Clearing and Grubbing • Ground Surface treatment, standard • Road excavation, all materials • Road embankment • Pavement construction • Bitumen Primer Sealing, if required • Supplying all materials necessary to

complete the work as specified

S10 Control of Noise, Dust, Vibrations and Other Nuisances

The Contractor shall take all reasonable actions necessary to prevent (where feasible), or otherwise minimise, nuisance to others generated by its activities. Such action shall include : • Preventing undue dust and rubbish blowing

from the Site or from vehicles hauling materials to and from the Site by keeping haul roads and side tracks damp and by covering trucks.

• Minimising the effects of noise on the

occupants of adjacent properties by the use of silenced plant or by operating plant as far as practicable from any dwellings.

• Limiting ground vibrations in adjoining

properties by ensuring that the ground particle velocities from any necessary operation of vibratory compaction or percussion equipment do not exceed 5mm/s at any boundary of the Site.

• Preventing glare for nearby traffic and

adjacent dwellings by shielding artificial lighting where work is permitted to occur outside the normal daylight hours.

• Preventing other than natural run-off from

the Site on to adjoining land.

S11 Operation of Vehicles With Excessive Axle Loads Within The Site

Notwithstanding the provisions for `Haulage over Local Government Streets' set out elsewhere in these Supplementary Conditions of Contract, the Contractor will be permitted to operate vehicles with axle loads in excess of the limits set out in




the Regulations under The Transport Infrastructure (Roads) Act 1991 within the Site, subject to the conditions set out hereunder. The operation of vehicles with excess axle loads shall be limited to their use in association with the construction of sections of embankment. Such operations shall be limited to vehicles which are loaded within the Site only. These vehicles will not be permitted to travel along or across any existing pavement or over any concrete structure without the express approval of the Principal in writing. Caution shall be exercised in relation to the operation of these vehicles over drainage or other structures. Any damage incurred shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The operation of vehicles with excess axle loads shall not be permitted on partially or fully completed pavement work. In the event of any damage within the Site, which damage in the opinion of the Principal has resulted from the operation of vehicles with excess axle loads, the Contractor shall repair such damage at no cost to the Principal.

S12 Haulage Over Local Government Streets

The maximum axle loads of vehicles hauling plant and materials over Local Government streets shall not exceed the limits set out in the Regulations under The Transport Infrastructure (Roads) Act 1991. The Contractor shall, prior to commencement of work on site, submit evidence to the Principal that the approvals of the relevant Local Government have been obtained for the haulage of plant and materials over those streets along nominated routes. The Contractor shall be responsible for the rectification of any damage attributable to its operations over these streets. The cost of such rectification shall be at the Contractor's expense.

S13 Not Used.

Not Used.

S14 Response Times

Further to Clause 4.4 of the General Conditions of Contract, Defects will, in general be corrected when the Intervention Level is reached. Response times for carrying out an Activity to remedy developing Defects after the Contractor becomes aware that the Intervention Level has been exceeded will be as set out below: Defect Code Maximum Response Time AG 24 hours on National Highways AG 5 days on other State-

controlled roads EA 24hours ED 24 hours SA 24 hours TC 48 hours WF 48 hours ZZ 1 hour

S15 Not Used

Not Used.

S16 Warranty Period

Further to the requirements of Clause 4.5 of the General Conditions of Contract the following minimum warranty period applies to the listed Activities in the following Table;

Activity No.

Activity Description

Minimum Standard at End of Warranty Period

Warranty Period

(months)

101 & 102

Edge Repair (Manual and Mechanical)

The seal width within ±30mm of original line of the seal. Finished surface with +5mm, -10mm of surrounding road surface. Surface of repair within +0, -2% (absolute) when compared to crossfall of adjacent sealed pavement.

3

105 Pothole Patching

Finished surface within ±10mm of surrounding road surface. Exceptions are repairs on floodways and where pavement adjacent to the pothole repair is distressed but not at intervention level.

3

110

Surface Correction with Premix/ Asphalt (Manual)

Finished surface within ±10mm of surrounding road surface. Deviation from 3m long straightedge placed anywhere on surface of corrector shall not exceed 10mm, due allowance being made for design shape.

6

123 Surface Strip Treatment of Cracks

The strip shall still be adhered to the pavement with no visible signs of tearing.

3

111

Surface Correction with Premix/Asphalt (Mechanical)

As per Activity No. 110. 12




216 Heavy Shoulder Grading (Rural)

Surface sound and tight. No potholes in shoulder greater than 25mm depth and 300mm diameter. No rutting or shoving of shoulder greater than 25mm measured with 1.2m straightedge. Shoulders on the inside of super-elevated curves are excluded. Other exceptions are where rainfall exceeded 100mm over the one month warranty period specified, and roads with a high percentage of commercial vehicles with a seal width < 6.0 metres

1

143 & 144

Pavement Repairs (Mechanical) Minor and Major

Repair not cracked or shoving. Deviation from a 3m straightedge placed in the wheel paths shall be no more than ±15mm.

12

The warranty period commences at the date of payment for the work. The warranty relates to materials and workmanship. Rectification at no cost to the Principal shall be undertaken where works do not meet the “Minimum Standard at End of Warranty Period” shown in the Table.

S17 Design For Activity No. 143 and 144

S17.1 The Contractor shall carry out and complete designs associated with Activity No. 143 and 144 - Pavement Repairs (Mechanical) which must be in accordance with Main Roads. - Pavement Design Manual 2nd Edition - 1990; - Standard Specification - Roads – 3rd Edition

- 1999

The Contractor must submit to the Principal such design prior to commencement of Site work associated with Activity No. 143 or 144 at least seven days prior to the proposed time for carrying out such work. S17.2 The Principal is not required to check the design for any errors, omissions or compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor acknowledges that: (a) the Principal, in considering and responding

to any design, is relying on the advice, skill and judgement of the Contractor and the Warranties given under Clause 3.7 of the General Conditions of Contract; and

(b) no review, permission to use or deemed

permission to use shall limit or exclude the Contractors obligations or liabilities under the Contract or that the Principal has assumed any duty of care to the Contractor regarding any design.

S17.3 The Contractor shall not commence Site

work associated with Activity No. 143 or

144 until the design has been submitted to the Principal and;

(1) the Principal has given the

Contractor written permission to use the design in completing the work; or

(2) the Principal is deemed to have

given permission to use the design in completing the work (i.e. where the Principal has not responded within 7 days of receipt to a design submitted by the Contractor).

S17.4 The Principal may within 7 days of receipt

of a design advise the Contractor that permission to use the design will be withheld until the Contractor has made necessary corrections to overcome the Principal's reasons for withholding permission to use.

S17.5 The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the design which has been given written permission or deemed to have given permission to use, and shall not depart from such design without subsequent written agreement by the Principal.

S18 Urban Areas

Urban areas will generally include those sections of roads where the speed limit is restricted to 60 km/h. Further to Clause 9.1 of the General Conditions of Contract, the extent of the Site and the work under the contract through the urban areas should exclude kerbing and channelling, footpaths, parking areas, gardens and landscaped areas. Work covers the areas between the centre line and 2 m outside the edge line on each side of the road.

S19 Disputes About Variations

S19.1 Jurisdiction As an exception to the provisions of Part 15 of the General Conditions of Contract, all disputes or differences arising from the Contract or in any way connected with the Contract involving Part 7 of the General Conditions of Contract shall be subject to the following adjudication process.




S19.2 Adjudication of Dispute or Difference If a dispute or difference falling within Clause S19.1 arises, then either party, if it wishes to have the dispute or difference determined, shall give to the other party a written notice which complies with Clause S19.3. The notice must be given within 14 days of the dispute or difference arising. The party that gives the notice is referred to herein as "the dissatisfied party". S19.3 Requirements of Adjudication Notice A written notice given by the dissatisfied party under Clause S19.2 must: (a) state that it is a notice given under Clause

S19.2 (b) be accompanied with adequate particulars

and any relevant written material which identifies the matters the subject of the dispute or difference

If the notice is not given within the 14 day period stipulated in Clause S19.2: • the failure to give the notice shall be an

absolute bar on the giving of such notice at any time thereafter and in addition such failure shall operate as a complete and unconditional waiver by each party of the right to pursue the claim, at any time and for any reason to the matters the subject of the dispute or difference in relation to the direction.

S19.4 Notification of Adjudicator After receiving a notice under Clause S19.2, the Principal shall: (a) within 5 days after receiving the notice

inform the Adjudicator of the existence of the relevant dispute and request confirmation from the Adjudicator within a further 5 days that the Adjudicator is available to act in accordance with the procedure set down in this clause;

(b) if the Adjudicator is not available, advise the

person next in the order of preference nominated by the Contractor of the existence of the dispute or difference and seek confirmation that such person is available to act as the Adjudicator; and

(c) if no person named in the Offer Documents

is available to act as the Adjudicator, request the President or acting President for the time being of the Institute of Arbitrators

Australia to nominate a person to act as the Adjudicator.

Within 5 days after the Adjudicator is chosen in accordance with the above procedure the Principal shall: • send the notice provided by the dissatisfied

party pursuant to Clause S19.2 to the Adjudicator; and

• advise the Contractor in writing who the

Adjudicator is. S19.5 Meeting with Adjudicator Within 5 days after receiving the advice from the Principal under Clause S19.4, the parties shall meet with the Adjudicator to sign an agreement with the Adjudicator and to agree the procedure to be adopted in resolving the dispute or difference, and failing agreement, the procedure shall be determined by the Adjudicator. S19.6 Powers of Adjudicator The Adjudicator shall have the power: (a) to proceed to the resolution of the dispute or

difference in such manner and subject to such rules as the Adjudicator and the parties agree, or failing agreement, as the Adjudicator in his or her absolute discretion determines is suitable for the nature of the dispute or difference and the Adjudicator shall not be bound by rules of evidence and nor shall the parties have any right of legal representation;

(b) to engage and consult with any advisors,

legal or technical, as the Adjudicator may see fit; and

(c) to proceed in the absence of a party

provided that party has been given adequate notice of the meeting or hearing.

S19.7 Adjudicator to Give Decision Within 7 days after the conclusion of the dispute resolution procedure agreed or determined under Clause S19.5, the Adjudicator shall notify the parties in writing of his or her decision and shall not be required to give reasons for that decision. S19.8 Adjudicator to Act as Expert In making his or her decision the Adjudicator shall act as an expert and not as an arbitrator. S19.9 Adjudicator's Costs The parties shall:




(a) each pay one half of the Adjudicator's costs (including the costs of engaging any consulting advisors pursuant to Clause S19.6(c); and

(b) each bear their own costs of and incidental

to the adjudication process. S19.10 Adjudicator's Decision The decision of the Adjudicator shall be final and binding and not subject to review in any court.

S20 Not Used

Not Used.

S21 Not Used

Not Used.

S22 Maintenance Responsibilities

Further to Clause 3 of the General Conditions of Contract, the work under the Contract excludes kerbing and channelling, footpaths, parking areas, drainage pipes and pits, gardens and landscaping areas and as detailed in the Maintenance Responsibility Plans contained in the Brief.

S23 Storage of Principal’s Materials

From time to time, the Contractor may be required to remove materials from the road which may be suitable for re-use. Examples include sign components, guardrail components, pipes and pavement gravel. All materials suitable for re-use shall remain the property of the Principal and be securely stored by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense at the Contractor’s compound. When use of these Principal’s materials for road maintenance is proposed, reduction in the scheduled unit rate for the relevant activity may be negotiated, taking into account the costs incurred by the Contractor in storing the materials. Where gravel material removed from the road pavement during maintenance activities are suitable for re-use (e.g. for shoulder re-sheeting), the Contractor shall stockpile these materials unless otherwise agreed or where cartage distance to the nearest nominated gravel stockpile site is greater than 5km.

Within one (1) month of the start of the contract period, the Contractor shall advise the Principal of proposed gravel stockpile sites. Gravel stockpile sites are to be nominated by the Contractor using Form SF6087 (as supplied by the Principal).

S24 Goods and Services Tax (GST)

As of 1 July 2000, the Goods and Services Tax applies to all Main Roads Contracts. This is to be applied to the Maintenance Contracts in the following way: Unit Rates Unit Rates for all Activities are not to include any component of GST. This will enable comparisons to be undertaken between this contract and contracts in previous years. Charging the GST The GST is to be invoiced on the claim summary sheet as 10% of the claimed monthly Activities total. (Or the current tax rate of the GST should this change). Tax Invoices A tax invoice is to be submitted after the Principal has agreed to the claim amount. Payment cannot be made until this tax invoice has been received.

S25 Electronic Claim File Requirements for Monthly Reporting and Payment

The Contractor must provide with each progress claim, details of all completed Activities in the format below: The file is made up of a header record and a number of detailed records. The format of the header and detailed record is given as follows. The file name will be in the format: ‘CONRACT ID.nnn’, where CONRACT ID is the Contract Reference / Invitation Number and nnn is the sequential number of the claim with leading zeros (eg. 002, 012 etc). Column positions are maximum lengths only. Delimit each column by the | character which is code 124 in the ASCII character set.




Header Record

COLUMN POSITION EXAMPLE nominal

start maximum length

Record Type 1 1 H

Supplier's Name 3.00 40 ROADFIX PTY LTD

Contract Id 44 12 21.01

Date Start 57.00 8 31/12/94

Date End 66.00 8 31/01/95 Number of Detail Records 75.00 3 123

Checksum of Quantity 79.00 10 123456.123

Checksum of Product (Quantity * Unit Rate) 90.00 10 1234567.99

Amount Payable (whole dollars) 101.00 10 12345678.99

Claim Reference 112.00 10 Date, Invoice Number (optional)

Example H|ROADFIX PTY LTD|21.01|21/12/94|31/0195|123|123456.123|1234567.99|12345678.99| INVOICE|

Detail Record - where Contractor uses Road Reference Points and Offset



Location Method 1 2 P for reference point (Second character could be a Schedule Type for Lump Sums †)

Activity Type 4.00 5 123

Activity Sub Type 10.00 1 - for Normal D for Daywork P for Provisional Sums

Quantity 12.00 10 123456.123

Amount 23.00 10 1234567.99 Works Order Reference Number 34.00 10 12345678XY

Road Section Id 45.00 4 10A †

Carriageway Code 50.00 1 3 (optional)

Lane Code 52.00 1 1 (optional)

Reference Point Code 54.00 3 12A †

Offset Distance (to start of work) 58.00 7 123.999 †

Length of Work 66.00 7 123.888 †

Length of Work 66.00 7 123.888 † † optional if the second character of Location Method is a Schedule Type for Activities paid by lump sum.

Example P|123|-|123456.123|1234567.99|12345678XY|10A|||12A|123.999|123.888|

Start and end locations for the various activities must be in accordance with Main Road's Road Reference System (RRS).




Detail Record - where Contractor uses Through Distance



Location Method 1 2 T for Through Distance (Second character could be a Schedule Type for Lump Sums †)

Activity Type 2.00 5 123

Activity Sub Type 4.00 1 - for Normal D for Daywork P for Provisional Sums

Quantity 12.00 10 123456.123

Amount 23.00 10 1234567.99 Works Order Reference Number 34.00 10 12345678XY

Road Section Id 45.00 4 10A †

Carriageway Code 50.00 1 3 (optional)

Lane Code 52.00 1 1 (optional) Through Distance Start 54.00 9 12345.567 †

Through Distance End 64.00 9 12345.999 † † optional if the second character of Location Method is a Schedule Type for Activities paid by lump sum.

Example T|123|D|123456.123|1234567.99|12345678XY|10A|||12345.567|12345.999|




Part 5

Brief

• Attachment 1 Map of the Road Network

• Attachment 2 Lane Closure Restrictions

• Attachment 3 Extract from District Road Status Report

• Attachment 4 Maintenance Responsibility Plans


Part 5 Vers 1.0 June 2001 Page 1 of 2

Brief - Road Maintenance Performance Contract (Open) This Brief describes the network and some of its attributes, which are subject to the Road Maintenance Services. 1. Road Maintenance Services

The Offeror is advised that the maintenance Activities included in the Network Schedules are those which historically have been necessary on the contract network. Although all possible maintenance Activities are not included in the Schedules, the Contractor will be responsible for backlogging and prioritising all Defects with the exception of those Activities related to the following Activity groupings. Insert relevant Activities not included Eg. Series 600 Activities – Lighting and Traffic Signals Insert name and contract details for the supplier of the excluded services

In the role of network steward, the Contractor is required to report to the responsible maintenance service supplier any defects/malfunctions which are noticed during routine maintenance patrols/network inspections or reported to the Contractor by other parties such as Police Officers or members of the public. 2. Description of the Road Network The National Highway and other State-controlled Roads to be maintained are as set out in the attached map of the relevant part of the District, refer Attachment 1, and as described below:

Road Number Description

Start Chn (km)

Start Chn (km)

Road Category

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

Note: Interchange ramps are not included in the above carriageway lengths, but are included in the

maintenance network.

District

Invitation No.



3. Reference Points for the Road Reference System (RRS) and Accident Reference Points (ARP).

This information will be provided to the successful Offeror within 3 weeks of the date of the Letter of

Acceptance. 4. Lane Closure Restrictions for the Contract Network

Refer to General Conditions of Contract Clause 4.2 and Supplementary Conditions of Contract Clause S8 related to Lane Closure Restrictions on the District Contract network, refer Attachment 2.

5. Roadside Rest Area Locations

The location of these facilities is shown on the attached map, refer Attachment 1, and as described below. Insert details

6. Emergency Phone Locations The location of these facilities is shown on the attached map, refer Attachment 1, and as described below. Insert details

7. Road Status Report Refer to an extract from the District Road Status Report (insert date) in Attachment 3. 8. Proposed Stockpile Sites for Principal’s Recovered Materials

Details of these sites on the network are contained in Part 3, Schedule C6089 of these Contract Documents.

9. Maintenance Responsibility Plans

Further to Clause 3 of the General Conditions of Contract and Supplementary Conditions of Contract Clause S22, Maintenance Responsibility Plans for the Road Network are contained in Attachment 4.

10. Other



Attachment 1

Map of the Road Network (includes locations of Roadside Rest Areas and Emergency Phones)



Attachment 2

Lane Closure Restrictions



Attachment 3

Extract from District Road Status Report



Attachment 4

Maintenance Responsibility Plans




Part 6

Performance Standards



Performance Standards RMPC Open Competition

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. General 2. Introduction 3. Defect/Activity Overview

APPENDICES A. Defect/Activity Combinations with Defect Intervention Levels, Response

Times & Priority Group B. Activity Standards



1. GENERAL Contractors undertaking Road Maintenance Performance Contracts under open competition (RMPC (Open)) must use these Performance Standards and their approved Quality Plans in establishing work preparation activities, work procedures and operational requirements for carrying out work under the Contract. 2. INTRODUCTION 2.1 Purpose These Performance Standards provide contractual requirements including standards for the maintenance of roads under the RMPC (Open) and form, in part, the basis from which the Contractor is to develop the operational procedures of its Quality Plan and as an aid to informed network stewardship decisions. 2.2 Scope The procedures and requirements for the following types of maintenance are described in these Performance Standards: • Routine Maintenance • Emergency Maintenance 2.3 Performance Standards The standards as set out in these Performance Standards (including Activity Standards) may only be changed by written agreement between the Principal and the Contractor. These Activity Standards may be used in the development of operational procedures for the Contractor’s Quality Plan. 2.4 Definitions Terms used in these Performance Standards shall have the meanings as set out unless the context indicates otherwise: "Activity" means the work necessary to restore an infrastructure asset on a particular part of the Network to a specified condition. "Activity Standards" means the minimum and specific requirements for an Activity including:- • unique reference number (mandatory) • description (mandatory) • applicable Main Road’s Specifications • Restoration Standards • units of measurement (mandatory) • testing requirements • particular planning points to consider. Note: These Standards are not mandatory requirements (except where indicated) but may be

used in preparing the Contractor’s Quality Plan.



“Agreed Intervention Level” means the agreed magnitude of a Defect that requires rectification action by the Contractor. They are the General Intervention Levels and any changes recorded in the Intervention Level/Response Time Schedule. "Defect" means any deficiency in the condition of the road transport infrastructure. "Defect List" means the list of Defects and their location whose magnitude is close to or has reached the relevant Intervention Levels. "Emergency Maintenance" means Activities undertaken in response to an emergency situation. “Forward List of Work” means the list of work on the Network where the magnitude of Defects has reached the Agreed Intervention Levels and may also include Defects that have reached the Initial Intervention Levels. “General Defect Priority” means the coprporate priority ranking allocated to Defects as set out in Part 6 Appendix A of this document, in terms of their importance for Maintenance action. “General Intervention Level” means the magnitude of a Defect as set out in Appendix 2 of Volume 3 – Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance and Part 6 Appendix A of this document indicating the need for rectification action. “Initial Intervention Level” means the magnitude of a Defect as set out in Appendix 2 of Volume 3 – Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance and Part 6 Appendix A of this document that may be used by the Contractor for recording defects into the Forward List of Works to assist in work planning.

"Intervention Level" means the Initial Intervention Levels and General Intervention Levels. “Intervention Level/Response Time Standards” means the Departmental requirements for Intervention Levels and Response Times as set out in Appendix 2 of Volume 3 – Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance and Part 6 Appendix A of this document. "Maintenance" means all Activities required to correct Defects. "National Highway Network" (NHN) means that part of the Network comprising Federally funded State-controlled roads or parts of those roads. "Network" comprises those specified roads that are to be maintained. "other State-controlled roads" means that part of the Network excluding the Federally funded State-controlled roads. "Performance Standards" means Main Road’s Manual describing Maintenance requirements incorporating:-

• Defect Classification, Intervention Levels, Response Times, allowable Activities and units of

measurement;

• Activity Standards.

“Response Time” means the time to complete an Activity once the Initial Intervention Level for the related Defect has been reached. "Restoration Standard" means the standard to which an Activity shall be completed, as specified in the Quality Plan.



"Road Reference System (RRS)" means Main Road’s system for determining location within a Network when identifying Defect and Activity locations. "Routine Maintenance" means those Activities other than Emergency Maintenance as set out in the Performance Standards. "work" means everything that has to be done to complete Routine Maintenance, Minor Works, Emergency Maintenance and any other variations. 3. DEFECT/ACTIVITY OVERVIEW 3.1 Defects – General Requirements A Defect refers to the visible evidence of failure or other undesirable condition in the road infrastructure asset. The Defect may affect the safety, serviceability, structural capacity or appearance of the asset. Appendix A lists Defect types likely to be encountered as part of this Contract. In addition to the requirements of Part 3 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor as part of the Stewardship role for this network shall be responsible for undertaking at least the following duties in relation to the Defects on the network. (i) Backlogging of all Defects onto a Defect List. (ii) The prioritising of all the backlogged Defects in accordance with the Corporate General and

Field priorities. (iii) The scheduling of Activities from within the approved schedules to comply with the

limitations of the schedule allocations. Higher priority works should generally be scheduled ahead of lower priority works.

(iv) Bringing to the attention of the Principal, the need to schedule Activities of a high priority,

that are not included in the approved schedules (i.e. variations to the Contract). The costs associated with the above roles for all the Defects listed shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the rates for the various Activities. 3.2 Defects – Prioritisation The General Defect Priority listing has been assembled into three (3) groups as follows. These groups are intended to represent the priority of the different levels of maintenance and the basic order in which works should be undertaken. This table is subject to review in accordance with Clause 6.3 of the General Conditions of Contract.

Priority 1 – Safety/Legislative

These Activities cover Defects which constitute a safety problem to the road user and for which the Intervention Level is reached without significant warning, as opposed to useability Defects which occur over a period of time and can be planned for repair well in advance of the Intervention Level being reached (eg. pavement repairs). These Activities also cover Special Defects that are illegal or completely unacceptable (eg. offensive graffiti) or required to fulfil obligations as part of the works (eg. inspections). They also cover



legislative requirements for which certain action is mandatory in complying with the requirements (eg. spraying of declared plants).

Priority 2 - Preventative These Activities cover defects that would otherwise eventually form useability or safety Defects. An example of this is the resealing of cracked areas to prevent potholes and pavement failures. Preventative maintenance will hopefully reduce the occurrence of the more costly Defect repairs.

Priority 3 – Usability/Appearance

These Activities generally cover the maintenance of time related usability or appearance Defects and which do not fall into either of the above two categories.

The Defects within each group have not been assigned an individual priority. It is intended that the network operator would assign their own priority based on a local knowledge of the network and past experience. In addition to the Corporate General Defect Priority ranking assigned, the Defect may also be allocated a field priority based on a field assessment of the urgency for Maintenance action. 3.3 Defect List The Contractor shall record each Defect onto a Defect List when the Defect reaches the Initial Intervention Level. Except where specified in Supplementary Conditions of Contract the appropriate Activity must be programmed for execution before the Agreed Intervention Level is exceeded. 3.4 Activities An Activity describes how a Defect is repaired. Appendix B includes a listing of Activities applicable to identified Defects. A unique three-character numeric code is used to identify each particular Activity. The listing of Activities provided in Appendix B together with Activity Standards is a subset of all Activities used across the state. Refer to Road Maintenance Performance Contracts Volume 3, Guidelines for Undertaking Routine Maintenance for the full listing. These code descriptors as well as the Descriptor and the Activity unit of measure are to be used to ensure there is consistency of reporting across the State. The unique three-character numeric code may be expanded with the addition of a further two numerals at the end of the unique code if required to meet Contract specific requirements. 3.5 Valid Defect/Activity Combinations Once the Defects on the Network have been identified, the Contractor can select a valid Activity to repair the Defect. Any particular Defect can be repaired by a number of different Activities as set out in Appendix A. 3.6 Activity Standards



Activity Standards are set out in Appendix B. These Activity Standards provide information for the planning execution and reporting of Activities. Activity Standards form, in part, the basis of the operational procedures of the Contractor’s Quality Plan for maintenance operations. The following details for each of the Activities are contained in the Activity Standards: • unique reference number • work operations required • applicable Queensland Department of Main Roads specifications • restoration standards • units of measurement • testing requirements • particular planning points to consider 3.7 Intervention Levels/Response Times The Defect Intervention levels for both the Initial and General Levels, as well as Response Times, are set out in Appendix A. General Intervention Levels indicate the magnitude of the undesirable condition for each Defect requiring the Contractor to initiate work action to correct the Defect. This is not to say that in some locations on the Network and at some times, maintenance should not be undertaken for obvious safety reasons before the General Intervention Level is reached. These General Intervention Levels become the Agreed Intervention Levels for the work unless any changes are recorded in the Intervention Level/Response Time Schedule, C6295. Initial Intervention Levels for Defects are also set out in Appendix A. These levels can be used as a guide by the Contractor for the recording of Defects into the Forward List of Works as an aid to work planning. The Response Time for carrying out an Activity on each individual road within the Network, after the Initial Intervention Level is reached and added to a Defect List and before the General Intervention Level is exceeded, shall be as indicated in Appendix A. However, for the rapidly developing and critical safety Defects, the appropriate Activities are to be programmed within the times shown in Appendix A after the Contractor becomes aware the relevant Initial Intervention level has been reached. These Response Times become the Response Times for the work unless any changes are recorded in the Intervention Level/Response Time Schedule, C6295.



Appendix A

Defect/Activity/ Combinations with Defect Intervention Levels Units of Measurement

Response Time & Priority Groups

Part 6 Vers 1.0 Appendix A June 2001



Page 1 of 46

DEFECT/ACTIVITY COMBINATIONS WITH DEFECT INTERVENTION LEVELS, RESPONSE TIMES AND PRIORITY GROUPS

Defect Classification/Type

Initial Intervention Level General Intervention Level Activity

Unit of Measurement for payment

Response Time

Priority Group

SEALED ROADWAY

01 Deformation and

Potholes in Bituminous Surface.

AA Isolated

Depressions and Bumps

Isolated depression or bump which causes noticeable riding discomfort.

• Depth or height measured

longitudinally using a 4 m string line of:

100 mm for AADT <500 75 mm for AADT 500 – 2500 50 mm for AADT >2500 (Note: 30 mm to apply for National

Highways) or: • Ponding of water hazardous to

traffic occurs or: • severity of defect exceeds 20 mm

per metre.

110 Surface Correction with Premix/Asphalt (Manual) 111 Surface Correction with

Premix/Asphalt (Mechanical)

161 Profile Planning 155 Asphalt Overlay 156 Replace Excavated

Asphalt 157 Excavate and Replace

Asphalt 169 Other Pavement Work 143 Pavement Repairs

(Mechanical) - Minor 144 Pavement Repairs

(Mechanical) - Major

Tonnes

Tonnes

m2

Tonnes

Tonnes

Tonnes

Dollars

m2

m3

By General Intervention

Level “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “

3



Page 2 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

AA Isolated Depressions and Bumps (cont/…)

112 Surface Correction with Emulsion/Aggregate

141 Temporary Pavement

Repairs (Mechanical)

m3

m2


Level “

3

AB Ruts

• Depth of

depression measured laterally from top of ridge using a 1.2 straight edge is 25 mm

• Ponding of water

hazardous to traffic occurs.

• Depth of depression measured

laterally from top of ridge using a 1.2 m straight edge is:

100mm for AADT < 500 75 mm for AADT 500 – 2500 50mm for AADT > 2500 or: • Ponding of water hazardous to

traffic occurs

110 Surface Correction with

Premix/Asphalt (Manual) 111 Surface Correction with

Premix/ Asphalt (Mechanical)

145 Scarify and Reshape

Existing Pavement 150 Insitu Stabilisation 155 Asphalt Overlay 156 Replace Excavated

Asphalt 157 Excavate and Replace

Asphalt 160 Recycling 116 Slurry Seal 169 Other Pavement Work 112 Surface Correction with Emulsion/Aggregate

Tonnes

Tonnes

m2

m3

Tonnes

Tonnes

Tonnes

m3

m2

Dollars

m3


Level “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “

3



Page 3 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

AB Ruts (cont/…)

151 Gravel Supply – Insitu

Stabilisation 152 Gravel Cartage – Insitu

Stabilisation

m3 (loose)

m3 (loose) – kms


Level “

3

AD Shoving of

Pavement or Asphalt

• Depth of

depression measured laterally from top of ridge using a 1.2 m straight edge is 25 mm

• Depth using a 4 m string line

(measured longitudinally from crest to sag of shove) of: 150 mm for AADT < 500

125 mm for AADT > 500 or: • Depth measured laterally from top

of ridge using a 1.2 m straight edge is: 100 mm for AADT < 500

75 mm for AADT 500 – 2500 50 mm for AADT > 2500 or: • Severity of defect exceeds 20 mm

per metre • Ponding of water hazardous to

traffic occurs

140 Pavement Repairs (Manual) 150 Insitu Stabilisation 169 Other Pavement Work 143 Pavement Repairs


(Mechanical) - Major 141 Temporary Pavement

Repairs (Mechanical) 151 Gravel Supply – Insitu

Stabilisation 152 Gravel Cartage – Insitu

Stabilisation

m2

m3

Dollars

m2

m3

m2

m3(loose)

m3(loose) – kms


Level “ “ “ “ “ “ “

3



Page 4 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

AF Very Rough Surface (Isolated Sections)

NAASRA roughness count of 130 counts per km except National Highways – 100 counts per km and AADT < 500 – 420 counts per km

NAASRA roughness counts of: 200 counts per km for AADT < 500 175 counts per km for AADT 500 – 2500 150 counts per km for AADT > 2500 (Note: for National Highways roughness should not exceed 120 counts per km for freeway sections or 150 counts per km for other sections).

110 Surface Correction with Premix/ Asphalt (Manual)

107 Heavy Patching 111 Surface Correction with


161 Profile Planning 145 Scarify and Reshape

Existing Pavement 150 Insitu Stabilisation 155 Asphalt Overlay 156 Replace Excavated Asphalt 157 Excavate and Replace Asphalt 160 Recycling 169 Other Pavement Work 112 Surface Correction with

Emulsion/Aggregate 151 Gravel Supply – Insitu

Stabilisation 152 Gravel Cartage – Insitu Stabilisation

Tonnes

Tonnes

Tonnes

m2

m2

m3

Tonnes

Tonnes

Tonnes

m3

Dollars

m3

m3 (loose)

m3 (loose)-kms


Level “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “

3



Page 5 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

AG Potholes

Any surface break

Any surface break

105 Pothole Patching 107 Heavy Patching 142 EmergencyTemporary Pavement Repairs 106 Pothole Patching with

Emulsion/ Aggregate

Tonnes

Tonnes

Tonnes

m3


Level “ “ “

3

02 Cracks in

Bituminous Surface

BG Crocodile

Cracking

Any plate size or moisture is entering the pavement

200 mm plate size or moisture is entering the pavement

145 Scarify and Reshape

Existing Pavement 150 Insitu Stabilisation 122 Crack Treatment with

Strain Alleviating Product 143 Pavement Repairs


(Mechanical) – Major

m2

m3

m2

m2

m3


Level “ “ “ “

2



Page 6 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

BZ Bituminous

Surface Cracks General

Any

Individual cracks of > 5 mm width or where there is extensive cracking and moisture is penetrating the pavement.

120 Fill Cracks 123 Surface Strip Treatment of

Cracks 118 Seal Coating Minor 117 Reseal 115 Surface Enrichment 116 Slurry Seal 122 Crack Treatment with

Strain Alleviating Product 124 Concrete Joint and Crack

Treatment 125 Stitch Treat Cracks in

Concrete Roads 121 Crack Treatment with

Emulsion Aggregate

Litres

Linear Metres

m2

m2

m2

m2

m2

Linear Metres

Linear Metres

m3


Level “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “

2



Page 7 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

03 Edge Defects

Bituminous Surface

CA Edge Break

AADT < 5000 vpd: Unsealed Shoulder Edge break is 75 mm from the average existing seal width Sealed Shoulder Edge break is 125 mm from the average existing seal width AADT > 5000 vpd: Unsealed Shoulder Edge break is 50 mm from the average existing seal width Sealed Shoulder Edge break is 100 mm from the average existing seal width

AADT < 5000 vpd: Unsealed Shoulder Edge break is 150 mm from the average existing seal width Sealed Shoulder Edge break is 250 mm from the average existing seal width, measured from each side of the seal AADT > 5000 vpd: Unsealed Shoulder Edge break is 100 mm from the average existing seal width Sealed Shoulder Edge break is 200 mm from the average existing seal width, measured from each side of the seal

101 Edge Repair (Manual) 102 Edge Repair (Mechanical) 103 Edge Repair with

Emulsion/ Aggregate 169 Other Pavement Work

Tonnes

Tonnes

m3

Dollars


Level “ “ “

3 3



Page 8 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

CB Edge Rollover

Rollover > 75 mm (measured at the Seal edge from a 1.2 m straight edge, horizontally)

Rollover > 100 mm (measured at the seal edge from a 1.2 m straight edge, horizontally)


Premix/ Asphalt (Manual) 111 Surface Correction with



Emulsion Aggregate

Tonnes

Tonnes

m3


Level “ “

3

04 Surface Texture Deficiencies Bituminous Surface DC Flushing

Bleeding Seal

A fatty section is 10 m long in any wheel path within a horizontal curve; approach to a curve; or within an intersection or 10% of lane km is fatty

National Highway Fatty strip exceeds 10 m on a horizontal curve or approach to or within an intersection, or 15 m on straights or 10% of any lane km is fatty. Other Road Categories Hazardous to Traffic or fatty strip exceeds 10 m on a horizontal curve or approach to or within an intersection or 20% of lane km is fatty.

118 Seal Coating (Minor) 117 Reseal 116 Slurry Seal

m2

m2

m2


Level “ “

3



Page 9 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

DE Ravelling or

Stripping

Isolated stripped patches exceed 5 m2 in area or 10% loss of aggregate or the gravel pavement visible

Isolated stripped patches exceed 10 m2 in area or 20% loss of aggregate or the gravel pavement visible.

118 Seal Coating (Minor) 155 Asphalt Overlay 117 Reseal 115 Surface Enrichment 116 Slurry Seal

m2

Tonnes

m2

m2

m2


Level “ “ “ “

2

DZ Bituminous

Surface Texture Defects, Other

Any Other Defects (including any ponding of water)

Safety problem exists or pavement is visible or surface noise is excessive.

118 Seal Coating (Minor) 155 Asphalt Overlay 117 Reseal 115 Surface Enrichment 116 Slurry Seal

m2

Tonnes

m2

m2

m2


Level “ “ “ “

1, 3

05 Other

Bituminous Surface

EA Loose Stones

on Sealed Surface

Any

Debris build-up is likely to be hazardous to traffic or accumulated > 25 mm on a kerbed road or 25 mm depth of loose material.

130 Surface Sweeping 423 Roadside Sweeping

m2

Linear Metres


Level “

1



Page 10 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

EB Grass on

Sealed Roadway

Grass on sealed roadway.

Moisture is entering pavement.

407 Herbicide Spraying

Litres


Level

2

ED Dead Beasts

on Roadway

Safety problem exists

Safety problem exists

429 Other Roadside Work

Dollars

1 Hour

1

EE Rough

Manhole Covers and Grates

Tolerance of plus or minus 15 mm relative to surrounding surface

Tolerance of plus or minus 30 mm relative to surrounding surface

139 Other Bituminous Surface Work

Dollars


Level

3

RV Debris on Sealed Surface

As per General Level

Any litter surface made of a dense material greater than 100 square cms on the sealed and likely to become a traffic hazard as a projectile if displaced by a vehicle

135 Surface Debris Removal 423 Roadside Sweeping

Dollars

Linear Metres


Level

1

ZB Depressions

Service Reinstatement

Depth of depression of 15 mm using a 1.2 straight edge.

Depth of abrupt depression of 30 mm


Asphalt (Manual) 111 Surface Correction with

Asphalt (Mechanical) 112 Surface Correction with

Emulsion/Aggregate 430 Services Restoration

Tonnes

Tonnes

m3

Dollars


Level “ “ “

3



Page 11 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

06 Unsealed

Shoulder Defects

GA Insufficient

Crossfall

Insufficient Crossfall – water ponds on pavement edge or on shoulder

The defect causes water ponding presenting a potential safety problem to traffic.

215 Light Shoulder Grading - Rural 221 Shoulder Resheeting 222 Remove Shoulder Material

and Replace 216 Heavy Shoulder Grading - Rural 217 Light Shoulder Grading - Urban 218 Heavy Shoulder Grading -

Urban 219 Gravel Supply – Heavy

Shoulder Grading 229 Other Unsealed Shoulder Work

Shoulder km/Side

m3 (loose)

m3 (loose)

Shoulder km/Side

m2

m2

m3 (loose)

Dollars


Level “ “ “ “ “ “ “

1 1 “ “ “



Page 12 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

GB Excessive

Crossfall

Pavements without superelevation: Intervention required when crossfall of shoulders > 6% Pavements without superelevation: “Low Side” intervention required when crossfall of shoulders > 6%. “High Side” The difference between the crossfall of the shoulder and the crossfall of the adjacent pavement > 3% or “High Side” The difference between the crossfall of the shoulder and the crossfall of the adjacent pavement > minus 1%

Pavement without superelevation: Intervention required before crossfall of shoulders exceeds 10%. Pavements with superelevation: “Low Side” intervention required before crossfall of shoulders exceeds 10. “High Side” the difference between the crossfall of the shoulder and the crossfall of the adjacent pavement equals 7% or “High Side” the difference between the crossfall of the shoulder and the crossfall of the adjacent pavement equals minus 5%.

As for GA As for GA

As for GA

As for GA


Level “

3

GC Scour

Channels

See Table 1

See Table 2

As for GA

As for GA

See Tables

1 and 2

3



Page 13 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

GD Shoulder Edge

Drop Off

See Table 1

See Table 2

As for GA

As for GA

See Tables

1 and 2

3

GE Hazardous

Dry Loose Shoulder Material

Loose material 50 mm deep

Loose shoulder material is a potential traffic hazard or loose depth of 75 mm

As for GA

As for GA


Level

1

GG Debris on

Shoulder


Debris on shoulder is a potential traffic hazard (e.g. rocks > 75 mm in size).

As for GA

As for GA


Level

1

GH Ruts in

Shoulder

See Table 1

See Table 2

As for GA

As for GA

See Table

1 and 2

3

GK Reduced

Shoulder Width

Shoulder is reduced to design width less 20% in the general vicinity

Shoulder width is reduced to design width less 30% in the general vicinity.

As for GA

As for GA


Level

3

GZ Shoulder

Defects, General


Any of interventions listed for the 06 Defect Classification

As for GA

As for GA


Level

3

HM Potholes In Unsealed Roadway

Isolated holes of depth 75 mm

Isolated holes of depth of 125 mm

220 Shoulder Pothole Patching

m3 (loose)


Level

3



Page 14 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

07 Unsealed

Roadway Defects

HP Loss of

Pavement Running Course

Depth of remaining cover in the wheel paths of 0 mm on > 5% of road sub-length eg. 50 m in a one km length.

Depth of remaining cover in the wheel paths of 0 mm on > 20% of road sub-length.

205 Formation Resheeting

m3 (loose)


Level

3

HD Wheel Ruts, HE Shoving and HM Potholes in Unsealed Roadway

Depth of 80 mm (measured valley to crest using a 1.2 metre straight edge) Depth of 80 mm (measured valley to crest using a 1.2 metre straight edge) Depth of 80 mm or equal to 200 mm diameter

Depth of 150 mm using a 1.2 m straight edge (measured valley to crest in case of shoves and ruts) or 125 mm depth or 300 mm diameter in the case of potholes.

204 Gravel/Material Supply –

Heavy Formation Grading 201 Light Formation Grading 206 Remove Formation

Material and Replace 203 Heavy Formation Grading 202 Medium Formation Grading 208 Accessibility Grading 207 Formation Mechanical

Stabilisation

m3 (loose)

km. m width

m3 (loose)

km

km

km m width

m3 (loose)/ Dollars

“ “ “ “ “ “ “

3



Page 15 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

HF Insufficient

Crossfall

Water ponds or crossfall of 1% or flatter on > 10% of road sub-length (ie. a length of 100 m within a 1 km section of shoulder)

Water ponds or crossfall of 1% or flatter on > 20% of road sub-length (ie. a length of 200 m within a 1 km section of shoulder)


Heavy Formation Grading 201 Light Formation Grading 205 Resheeting 203 Heavy Formation Grading 202 Medium Formation Grading 208 Accessibility Grading

m3 (loose)

km m width

m3 (loose)

km

km

km m width


Level “ “ “ “ “

3

HG Excessive

Crossfall

Crossfall of 6% or steeper on > 10% of road sub-length (ie. a length of 100 m within a 1 km section of shoulder)

Crossfall of 8% or steeper on > 20% of road sub length (ie. length of 200 m within a 1 km section of shoulder.


Heavy Formation Grading 201 Light Formation Grading 205 Resheeting 203 Heavy Formation Grading 202 Medium Formation Grading 208 Accessibility Grading

m3 (loose)

km m width

m3 (loose)

km

km

km m width


Level “ “ “ “ “

3



Page 16 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

HN Insufficient Formation Height Above Natural Surface

At natural ground level in rolling country or 100 mm in flat terrain (except flood plain section – 0 mm), measured at the shoulder point on > 20% of road sub-length

Water ponds on the roadway or formation cannot be drained longitudinally on > 20% of road sub-length.

205 Formation Resheeting m3 (loose) By General Intervention

Level

3

HR Insufficient Formation Width

Width of running course < 8 metres or 9 m where visibility is restricted.

Width of running course of 7 metres or 8 metres where visibility is restricted.

214 Other Formation Work 425 Earthworks, Visibility Clearing

Dollars

m3


Level

3

HZ Unsealed Roadway Defects, General (namely windows of material, scour channels, corrugation, soft slippery areas, course surface texture, loose material, roughness)

Safe travel speed is reduced to 85% of the environmental speed.

Safe travelling speed is reduced to less than 70% of the environmental speed.

204 Gravel/Material Supply – Heavy Formation Grading

201 Light Formation Grading 205 Formation Resheeting 206 Remove Formation

Material and Replace 203 Heavy Formation Grading 202 Medium Formation Grading 208 Accessibility Grading 207 Formation Mechanical

Stabilisation

m3 (loose)

km m width

m3 (loose)

m3 (loose)

km

km

km m width

m3 (loose) /Dollars


Level “ “ “ “ “ “


Level

3



Page 17 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

08 Surface Drain Defects

KZ Surface Drain Defects

For AADT < 5000 vpd Any water ponding or silt buildup

Insufficient grade or silted, water ponds For AADT < 5000 vpd Ponding within 300mm below shoulder point

301 Install Earth Surface Drain 305 Clean Earth and Concrete

Surface 302 Repair Earth Surface Drains 303 Install Concrete Surface

Drains 304 Repair Concrete Surface

Drains 326 Repair or Install Scour Blocks 319 Other Surface Drain Work

Linear Metres

Linear Metres

Linear Metres

Linear Metres

Linear Metres

m3

Dollars


Level “ “ “ “ “ “

For AADT > 5000 vpd Any water ponding or silt build-up or any erosion channels in the surface drain

For AADT > 5000 vpd Ponding to a height of 450 mm below shoulder point or any erosion channels in the surface drain.

As above

As above


Level

Drainage endangering private property

Drainage endangering private property

As above

As above

5 Days



Page 18 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

20% of the waterway area is obstructed or

50% of the waterway area is obstructed or

322 Clean Culverts, Pipes and

Pits Major

m3 / Dollars


Level

2

09 Culvert, Pipe,

Pit & Floodway Defects

LA Drainage

Obstructed

Private property or the roadway is endangered

Private property of the roadway is endangered

As above

As above

5 Days

LP Silt or Debris

on Floodway Sections

Silt or debris build up encroaching on to roadway.

Silt or debris is a potential traffic hazard

340 Clean Floodways

m2


Level

1

LZ Culvert, Pipe,

Pit & Floodway Defects, Other

Any of the interventions listed for LA and LP above

Waterway obstructions: Over 50% of the entry/exit obstructed or significant erosion or movement of rock protection or weed growth in inverts which will significantly impede water flow. Scoured Inlet/Outlets: Erosion is likely to affect the structural integrity of the drainage installation (including aprons and cut off walls) or Structural Damage or rust over the concrete surface is such that structural damage affects the integrity of the

320 Install Culverts and Pipes 322 Clean Culverts, Pipes and

Pits Major 323 Repair Culverts, Pipes and Pits

Linear Metres

m3 / Dollars

Dollars


Level “


Level

3



Page 19 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

structure or rust extends over 20% of surface area. Note: Most surface problems (cracking, spalling etc) are reflections of fundamental structural problems. Effective minor repair cannot be usefully achieved. Perforated invert or any other portion of a corrugated steel drainage structure or damaged stone pitching apron and batter protection: The structural integrity of the structure is affected, and there is an unacceptable risk of failure.

324 Repair Steel Drainage Structure 325 Repair Inlet and Outlet Scour 327 Replace or Install Cut Off Walls

Dollars

m3

m3


Level “ “

3

10 Subsoil Drain Defects

MA Silt or

Blockage in System Including Flush Points and Outlets

Any blockage

Any blockage that is retaining moisture in the road formation.

330 Install Subsoil Drains 331 Inspect and/or Clean Out

Subsoil Drains 332 Repair Subsoil Drains

Linear Metres

Linear Metres

Dollars


Level “ “

2

MZ Subsoil Drain

Defect, Other


Any non functional element e.g. hidden, missing or unserviceable market post or damaged flush points or outlets or outlet scour or damaged or missing rodent protection or inlet structure corrosion.

332 Repair Subsoil Drains

Dollars

2 weeks for damaged

flush points or outlets. All other

Defects By General

Intervention Level

2



Page 20 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

11 Roadside Vegetation Defects

NC Grass not in

sight line


Action is required to control drainage or elimination of local fire hazards.

401 Tractor Slashing, Rural 408 Tractor Treatment, Chemical 402 Tractor Slashing - Urban 403 Tractor Slashing – Boom

Mower 415 Roadside Burning Off

Hectares

Hectares

Hectares

m2 / Dollars

Hectares/ Dollars


Level “ “ “

3

ND Unwanted Trees and Shrubs

Medians Trees and shrubs with a trunk diameter of > 50 mm measured 300 mm above ground level within the clear zone. Other Previously cleared areas where regrowth is evident. Note: Approval is required for the removal of trees and shrubs other than that mentioned above.

Medians Trees and shrubs with a trunk diameter of 100 mm measured 300 mm above ground level within the clear zone. Other Previously cleared areas where regrowth is evident. Note Approval is required for the removal of trees and shrubs other than that mentioned above.

401 Tractor Slashing – Rural 407 Herbicide Spraying 405 Clearing 408 Tractor Treatment, Chemical 404 Hand Mowing 419 Other Vegetation Control Works 403 Tractor Slashing Boom Mower

Hectares

Litres

Dollars

Hectares

m2 / Dollars

Dollars

m2 / Dollars


Level “ “ “ “ “

3



Page 21 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

NE Large Trees

and Shrubs close to Roadway

Medians Trees and shrubs with a trunk diameter of > 50 mm measured 300 mm above ground level within the clear zone. Other Previously cleared areas where regrowth is evident. Note: Approval is required for the removal of trees and shrubs other than that mentioned above.

Medians Trees and shrubs with a trunk diameter of 100 mm measured 300 mm above ground level within the clear zone. Other Previously cleared areas where regrowth is evident. Note: Approval is required for the removal of trees and shrubs other than that mentioned above.

405 Clearing 419 Other Vegetation Control Works

Dollars

Dollars


Level “

3

NF Declared

Plants

Any

Any

407 Herbicide Spraying 406 Herbicide Spot Spraying – Declared Plants

Litres

Litres

Before

Flowering “

1 (Special)

NG Trees or

Limbs Likely to Fall on Roadway

Any

Limbs > 100 mm in diameter with > 50% of foliage die back or evidence of dead or rotting or damaged timber hanging over any portion of the carriageway lane width.

405 Clearing

Dollars


Level

1



Page 22 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

NH Grass, trees and shrubs in sight line, in drains or obstructing roadside furniture,

NA Grass, trees

and shrubs in sight line and

NB Grass, trees

and shrubs obscuring roadside furniture

Any vegetation Any vegetation 300mm high Any vegetation

Vegetation obscures sight distance or is within 2 m of guide posts or National Highways Shoulder vegetation is 500 mm high or for Other Road Categories Shoulder vegetation is 700 mm high Trees and Shrubs Median Vegetation with a trunk diameter > 100 mm measured 300 mm above ground level Other Previously cleared areas where regrowth is evident

401 Tractor Slashing, Rural 407 Herbicide Spraying 405 Clearing 408 Tractor Treatment, Chemical 403 Tractor Slashing – Boom Mower

Hectares

Litres

Dollars

Hectares

m2 / Dollars


Level “ “ “ “

1

NK Landscaping

Defects

20% Loss of Asset

50% Loss of Asset

409 Seeding or Planting 411 Maintain Landscaped Shrubs 412 Mulching 419 Other Vegetation Control Works 410 Landscape Planting –

Urban

m2

Dollars

m2

Dollars

Each (plant)


Level “ “ “ “

3

NL Vegetation in

Urban Areas – Growth on

Vegetation is 100 mm high

Vegetation is 200 mm high


Litres


Level

3



Page 23 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

Medians and

Shoulders

408 Tractor Treatment, Chemical 404 Hand Mowing 402 Tractor Slashing - Urban 403 Tractor Slashing – Boom Mower

Hectares

m2 / Dollars

Hectares

m2 / Dollars

“ “ “ “

12 Rest Area

Defects PB Dead Trees or

Limbs in Rest Area

Any

Any

405 Clearing 440 Rest Area Servicing

Dollars

Dollars

5 Days

5 Days

1

PC Unusable

Toilet Facilities

Any

Any

440 Rest Area Servicing

Dollars

48 Hours

1 (Special)

PA Litter, Below

Standard Amenity Furniture in Rest Area

Any

Litter bins not to overflow. Amenity furniture to be kept functional.


Dollars


Level

3

PZ Rest Area

Defects Other

Any

Height of predominant vegetation type of 200 mm. Any pavement related potential safety hazard.


Dollars


Level

3



Page 24 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

13 Other

Roadside Defects

RA Unauthorised

Signs

Any

Any

424 Remove Unauthorised Signs

Each (Sign)

5 Days

1 (Special)

RB Unstable

Batter/ Embankment, Missing Material

Potential Traffic Hazard

Potential Traffic Hazard

426 Repair Stability Problems

m3

4 Weeks

2

RC Damaged

Concrete or Paving Blocks

Potential Hazard to Traffic or Pedestrians

Potential Hazard to Traffic or Pedestrians

306 Repair or Replace

Concrete or Paving Blocks, Kerbs and Dykes

m2 / Dollars

5 Days

3

RD Earth, Rock in

Sight Line

Any

Any

425 Earthworks Visibility Clearing

m3

5 Days

1

RE Litter on Road

Reserve

Any environmentally sensitive locations

Any environmentally sensitive locations

420 Roadside Litter Collection -

Rural 421 Roadside Litter Collection -

Urban

Dollars

m3 / Dollars

4 Weeks

1 Hour

1 (Special)



Page 25 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

RF Graffiti


Locations that are highly visible to the public and/or the content is considered offensive

422 Graffiti Removal

m2 / Dollars

24 Hours

1 (Special)

RG Scoured Areas

on the Road Reserve


Scour is likely to affect adjoining private property or affect the structural capacity of the roadway or is likely to cause environmental damage

880 Repair Roadside Fencing 429 Other Roadside Work 310 Installation and Removal of

Erosion and Sediment Control Measures

311 Maintenance of Erosion

and Sediment Control Measures

Linear Metres

Dollars

Dollars

Dollars

5 Days

5 Days

24 Hours

24 Hours

2

RH Abandoned

Vehicles


Any abandoned vehicle in the road reserve. (Notify Local Authority or remove if no By Laws are in place)


Dollars

24 Hours

1 (Special)

RK Illegal

Accesses

Any

Any


Dollars

5 Days

1

RL Illegal Turning

Areas

Any

Any


Dollars

5 Days

1



Page 26 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

RM Landscape

Vegetation Defects


Any visually sensitive location


Dollars


Level

3

RN Damaged Qld

Dept of Main Roads Fencing

Any

Stock or pedestrians likely to gain unauthorised access to the road reserve

880 Repair Roadside Fencing

Linear Metres


Level

1

RP Damaged Qld

Dept of Main Roads Noise Barrier Fencing

Any

One panel missing or damaged

870 Repair Noise Barriers

Dollars


Level

3

RR Damaged or

Unserviceable Bus Shelters

Any

Facility is not functional

890 Service Passenger

Facilities 891 Repair Passenger Facilities

Dollars

Dollars


Level “

3

RT Sediment

Pond Defects General

Any

Any defect likely to affect the proper functioning of the asset

312 Service Sedimentation Ponds

Dollars


Level

2

RU Silted or

Unserviceable Sedimentation Pond Facilities

Any


313 Repair Sedimentation Ponds

Dollars


Level

1 (Special)



Page 27 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

RV Debris on

Sealed Roadway

Any

Debris is likely to be a safety hazard

135 Surface Debris Removal

Dollars


Level

1

RW Damaged

Roadside Weighing Area




Dollars

2 Weeks

3

VC Emergency

Phone Defects

Any

Any

550 Emergency Roadside

Phone Repairs

Each (Phone)

24 Hours

1 (Special)

14 Traffic Sign

Defects SA Missing or

Defective, Regulatory, Warning or Hazard Sign

Any missing sign or dirty sign face, or if, after cleaning, sign is not clearly legible from 150 m at night with lights on low beam in rural areas or legible within 2.5 secs of travel at the operational speed in urban areas speed in urban areas or sign is beyond repair.

Any missing sign or dirty sign face, or if, after cleaning, sign is not clearly legible from 150 m at night with lights on low beam in rural areas or legible within 2.5 secs of travel at the operational speed in urban areas or sign is beyond repair.

501 Install New Signs

Excluding Guide Signs 504 Cleaning Signs etc. 502 Repair Signs (excl. Guide Signs)

Each (Sign)

Each (Sign)

Each (Sign)

24 Hours

24 Hours

24 Hours

1



Page 28 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

General Intervention Level same as Initial Intervention Level but distinguishes between the following deficiencies: - Dirty Sign Face

504 Cleaning signs

Each (Sign)

5 Days

3

SB Missing or

Defective Guide Sign

Any missing sign or dirty sign face, or if, after cleaning, sign is not clearly legible from 150 m at night with lights on low beam in rural areas or legible within 2.5 secs of travel at the operational speed in urban areas or sign is damaged or supporting structure is damaged (ie. posts, fittings etc.

- Sign requires structural repair

(includes all sign components excluding reflective surface sheeting)

(i) < 50% of estimated replacement

costs and < 8 years old (ii) > 50% of estimated replacement

costs and > 8 years old

506 Repair Guide Signs 505 Install New Guide Signs 509 Other Sign Work

Dollars

Dollars

Dollars

5 Days

Purchase & Re-erect 6

Weeks 5 Days

3

- Sign requires structural repair

(includes all sign components including reflective surface sheeting)

(i) < 50% of estimated replacement costs and < 8 years old (ii) > 50% of estimated replacement


506 Repair Guide Signs 505 Install New Guide Signs 509 Other Sign Work

Dollars

Dollars

Dollars

4 Weeks


Weeks 4 Weeks

3



Page 29 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

506 Repair Guide Signs

Dollars

5 Days

3

- Damaged supporting structure

(ie posts, fitting etc) (i) < 50% of estimated replacement

costs and < 8 years old (ii) > 50% of estimated replacement


506 Repair Guide Signs 509 Other Sign Work

Dollars

Dollars

5 Days


Weeks

3

SB Missing or

Defective Guide Sign (cont/…)

- Missing Sign

505 Install New Guide Signs

Dollars


Weeks

3

SC Sign

Misalignment

Any noticeable misalignment

Sign is reflecting glare from vehicles lights at night back to the motorist or the sign is on a noticeable lean.

509 Other Sign Work

Dollars


Level

1



Page 30 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

15 Traffic

Furniture Defects

TA Guide Post or

Delineator Defects

Any

Any missing guide posts in a hazardous location for the travelling public or the post is on a noticeable lean or there is an inability at night to see at least two delineators ahead (both red, both white, or red and white) from a guide post location or any missing delineators on guardrail installation. The above relates to measurement, after cleaning the post and delineator, on low beam.

525 Replace Guardrail Delineators 510 Install New Guide Markers 511 Clean and/or Paint Guide

Markers 512 Repair or Replace Guide

Markers 513 Replace Guide Post Delineators 514 Repair Guide Markers 515 Replace Guide Markers 519 Other Road Guide Post

and Marker Work

Each

(Delineator)

Each

(Marker) “ “

Each (Delineator)

Each Marker

Each

Marker

Dollars


Level “ “ “ “ “ “ “

1



Page 31 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

TB Reference

Marker Defects

Wording on the marker is becoming illegible

Wording on the marker is not legible when viewed from the side of the roadway

512 Repair or Replace Guide

Markers

Each

(Marker) / Dollars


Level

3

TC Guardrail,

Fencing and Concrete Barrier Structural Defects

Damaged guard rail or components (eg. terminal sections) are a potential hazard to traffic or rail is bent 300 mm out of alignment or facility has a loss of structural integrity. The barriers structural integrity or alignment is impaired

Damaged guard rail or components (eg. terminal sections) are a potential hazard to traffic or rail is bent 300 mm out of alignment or facility has a loss of structural integrity. The barriers structural integrity or alignment is impaired


Guardrail, Barrier Furniture 523 Repair Guardrail Barrier

Furniture 524 Replace Guardrail, Barrier

Furniture 530 Repair Wire Rope Barrier 532 Repair Ingal Barrier 534 Repair Impact Barrier Furniture

Linear Metres

Linear Metres

Linear Metres

Metres/Dollars

Metres/Dollars

Metres/Dollars

48 Hours

48 Hours

48 Hours “ “ “

1

TD Kerb or Dyke

Defects

Any broken Kerb or Dyke

Kerbing with a break projecting > 30 mm into trafficked areas or > 500 linear metres of continuous kerbing length damaged or missing


Concrete or Paving Blocks, Kerbs and Dykes


Linear Metres

Dollars


Level “

3



Page 32 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

TE Guardrail,

Fencing and Concrete Barrier Appearance Defects

Any appearance defects

Visibility at night is significantly impaired by accumulation of dirt, peeling paint, etc.

521 Clean and/or Paint

Guardrail, Barrier Furniture

Linear Metres


Level

3

16 Traffic Marking

Defects UA Missing or

Faded Painted Road Lines and Markings

Marking when viewed at night at low beam has lost reflectivity

More that 50% of the line or marking has lost reflectivity or is discoloured.

701 Repaint Road Centre Lines

– Minor 702 Repaint Road Centre Lines

– Major 703 Repaint Double Barrier

Lines – Daywork 709 Repaint Double Barrier

Line – General 710 Repaint Road Edge Lines

– Minor 711 Repaint Road Edge Lines

– Major

Line kms “ “ “ “ “


Level “ “ “ “ “

1



Page 33 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

UA Missing or

faded painted road lines and markings (cont/…)

712 Repaint Edge Lines –

100mm Width 713 Repaint Edge Lines –

150mm Width 714 Repaint Unbroken Lane

Line – General 719 Repaint Single Barrier Line

- General 720 Repaint Single Broken

Lines 721 Repaint Barrier Broken

Lines 722 Repaint Broken Lane Line

– General 723 Repaint Continuity Line 724 Repaint Broken Line –

General 725 Repaint 150mm Outline –

General 729 Urban Line Marking –

Minor 730 Repaint Lateral Markings

“ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “

m²

“

“ “ “ “


Level “ “ “

“

“ “

1



Page 34 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

731 Remark Road Markings 735 Thermosplastic Line

marking 736 Audiotactile Linemarking 745 Remove Unwanted Road

Lines 750 Remove Unwanted

Markings – Grinding 759 Line Marking - General

“ “

Line kms “ “ “

“ “ “ “ “ “

UE Raised

Pavement Marker Defects

The loss of or loss of reflectivity of any markers.

Loss of, or loss of reflectivity of >50% of markers on straights or >25% of markers on curves, or any consecutive markers are missing.

740 Raised Pavement Markers

Each

(Marker)


Level

1

17 Traffic Signal

and Lighting Defects

VA Traffic Signal

Defects, General

Any reported

Any reported

920 Electricity Supply, Traffic

Signals 922 Phone Charges, Traffic Signals

Dollars

“


Level

“

1, 3



Page 35 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

VA Traffic Signal Defects, General (cont/…)

923 Phone Charges, Traffic

Signal Coordination 624 Traffic Signal, Coordination

Servicing 629 Routine Traffic

Management Equipment Servicing

610 Routine Signals Servicing 630 Accident Damage, Traffic

Signals 606 Modify Signals – Add Lanterns 650 After Hours Call Out 620 Repair Inductive Loops 622 Replace PTF Controller 619 Traffic Signal Work, General 601 Replace Lamps and Clean

Lenses (Bulk Change) 602 Replace Defective Lamps

and Clean Lenses (Emergent Change)

“ “ “ “ “

Each (Lantern)

Dollars

Each (Joint)

Dollars

Dollars

Each (Lamp)

Each (Lamp)


Level “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “

1, 3



Page 36 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

VA Traffic Signal Defects, General (cont/…)

621 Inductive Loops (Recut Loops) 930 Modify and Digitise

Computerised As Constructed Plans

931 Modify Paper Based As

Constructed Plans 607 Modify Traffic Signals

- Remove Lanterns

631 Accident/Storm Damage – Re-aim Lanterns

632 Accident Damage –

Replace Lanterns, Posts and Foundations

633 Accident Damage –

Replace Post and Foundations and Reinstate Lanterns From Old Pole

623 Replace Pedestrian

Crossing Push Buttons 641 Repaint Controller 642 Repaint Mast Arms

Including Hardware

Each (Joint)

Dollars/Each (Plan)

Dollars/Each (Plan)

Each (Lantern)

Each (Lantern)/

Dollars

Each (Pole)/Dollars

Dollars

Each (Set)/Dollars

Each

(Controller)

Each (Mast Arm)


Level “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “

1, 3



Page 37 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

643 Repaint Poles Including

Hardware 636 Replace Damaged Pit Covers 640 Repair Damaged Pits

Each (Pole)

Each (Cover)

Each (Pit)

“ “ “

VB Traffic Lighting

Defects, General

Any Reported

Any Reported

608 Routine Lighting and

Power Servicing 634 Reinstate Damaged Poles

and Lighting 609 Lighting and Power, General 635 Repair Minor Damage to

Electrical Pits 921 Electricity Supply, Lighting 603 Replace Lamps and Clean

Emitting and Reflecting Surfaces

- Scheduled (Bulk) 604 Replace Lamps and Clean

Emitting and Reflecting Surfaces

- Individual (Unscheduled)

Dollars

Each (Pole) / Dollars

Dollars

Each (Pit)

Dollars

Each (Lamp)

Each (Lamp)


Level “ “ “ “ “ “

1, 3



Page 38 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

605 Clean Light Emitting and Reflecting Surfaces

- Scheduled (Bulk) 637 Replace Damaged

Electrical Pit Covers

Each (Lamp)

Each (Lid)

“ “

18 Bridge &

Miscellaneous Structure Defects

WA Bridge Defects

General

Any reported Defects likely to affect the usability of the bridge component

Any reported Defects likely to affect the usability of the bridge component.

809 Routine Bridge Servicing 859 Bridgework General 851 Repair Spalled and

Cracked Structural Concrete Elements

801 Routine Bridge Servicing

(Concrete) 837 Replace Deck Planks With

New Planks 802 Routine Bridge Servicing (Steel) 822 Repair Minor Damage to

Steel Elements

Metres Length

Dollars

Dollars

Metres Length

m2

Metres Length

Dollars


Level “ “ “ “ “ “

Not listed



Page 39 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

WA Bridge Defects

General (cont.)

829 Bridgework, Other Structural (Steel)

819 Bridgework, Other

Structural (Concrete) 803 Routine Bridge Servicing

(Timber) 852 Repair Spalled and


849 Bridgework, Other

Structural (Timber) 853 Repair Spalled and


811 Clean Out Vent Holes in Superstructure 812 Clean Bearings, Bearing

Sills, Sill Drains 813 Tighten / Replace

Concrete Deck Joint Bolts 807 Repair Footway Surface 830 Tighten / Replace Timber

Joint Bolts

Dollars

Dollars

Metres Length

Dollars

Dollars

Dollars

Dollars

Dollars

Dollars

Dollars

Dollars


Level “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “

Not Listed



Page 40 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

831 Timber Preservative / Waterproofing Treatment

854 Clean Out Abutment and

Wing Wall Weepholes

Dollars

Dollars

“ “

WB Failed Bridge

Joints

Any Reported

Any reported. Joints to be kept clean.

815 Repair/Replace Expansion

Joints (Concrete) 823 Repair/Replace Expansion

Joint (Steel) 810 Clean Out Expansion Joints and Associated Drains

Metres

Length/Dollars

Metres Length

Dollars


Level “ “

2

WC Scouring

Around Bridge Piles

Any Reported

Structural integrity of the structure is likely to be affected


Metres Length/

Dollars


Level

2

WD Debris on

Bridge

Debris 30mm deep against kerb or any blockage to bridge scuppers

Debris 50mm deep against kerb or any blockage to bridge scuppers


Metres Length/

Dollars


Level

2

WE Cracked/

Scoured Abutment Protection

Any Reported

Any Reported

855 Repair/Replace Batter

Protection

Dollars


Level

2



Page 41 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

WF Damaged

Handrails, Bridge Rails and Posts

Any Reported

Any Reported


Metres Length/

Dollars


Level

3

WG Loose Bridge

Deck and/or Running Planks

Any Reported

Running surface is hazardous to the road user.

809 Routine Bridge Servicing 632 Replace Deck Planks With

New Planks

Dollars

Square Metres


Level

3

WH Peeling Paint

on Timber Superstructure

Any Reported

Any significant loss of paint which affects the operational performance of the element.

805 Reinstate/Repaint

Handrails and Guardrails

Dollars


Level

3

WI Faulty Timber

Piles

Any Reported

Structural integrity of the structure is likely to be affected.

833 Reinstate Timber Piles

Metres Length/

Dollars


Level

3

WK Peeling Paint

on Bridge Structural Elements

Any Reported

Any significant loss of paint which would lead to the elements ability to carry out its functional purpose being significantly affected.


Metres Length


Level

3

WL Relieving Slab

General

Any Reported

Any Reported

850 Replace/Repair Relieving Slabs

m3/Dollars


Level

3



Page 42 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

WM Bridge

Waterway Obstruction

Any Waterway Obstruction

Major obstruction of the waterway > 25% of the entry/exit obstructed. Significant erosion or movement of rock protection around bridge elements.

856 Clean Out Waterways

Dollars


Level

2

WN Loose Rails In

Grids

Any Reported

Any structural damage or damage that may cause vehicle damage.

861 Repair or Replace Grids

Dollars


Level

3

WP Timber

Termites

Any Reported

Any Reported

839 Treat for Termites.

Metres Length/

Dollars


Level

2

WS Debris/Soil In

Grids

Area Under Cattle Grid 25% Full

Area under cattle grid 50% full.

860 Routine Grid Servicing

Dollars


Level

3

WT Corrosion

Steel Elements

Any Reported

Any significant degree of corrosion which would lead to the element’s ability to carry out its functional purpose being significantly affected.

820 Clean-Repair Steel

Elements 821 Clean Aggressive

Contamination from Steel Girders

Dollars

Dollars


Level “

2

WU Faulty Timber

Girders

Any Reported

Structural Integrity of the Structure likely to be affected.

836 Replace Timber Girders

Each


Level

3



Page 43 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

WV Faulty Timber

Kerbs

Any Reported

Any Reported

838 Repair/Replace Kerbs

Linear Metres


Level

3

WW Faulty Timber

Corbels

Any Reported

Structural integrity of the structure likely to be affected.

834 Repair/Replace Timber Corbels

Each


Level

3

WY Railway and Train Crossing Defects, General

Any Reported Any structural damage or damage that may cause a hazard to the road user.

865 Rail Crossing Servicing Dollars By General Intervention

Level

2

19 Emergency ZZ Emergency

Call Out

Any Reported

Any

452 Emergency Call Out Activity 715 Emergency Grid Repairs 450 After Hours Call Out

Service

Dollars

Dollars

Dollars

1 Hour

1 Hour

1 Hour

1



Page 44 of 46




Response Time

Priority Group

20 Common

Defects XA Inspection

Needed

Any Required

Any Required

940 Major Bridge Inspections 631 Routine Maintenance

Inspections, Timber Bridges

901 RMPC Joint Maintenance

Requirements Assessment 941 Level 1 Bridge Inspections

Dollars

Dollars

Dollars

Dollars

As Required

“ “ “

1 (Special)

XB Bridge

Management Reporting

Update Needed

Any Required

Any Required

942 Prepare Bridge Information

System Forms 943 Data Entry – Bridge

Information System

Dollars

Dollars

As

Required

As Required

1 (Special)

“

XC Environmental

Management Plan (Maintenance) Needed

Any Required

Any Required

910 Preparation of

Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance)

813 Implementation Monitoring

and Maintenance of Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance)

Dollars

Dollars

As

Required

As Required

1 (Special)



Page 45 of 46

TABLE 1

INITIAL INTERVENTION LEVELS

UNSEALED SHOULDER DEFECTS

Seal Width

Traffic

> 8 m

6-8 m

< 6 m

Activity

Unit of

Measurement

Response

Time

GC Scour Channels, GD Shoulder Edge Drop Off & GH Ruts In Shoulder

< 500 vpd

500 – 2500 vpd

2500 – 5000 vpd

> 5000 vpd

125

100

75

75

100

75

50

50

75

50

50

50

215 Light Shoulder Grading - Rural 222 Remove Shoulder Material and Replace 216 Heavy Shoulder Grading - Rural 217 Light Shoulder Grading - Urban 218 Heavy Shoulder Grading - Urban 220 Shoulder Pothole Patching 219 Gravel Supply 229 Other Unsealed Shoulder Work

Shoulder km/side

m3 (loose)

Shoulder km/side

m2

m2

m3 (loose)

Dollars

Dollars

By General Intervention Level

“ “ “ “ “ “ “



Page 46 of 46

TABLE 2

GENERAL INTERVENTION LEVELS

UNSEALED SHOULDER DEFECTS

Seal Width

Traffic

> 8 m

6-8 m

< 6 m

Activity

Unit of

Measurement

Response

Time

GC Scour Channels, GD Shoulder Edge Drop Off & GH Ruts In Shoulder

< 500 vpd

500 – 2500 vpd

2500 – 5000 vpd

> 5000 vpd

150

150

100

100

125

100

75

75

100

75

75

50

215 Light Shoulder Grading - Rural 222 Remove Shoulder Material and Replace 216 Heavy Shoulder Grading - Rural 217 Light Shoulder Grading - Urban 218 Heavy Shoulder Grading - Urban 220 Shoulder Pothole Patching 219 Gravel Supply 229 Other Unsealed Shoulder Work

Shoulder km/side

m3 (loose)

Shoulder km/side

m2

m2

m3 (loose)

Dollars

Dollars

By General Intervention Level

“ “ “ “ “ “ “

RMPC (Open) Activity Standards

Part 6 Vers 1.0 Appendix B June 2001 Page 1 of 3


Appendix B

Activity Standards



Activity Standards

ACTIVITY Symbol & Description (to apply for contracts from 1 July

2001) as per new listing

ACTIVITY Payment Unit of Measure

Pre 1/7/2001 Activity Symbol

100 SEALED SURFACES 101 Edge Repair (Manual) Tonnes 111

102 Edge Repair (Mechanical) Tonnes 112

103 Edge Repair with Emulsion/Aggregate m3 (Loose) 113

105 Pothole Patching Tonnes 121

107 Heavy Patching Tonnes 125

110 Surface Correction with Premix/Asphalt (Manual) Tonnes 122

111 Surface Correction with Premix/Asphalt (Mechanical) Tonnes 127

117 Reseal m2 161

118 Seal Coating (Minor) m2 128

123 Surface Strip Treatment of Cracks Linear Metres 124

130 Surface Sweeping m2 126

141 Temporary Pavement Repairs (Mechanical) m2 185

142 Emergency Temporary Pavement Repairs Tonnes 133

143 Pavement Repairs (Mechanical) - Minor m2 168

144 Pavement Repairs (Mechanical) - Major m3 (in place) 169

150 Insitu-Stabilisation m3 135

151 Gravel Supply-Insitu Stabilisation m3 (loose) 766 152 Gravel Cartage-Insitu Stabilisation m3 (loose) - kms 767

155 Asphalt Overlay Tonnes 136

157 Excavate and Replace Asphalt Tonnes 138

200 UNSEALED SURFACES

201 Light Formation Grading Kilometres – Metres Width

211

202 Medium Formation Grading Kilometres 215

203 Heavy Formation Grading Kilometres 214

204 Gravel/Material Supply – Heavy Formation Grading m3 (loose) 188

205 Formation Resheeting m3 (loose) 212

206 Remove Formation Material and Replace, if Required m3 (loose) 213

215 Light Shoulder Grading - Rural Shoulder km Side

141







216 Heavy Shoulder Grading - Rural Shoulder km Side

144

219 Gravel Supply - Heavy Shoulder Grading m3 (loose) 148

220 Shoulder Pothole Patching m3 (loose) 147

221 Shoulder Resheeting m3 (loose) 142

300 DRAINAGE 301 Install Earth Surface Drains Metres 311 305 Clean Earth and Concrete Surface Drains Metres 312 310 Installation and Removal of Erosion and Sediment Control Measures

Dollars 769

311 Maintenance of Erosion and Sediment Control Measures

Dollars 771

322 Clean Culverts, Pipes and Pits- Major m3 / Dollars 323 330 Install Subsoil Drains Linear Metres 331 400 ROADSIDE 401 Tractor Slashing, Rural Hectares 411 402 Tractor Slashing, Urban Hectares 417 403 Tractor Slashing - Boom Mower m2 / Dollars 765 404 Hand Mowing m2 / Dollars 416 405 Clearing Dollars 413 406 Herbicide Spot Spraying – Declared Plants Dollars 773 407 Herbicide Spraying Litres 412 420 Roadside Litter Collection - Rural Dollars 175 421 Roadside Litter Collection - Urban m3 / Dollars 435 424 Removal of Unauthorised Signs Each (Sign) 431 440 Rest Area Servicing Dollars 421

452 Emergency Call Out Activities Dollars 714

500 ROAD FURNITURE 501 Install New and/or Relocate Old Signs Each (Sign) 511 502 Repair Signs (excluding Guide Signs) Each (Sign) /

Dollars 513

503 Relocate Existing Signs (excluding Guide Signs) Each (Sign) 514 504 Cleaning Signs Each (Sign) 512 506 Repair Guide Signs Dollars 516







512 Repair or Replace Guide Markers Each (Marker)/Dollars

563

522 Repair or Replace Guardrail, Barrier Furniture Dollars 523

900 OVERHEADS 912 Payment of Permits and Fees (Environmental) Dollars 772


Part 6 Vers 1.0 Appendix B June 2001

Page 1 of 58

100 SEALED SURFACES

101 Edge Repair (Manual)

Description

The manual repair with asphalt or premix of isolated lengths of sealed pavement to restore the edges to line and level. Edge Repair (Manual) should be used for isolated repairs which are less than or equal to 5m in length and where the cumulative length of isolated repairs in any 100m section is less than or equal to 25m. Edge Repair (Mechanical) - Activity 102 shall be used for repairs where more than 5m of continuous length is required; or where a combination of repair lengths (ie. less than and greater than 5m) occurs within any 100m section; or where the cumulative length of isolated repairs (ie. less than or equal to 5m) is greater than 25m in any 100m section.

Work Operations

The following operations shall be included as part of this Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant,

labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • preparation of the work area - refer to Applicable

Specifications • the supply and application of a bitumen emulsion -

tack coat - refer to Applicable Specifications • the supply, placement and compaction of the asphalt

or premix - refer to Applicable Specifications • all other operations in the Applicable Specifications • certification that the product meets the requirements

of the Restoration Standards, including all necessary visual inspections, compliance and audit testing

• the clean up of the site including the disposal of any

waste / excavated material in accordance with any State Government legislation or Local Government By-laws that are applicable

Where clarification of details in relation to these Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance.

Applicable Specifications

MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bitumen Emulsion

MRS 11.21 Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements SS Premix Asphalt. SS Shoulder Gravel All cracked or loose material shall be removed from the area to be repaired. A vertical face at least 20 mm high shall be formed along the edge of the existing sealed pavement. The horizontal and vertical faces of the area to be repaired shall be sprayed with a tack coat of bitumen emulsion and the tack coat shall overlap slightly the existing seal.

Restoration Standards

The seal width shall be restored to within 30 mm of the original line of the seal edge. The finished surface shall be within +5 mm of the height of and conform to the shape of the surrounding road surface. The standard of compaction shall be such that the final passes of the compaction equipment leave no impressions on the restored surface.

Activity Item and Unit of Measurement

101 Edge Repair (Manual) Tonnes

Testing Requirements

Minimum test frequency Asphalt/Premix Materials/Mix Design 1/source/year Maximum Density <200t/source/year - of Asphalt Q307 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Bitumen Content and <200t/source/year- Aggregate Grading of 2/source/year Asphalt Q308A or Q308C >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Horizontal Straightedge Transverse 2/lot min Longitudinal Alignment 1/lot min Max lot size One (1) day The testing requirements listed for all the materials above shall apply to the cumulative quantities used throughout the contract and not to specific Work Order quantities. Where the Work Order quantity does not reach the required testing frequency, the quantity shall be aggregated with other Work Order quantities from that specific supply source until such time as a test is required. Work Order quantities may be recorded on a materials testing register and testing initiated once the



Page 2 of 58

cumulative total for a specific supply source reaches the specified figure.

Particular Planning Points to Consider

1. What has caused the defect? Schedule another Activity to correct this, if needed.

2. Make sure no other major maintenance or

construction is scheduled for the area of the defect. 3. If crocodile cracking is adjacent to the affected

area, schedule another Activity to repair it. 4. Are there any related defects? 5. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance

more appropriate? 6. Mark out the area for repair. 7. Determine whether a manual or mechanical edge

repair method is more efficient. Manual - up to approximately 5 m isolated length. Mechanical -more than approximately 20 m continuous lengths.

8. Note if line marking will be required. Schedule

another Activity. 9. Specify that the appropriate plant, material and

crew (including quantities of materials) and organise these.

10. Schedule waterproofing (Activity Number 118)

within four weeks if a cold laid premix is used and a reseal is not scheduled in that period.

102 Edge Repair (Mechanical)

Description

The machine repair (eg. using a profiler and flowcon equipment or similar) with asphalt or premix of sealed pavement edges to line and level. Edge Repair (Mechanical)- Activity 102 shall be used for repairs where more than 5m of continuous length is required; or where a combination of repair lengths (ie. less than and greater than 5m) occurs within any 100m section; or where greater than 25m of isolated repairs (ie. repairs that are less than or equal to 5m in length) occurs within any 100m section. Edge Repair (Manual) - Activity 101 shall be used for isolated repairs which are up to approximately 5m in length (max).

Work Operations

The following operations shall be included as part of this Activity:

• site establishment and disestablishment of all plant, labour and materials

• establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • preparation of the work area - refer to Applicable

Specifications • the supply and application of a bitumen emulsion


or premix - refer to Applicable Specifications • the supply and installation of TRPM's or line spotting

as required. • all other operations in the Applicable Specifications • certification that the product meets the requirements



waste/excavated material in accordance with any State Government legislation or Local Government By-laws that are applicable

• notification to the Principal of line marking requirements



MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.21 Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements. SS Premix Asphalt. SS Shoulder Gravel All cracked or loose material shall be removed from the area to be repaired. A vertical face at least 20 mm high shall be formed along the edge of the existing sealed pavement. The horizontal and vertical faces of the area to be repaired shall be sprayed with a tack coat of bitumen emulsion and the tack coat shall overlap slightly the existing seal. Where an item for establishment/disestablishment of paver and paving gang at paving site, is provided in the



Page 3 of 58

schedule of work items, the following work operations shall apply: 1. Transport of plant and personnel to the work site

2. Storage of plant adjacent to the site

3. Accommodation of personnel adjacent to the site

4. Transport of plant and personnel from the site


The seal width shall be restored to within 30 mm of the original line of the seal edge. The finished surface shall be within +5 mm of the height of and conform to the shape of the surrounding road surface. The standard of compaction shall be such that the final passes of the compaction equipment leave no impressions on the restored surface. Install TRPM’s and/or Spotting if required.


102 Edge Repair (Mechanical) Tonnes


Minimum test frequency - Asphalt/Premix Materials/Mix Design 1/source/year Maximum Density of Asphalt Q307 <200t/source/year- 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Bitumen Content and Aggregate <200t/source/year- Grading of Asphalt Q308A or Q308 2 /source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Horizontal Straightedge Transverse 2/lot min Longitudinal Alignment 1/lot min Max lot size One (1) day The testing requirements listed for all the materials above shall apply to the cumulative quantities used throughout the contract and not to specific Work Order quantities. Where the Work Order quantity does not reach the required testing frequency, the quantity shall be aggregated with other Work Order quantities from that specific supply source until such time as a test is required. Work Order quantities may be recorded on a materials testing register and testing initiated once the cumulative total for a specific supply source reaches the specified figure.



2. Make sure no other major maintenance or construction is scheduled for the area of the defect.

3. If crocodile cracking is adjacent to the affected


more appropriate? 6. Mark out the area for repair. 7. Determine whether a manual or mechanical edge

repair method is more efficient. Manual - up to approximately 5 m isolated lengths. Mechanical - more than approximately 20 m continuous lengths.

8. Note if line marking will be required. Schedule another Activity.

9. Specify the appropriate plant, material and crew

(including quantities of materials) and organise these. Ensure the surfacing material will give a texture consistent with the adjoining road, or schedule texturising.

10. Schedule waterproofing (Activity Number 118)

within four weeks if a cold laid premix is used and a reseal is not rescheduled in that period.

103 Edge Repair with Emulsion/Aggregate

Description

The machine repair with graded aggregate and emulsion using blower type compaction equipment of sealed pavement edges to line and level. Includes surface preparation and tack coating.


MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at oadworks. MRS 11.21 Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.22 Supply of Cover Aggregate All cracked or loose material shall be removed from the area to be repaired. The horizontal and vertical faces of the area to be repaired shall be sprayed with a tack coat of bitumen emulsion and the tack coat shall overlap slightly the adjacent seal. The aggregate shall be an approved mix of 5mm, 7mm and/or 10mm crushed rock or crushed gravel conforming with MRS 11.22. It shall be uniformly coated with bitumen emulsion. The quantity of bitumen emulsion incorporated in the aggregate shall be sufficient to prevent aggregate stripping from the patch but not so much as to cause a fatty surface.



Page 4 of 58

The coated aggregate shall be projected by the air jet onto the prepared surface so that it forms a compacted interlocking mass. If required to prevent pick-up by traffic, a single layer of dry stone shall be spread over the coated aggregate. Loose stone shall be swept from the patched area and the adjoining pavement.


The seal width shall be restored to within 30 mm of the original line of the seal edge. The finished surface shall be within +5 mm of the height of and conform to the shape of the surrounding road surface. The patch shall not exhibit stripping of aggregate or bleeding of bitumen.


103 Edge Repair with Emulsion/Aggregate m3 (loose)


Minimum test frequency -

Aggregate - 10% Fines Q205B 1/source/year Wet/Dry Strength Q205C 1/source/year Crushed Particles Q215 1/source/year Weak Faces Q217 1/source/year Grading Q103D 1 per 400 t Flakiness Index Q201B 1 per 400 t Horizontal Straightedge Transverse 2/lot min Longitudinal Alignment 1/lot min Max lot size One (1) day The testing requirements listed for all the materials above shall apply to the cumulative quantities used throughout the contract and not to specific Work Order quantities. Where the Work Order quantity does not reach the required testing frequency, the quantity shall be aggregated with other Work Order quantities from that specific supply source until such time as a test is required. Work Order quantities may be recorded on a materials testing register and testing initiated once the cumulative total for a specific supply source reaches the specified figure.




permanent works is scheduled for the area of the defect.


area, schedule another Activity to repair it. 4. Are there any related defects?

5. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance more appropriate?

6. Mark out the area for repair. 7. Determine whether a minor or major edge repair is

more efficient. Minor - up to approximately 5 m isolated lengths. Major - more than approximately 20 m continuous lengths.

8. Note if line marking will be required. Schedule

another Activity. 9. Specify the appropriate plant, material and crew

(including quantities of materials) and organise these. Ensure the surfacing material will give a texture as consistent as possible with the adjoining road.

105 Pothole Patching

Description

The repair with asphalt or premix of an isolated hole or series of holes in the sealed roadway surface that is in otherwise sound condition.

Note

The repair of potholes in other than sound pavement (ie there is a presence of other defects such as cracking, shoving, rutting, etc)should be carried out under a different Activity (eg Activity 142, 143 etc.) depending on the situation and the appropriate response time required. In deciding the most appropriate Activity to use, consideration should be given to any impending construction/rehabilitation that may be programmed for the area. This will help to achieve the most efficient choice of the maintenance Activity required (i.e. a temporary repair - 142 or a more permanent repair – 105 or 107).

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • the removal of any cracked or loose material from the

area to be repaired • the formation of a vertical face on the hole edges.

The edges of the hole are to be cleaned and shaped in the form of a rectangle

• the supply and application of a bitumen emulsion

tack coat – refer to Applicable Specifications



Page 5 of 58

• the supply, placement and compaction of the asphalt or premix

• all other operations in the Applicable Specifications • certification that the product meets the requirements






MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.21 Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements. SS Premix Asphalt


The finished surface shall be within +5 mm of the height of and conform to the shape of the surrounding road surface. The standard of compaction shall be such that the final passes of the compaction equipment leave no impressions on the restored surface. No loose material shall be left on sealed carriageway.


105 Pothole Patching Tonnes


Minimum test frequency - Asphalt/Premix: Materials/Mix Design 1/source/year Maximum Density of Asphalt Q307 <200t/source/year- 2/source/year >200t/source/year 4/source/year Bitumen Content and Aggregate Grading of Asphalt Q308A or Q308C <200t/source/year- 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Horizontal Straightedge 2 per lot min Max lot size: One (1) day

The testing requirements listed for all the materials above shall apply to the cumulative quantities used throughout the contract and not to specific Work Order quantities. Where the Work Order quantity does not reach the required testing frequency, the quantity shall be aggregated with other Work Order quantities from that specific supply source until such time as a test is required. Work Order quantities may be recorded on a materials testing register and testing initiated once the cumulative total for a specific supply source reaches the specified figure.





area, either a. schedule another Activity to repair it; b. extend the area of the pothole repair to include

it. 4. Are there any related defects? 5. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance

more appropriate? 6. Mark out the area for repair. 7. Remember when scheduling the work that

potholes in the wheel path deteriorate rapidly. 8. Specify the appropriate plant, materials and crew

(including quantities of materials) and organise these.

107 Heavy Patching

Description

The repair with asphalt or premix of any hole or series of holes in the roadway surface that is in otherwise sound condition which results in a total patched area greater than 10 m2.

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area



Page 6 of 58

• the removal of any cracked or loose material from the area to be repaired

• the formation of a vertical face on the hole edges.

The edges of the hole are to be cleaned and shaped in the form of a rectangle;


tack coat – refer to Applicable Specifications • the supply, placement and compaction of the asphalt

or premix • all other operations in the Applicable Specifications • certification that the product meets the requirements






MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.21 Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements. SS Premix Asphalt.


The standard of compaction shall be such that the final passes of the compaction equipment leave no impressions on the restored surface. The finished surface shall be within +5 mm of the height of and conform to the shape of the surrounding road surface. No loose material shall be left on sealed carriageway.


107 Heavy Patching tonnes


Minimum test frequency - Asphalt/Premix: Materials/Mix Design 1/source/year

Maximum Density of Asphalt Q307 <200t/source/year- 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Bitumen Content and Aggregate Grading of Asphalt Q308A or Q308C <200t/source/year- 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Horizontal Straightedge 2/lot min. Max lot size. One (1) day The testing requirements listed for all the materials above shall apply to the cumulative quantities used throughout the contract and not to specific Work Order quantities. Where the Work Order quantity does not reach the required testing frequency, the quantity shall be aggregated with other Work Order quantities from that specific supply source until such time as a test is required. Work Order quantities may be recorded on a materials testing register and testing initiated once the cumulative total for a specific supply source reaches the specified.






area, either a. schedule another Activity to repair it. b. extend the area of the repair to include it. 4. Are there any related defects? 5. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance

more appropriate? 6. Mark out the area for repair. 7. Note if road marking will be required. Schedule

another Activity. 8. Specify the appropriate plant, materials and crew

(including quantities of materials) and organise these. Ensure the surface material will give a texture consistent with the adjoining road, or schedule texturising.

9. Arrange and specify a disposal area for excavated

material. 10. Schedule waterproofing (Activity Number 118)

within four weeks if a cold laid premix is used and a reseal is not scheduled in that period.



Page 7 of 58

110 Surface Correction with Premix/Asphalt (Manual)

Description

The application by hand of a premix or asphalt levelling course to distorted and rutted areas of the bituminous surface.

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • preparation of the work area - refer to Applicable

Specifications • the supply and application of a bitumen emulsion


or premix - refer to Applicable Specifications • all other operations in the Applicable Specifications • certification that the product meets the requirements






MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.21 Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements. SS Premix Asphalt.


The finished surface shall be within +5 mm of the height of and conform to the shape of the surrounding road surface.

The standard of compaction shall be such that the final passes of the compaction equipment leave no impressions on the restored surface. Install TRPM’s and/or Spotting if required.


110 Surface Correction with Premix/Asphalt (Manual) Tonnes


Minimum test frequency - Asphalt/Premix: Materials/Mix Design 1/source/year Maximum Density of Asphalt Q307 <200t/source/year- 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Bitumen Content and Aggregate <200t/source/year- Grading of Asphalt Q308A or Q308C 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Horizontal Straightedge 1 per repair The testing requirements listed for all the materials above shall apply to the cumulative quantities used throughout the contract and not to specific Work Order quantities. Where the Work Order quantity does not reach the required testing frequency, the quantity shall be aggregated with other Work Order quantities from that specific supply source until such time as a test is required. Work Order quantities may be recorded on a materials testing register and testing initiated once the cumulative total for a specific supply source reaches the specified figure.




construction is scheduled for the area of the defect. 3. Are there any related defects? 4. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance

more appropriate? 5. Mark out the area for repair. 6. Determine whether a manual or mechanical

correction repair is more efficient. Manual - up to approximately 10 m2 in isolated areas. Mechanical - more than approximately 10 m2 in one area.

7. Note if road marking will be required. Schedule

another Activity.



Page 8 of 58

8. Specify the appropriate plant, materials and crew (including quantities of material) and organise these.

11. Schedule waterproofing (Activity Number 118) within

four weeks if a cold laid premix is used and a reseal is not scheduled in that period.

111 Surface Correction with Premix/Asphalt (Mechanical)

Description

The application by machine (e.g. paver, flowcon) of premix or asphalt levelling course to distorted and rutted areas of the bituminous surface.

Work Operations


labour and material • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • preparation of the existing surface, including the

installation of offset points for the spotting of the centre and edge lines upon completion of the overlay.


tack coat – refer Applicable Specifications • the supply, placement and compaction of the asphalt • the supply and installation of TRPM's or line spotting

as required. • all other operations in the Applicable Specifications • certification that the product meets the requirements



waste material in accordance with any State Government legislation or Local Government By-laws that are applicable

• notification to the Principal of linemarking

requirements. Where clarification of details in relation to these Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance.


MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.21 Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements. SS- Premix Asphalt.


As per Applicable Specifications above. The finished surface shall be within ±5 mm of the height of and conform to the shape of the surrounding road surface. Install TPRM in and/or Spotting if required. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with the requirements of MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements with respect to rolling pattern requirements and temperature at time of rolling commencement. The standard of compaction shall be such that the final passes of the compaction equipment leave no impressions on the restored surface.


111 Surface Correction with tonnes Premix/Asphalt (Mechanical)


Minimum test frequency - Asphalt/Premix: Materials/Mix Design 1/source/year Maximum Density of Asphalt Q307 <200t/source/year- 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Bitumen Content and Aggregate <200t/source/year- Grading of Asphalt Q308A or Q308C 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Temperature at time of rolling commencement - 6 per lot Horizontal Straightedge 1 per 10 m Maximum lot size one (1) day Asphalt /Premix Aggregate 10% Fines Q205B 1/source/year Crushed Particles Q215 1/source/year Grading Q103D 1per 400t Flakiness Index Q201B 1per 400t Polished Aggregate Friction Value Q203 1per 400t



Page 9 of 58







more appropriate? 6. Mark out the area for repair. 7. Determine whether a manual or mechanical

correction repair method is more efficient. Manual - up to approximately 10 m2 in isolated areas.

Mechanical - more than approximately 10 m2 in one area. 8. Note if road marking will be required. Schedule

another Activity. 9. Consider sub-contracting options. 10. Specify the appropriate plant, materials and crew

(including quantities of material) and organise these.

12. Schedule waterproofing (Activity Number 118) within

four weeks if a cold laid premix is used and a reseal is not scheduled in that period.

117 Reseal

Description

The treatment of short sections of the existing roadway surface using certified sprayer and plant, bitumen and precoated screenings to restore seal life and/or skid resistance.

Work Operations

The following operations shall be included as part of this Activity:

• site establishment and disestablishment of all plant, labour and materials

• establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • preparation of the existing surface, including the

installation of offset points for the spotting of the centre and edge lines upon completion of the reseal works.

• preparation of a suitable seal design • the supply, carting, heating and spraying of a

bitumen seal coat (including cutter and additive) at the design rate.

• the supply, carting, spreading and rolling etc, of a

precoated aggregate at the design rate • the supply and installation of TRPM's or line spotting

as required. • all other operations in the Applicable Specifications

(ie. MRS 11.02, 11.11, 11.22 etc.) for this Activity (eg. sweeping, incorporation of cutter and additive etc.)

• certification that the product meets the requirements





requirements Where clarification of details in relation to these Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance.


MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.11 Sprayed Bituminous Surfacing (excluding emulsion). MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.17 Bitumen MRS 11.19 Bitumen Cutter and Flux Oils MRS 11.21 Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.22 Supply of Cover Aggregate.


Dimensions to be not less than, nor exceed by 150 mm, the length and width specified.



Page 10 of 58

To present a uniform appearance with close stone contact. No loose material shall be left on the sealed carriageway. Install TRPM’s and/or Spotting if required.


117 Reseal m2


Minimum test frequency: Cover Aggregate - 10% Fines Q205B 1/source/year Wet/Dry Strength Q205C 1/source/year Crushed Particles Q215 1/source/year Weak Faces Q217 1/source/year Grading Q103D 1 per 400 t Modified Tray Test Q219 1 per 400 t Flakiness Index Q201B 1 per 400 t Precoating Q216 1 per 400 t Bitumen -sample 1 per tank Application Rates -Spraying Records. The testing requirements listed for all the materials above shall apply to the cumulative quantities used throughout the contract and not to specific Work Order quantities. Where the Work Order quantity does not reach the required testing frequency, the quantity shall be aggregated with other Work Order quantities from that specific supply source until such time as a test is required. Work Order quantities may be recorded on a materials testing register and testing initiated once the cumulative total for a specific supply source reaches the specified figure.





3. Check the area for surface defects. All defects

(except minor cracking and chip loss) should be repaired before the seal coat.

4. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance

more appropriate? 5. Mark out the area for sealing. Ensure the area

overlaps any repairs by 50 - 100 mm. 6. Obtain Engineer's advice on the appropriate

treatment, binder and additives. Specify these.

7. Calculate spray rate. 8. Specify the appropriate plant, material and crew

(including quantities of materials (and organise these). Screenings must be coated at least four days in advance of Activity. Ensure the screenings will give a texture consistent with surrounding road.

9. Arrange for testing materials. 10. Note if road marking will be required. Schedule

another Activity. 11. Register line marking reference points at the sides

and end of work area if necessary. 12. Check for overhead wires that could catch tip

trucks.

118 Seal Coating (Minor)

Description

The treatment of short sections of road surface (either sealed or unsealed) using small non-certified plant, to seal the surface and restore surface life and/or skid resistance. The Activity may be used to seal small sections of new work.

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • protection of service facilities (eg. manhole covers

etc.) • all work items as detailed in MRS 11.12 and MRS

11.22 • preparation of a seal design • the supply and application of a bitumen emulsion at a

rate as per design • the precoating, spreading and rolling of cover

aggregate (including the supply of all materials) at the designed spread rate

• the supply and installation of TRPM's or line spotting

as required • all other operations in the Applicable Specifications



Page 11 of 58

• certification that the product meets the requirements of the Restoration Standards, including all necessary visual inspections, compliance and audit testing






MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.11 Sprayed Bituminous Surfacing (excluding

emulsion). MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bituminous Emulsion Surfacing. MRS 11.17 Bitumen MRS 11.19 Bitumen Cutter and Flux MRS 11.21 Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.22 Supply of Cover Aggregate


Dimensions to be not less than nor exceed by 150 mm the length and width specified. To present a uniform appearance with close stone contact. No loose material shall be left on the sealed carriageway. Install TRPM’s and/or spotting if required.


118 Seal Coating (Minor) m2


Minimum test frequency: Cover Aggregate - 10% Fines Q205B 1/source/year Wet/Dry Strength Q205C 1/source/year Crushed Particles Q215 1/source/year Weak Faces Q217 1/source/year Grading Q103D 1 per 400 t Flakiness Index Q201B 1 per 400 t Precoating Q216 1 per 400 t Bitumen - sample 1 per tank The testing requirements listed for all the materials above shall apply to the cumulative quantities used throughout the contract and not to specific Work Order quantities.

Where the Work Order quantity does not reach the required testing frequency, the quantity shall be aggregated with other Work Order quantities from that specific supply source until such time as a test is required. Work Order quantities may be recorded on a materials testing register and testing initiated once the cumulative total for a specific supply source reaches the specified figure.




construction is scheduled for the area of the defect. 3. Check the area for surface defects. All defects

(except minor cracking and chip loss) should be repaired before the seal coat.

4. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance

more appropriate? 5. Mark out the area for sealing. Ensure the area

overlaps any repairs by 50 - 100 mm. 6. Obtain Engineer's advice on the appropriate

treatment, binder and additives. Specify these. 7. Calculate spray rate. 8. Specify the appropriate plant, material and crew

(including quantities of materials (and organise these). Screenings must be coated at least four days in advance of Activity. Ensure the screenings will give a texture consistent with surrounding road.

9. Arrange for testing materials. 10. Note if road marking will be required. Schedule

another Activity. 11. Register line marking reference points at the sides

and end of work area if necessary. 13. Check for overhead wires that could catch tip trucks.

123 Surface Strip Treatment of Cracks

Description

The sealing of cracks (up to a width of 5mm) in bituminous pavements with a surface strip treatment, such as: • stick on proprietary strips (polymer bitumen and/or

geotextile based); or • proprietary grids.



Page 12 of 58

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • the supply and application of the strip treatment

material as per the manufacturers specification • the supply and installation of TRPM's or linespotting

as required • the supply and application of a light cover material if

required (ie. if there is a risk of the traffic picking up the strip on contact with tyres)








MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. All loose material shall be removed from the crack. The crack sealant shall be an approved stick-on proprietary strip (either polymer bitumen and/or geotextile based), or an approved proprietary grid. The proprietary products shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.


The crack shall be filled along its full length. The finished surface shall be not lower than the surrounding road surface nor more than 5 mm above it. Install TPRM in and/or Spotting if required.


123 Surface Strip Treatment linear metres of Cracks


Minimum test frequency: Straightedge 1 per 10 metres



2. Make sure no other major maintenance or construction works is scheduled for the area of the defect.

3. Are there any related defects? 4. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance

more appropriate? 5. Mark out the area for repair. 6. Note if road marking will be required. Scheduled



130 Surface Sweeping

Description

The removal and disposal (in accordance with current statutory requirements) of all loose material <100cm2 in size (eg. the build up of gravel/screenings at intersections, broken glass and similar) accumulated on the road surface, by hand or mechanical sweeping. The removal of larger types of material (eg. tyre pieces, wood etc which have an area greater than 100cm2) will generally be undertaken using an alternative Activity (eg. 421, 429 or 452 if an emergency situation exists etc).

Work Operations


labour and material • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • the removal of material from the area - refer to

Applicable Specification below • all other operations in the Applicable Specifications • certification that the product meets the requirements




Page 13 of 58

• the disposal of any waste material in accordance with any State Government legislation or Local Government By-laws that are applicable

Where clarification of details in relation to these Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specification provide additional requirements for compliance.

Applicable Specification

All loose material shall be removed from the sealed carriageway and disposed of in a neat and tidy manner away from the road formation and drainage lines.


All loose material shall be removed from the sealed carriageway and shoulders.


130 Surface Sweeping Square Metres


None listed



2. Specify the appropriate plant and crew and

organise these. 3. Check for litter and arrange for collection prior to

sweeping if appropriate.

141 Temporary Pavement Repairs (Mechanical)

Description

The temporary repair, by mechanical trimming of shoved or rutted pavement to the level of the surrounding sealed surface to eliminate hazardous conditions until such time as permanent repairs can be made or to keep safe a section of pavement where the Principal has advised more permanent type works (eg. reconstruction/rehabilitation) is due to commence.

Note

For road sections not programmed for imminent permanent type works, individual repairs shall only be used where rapid deterioration of the pavement has not allowed sufficient time to schedule permanent repairs and shall only be performed once before permanent repairs are made. Includes the application of a bituminous emulsion seal coat and cover aggregate over the trimmed areas.

Work Operations

The following operations shall be included as part of this Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant

labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • the trimming of the rut or shove • the compaction of the exposed roadway surface prior

to applying the tack coat • all work items as detailed in MRS 11.12 and MRS

11.22 • the supply and application of a bitumen emulsion as

per Applicable specifications • the precoating, spreading and rolling of cover

aggregate (including the supply of all materials) • the supply and installation of TRPM's or line spotting

as required • all other operations included in the Applicable

Specifications • certification that the product meets the requirements



excavated/ waste material in accordance with any State Government legislation or Local Government By-laws that are applicable



MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.11 Sprayed Bituminous Surfacing (Excluding

Emulsions). MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bitumen Emulsion Surfacing. MRS 11.17 Bitumen MRS 11.19 Bitumen Cutter and Flux Oils MRS 11.21 Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.22 Supply of Cover Aggregate All excavated material shall be disposed of or stored in a neat and tidy manner away from the road formation and



Page 14 of 58

drainage lines. Material suitable for reuse shall be stored at nominated stock pile sites unless otherwise agreed.

Restoration Standard

The finished work shall meet the requirements of the relevant specifications except as provided hereunder. The finished surface shall be within ± 10mm of the surrounding surface. The deviation from a 3m straightedge placed along the wheel paths shall be no more than ± 10mm, due allowance being made for design shape where relevant. Install TRPM’s and/or Spotting if required.


141 Temporary Pavement Repairs Square Metres (Mechanical) No other details are listed in the Standard for this Activity.

142 Emergency Temporary Pavement Repairs

Description

The temporary repair of the roadway surface to eliminate hazardous conditions until such time as permanent repairs can be made or to keep safe a section of pavement where the Principal has advised more permanent type works (ie. reconstruction/rehabilitation) is due to commence.

Note

For road sections not programmed for imminent permanent type works, individual repairs shall only be used where rapid deterioration of the pavement has not allowed sufficient time to schedule permanent repairs and shall only be performed once before permanent repairs are made.

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • the removal of cracked or loose material from the

area to be repaired • the supply and application of a bitumen emulsion

tack coat for premix/asphalt treatment • the supply, placement and compaction of the premix

asphalt, gravel or asphalt material.

• the supply and installation of TRPM's or linespotting as required

• all other operations in the Applicable Specifications

as warranted • certification that the product meets the requirements




• notification to the Principal of linemarking requirements



MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.05 Unbound Pavement MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements. SS- Premix Asphalt.


The finished surface shall be within +20 mm of the height of the surrounding road surface. The standard of compaction shall be such that the final passes of the compaction equipment leave no visible impressions on the restored surface. Install TRPM’s and/or Spotting if required.


142 Temporary Pavement Repair Tonnes


Not Applicable


1. This is an emergency repair to reduce traffic hazards during and immediately after bad weather. This repair is also applicable where more permanent types of works such as rehabilitation are imminent.

2. Such repairs should be inspected within a week to

check their condition and to schedule an appropriate standard Activity for long term repair where more permanent type works such as rehabilitation are not imminent.



Page 15 of 58

143 Pavement Repairs (Mechanical) Minor

Description

The repair by machine of shoving pavement or asphalt surfacing of size less than 500 m2 by removal of the deteriorated pavement and/or asphalt surface and replacement with new pavement material and asphalt or bitumen seal treatment, to profile. May include treatment of subgrade materials and reworking, as appropriate. Nominal depth of treatment is 200mm. Treatment greater than this depth is covered by Activity No. 144.

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area and confirmation of

the pavement design • excavation of the failed area to the approved

pavement design depth including the removal of any loose material from the area to be repaired. Where a road profiler is used only areas inaccessible by the profiler drum (i.e. generally at corners of the repair) will be accepted at a lesser depth than that approved. In these areas a minimum depth shall be specified.

• where applicable, compaction of the excavated

surface (where the surface has been loosened). • preparation of the existing surface including

brooming

• the formation of a vertical face to a minimum depth equal to the pavement design (measured from the top of the excavation) for the full length of the excavated edges. Where a road profiler is used a nominated reduced depth of vertical face will be accepted in areas where the shape of the profilers drum does not allow the design depth to be achieved. The repairs shall be rectangular in shape

• the supply, placement and compaction of pavement material, cement treated if appropriate • the supply and application of a bitumen emulsion

tack coat if applicable as per Applicable Specifications.

• the supply, placement and compaction of the asphalt

or the supply and application of a bitumen seal treatment to profile, as appropriate

• the supply and installation of TRPM's or line spotting as required

• all other operations included in the Applicable

Specifications

• certification that the product meets the requirements of the Restoration Standards, including all necessary visual inspections, compliance and audit testing






MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.03 Drainage, Retaining Structures and

Protective Treatments. MRS 11.04 General Earthworks. MRS 11.05 Unbound Pavements. MRS 11.08 Plant-mix Stabilised Pavements. MRS 11.11 Sprayed Bituminous Surfacing (Excluding

Emulsions). MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bitumen Emulsion Surfacing. MRS 11.17 Bitumen MRS 11.21 Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.22 Supply of Cover Aggregate MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements. The design of the repaired pavement shall conform with the pavement design standards of Department of Main Roads. Geotextiles on/under subgrade shall comply with the requirements specified for geotextiles under/within embankments in MRS 11.03 Drainage, Retaining Structures and Protective Treatments. The unbound pavement material shall be of a quality at least equal to that used in sound sections of the road adjacent to the repairs. Plant-mix stabilised pavement shall be Unbound Pavement as specified above stabilised with not less than 2% by mass of cement. The Principal may direct that a paver be employed to place plant-mix stabilised and/or dense graded asphalt pavement material or may approve the use of other equipment for this purpose. Such other equipment shall not cause the mix to segregate.



Page 16 of 58

All excavated material shall be disposed of or stored in a neat and tidy manner away from the road formation and drainage lines. Material suitable for reuse shall be stored at nominated stockpile sites unless otherwise agreed.


The finished work shall meet the requirements of the relevant specifications except as provided hereunder. The finished surface shall conform to the shape of the surrounding road surface. Install TRPM’s and/or Spotting if required. The deviation from a 3m straightedge placed along the wheel paths shall be no more than + 8mm, - 5mm, due allowance being made for design shape, where relevant. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with the requirements of MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements with respect to rolling pattern requirements and asphalt temperature at time of rolling commencement. The standard of compaction shall be such that the final passes of the compaction equipment leave no impressions on the restored surface.


143 Pavement Repairs (Mechanical) – Minor m2


Minimum test frequency: Unbound Pavements and materials for stabilisation - 10% Fines Q205B 1/source/year Wet/Dry Strength Q205C 1/source/year Crushed Particles Q215 1/source/year Weak Faces Q217 1/source/year Flakiness Index Q201B 1/source/year CBR Q113A 1/source/year Degradation Factor Q208B 1/source/year Grading Q103A 1 per 250 m3 Liquid Limit Q104A 1 per 250 m3 Plastic Limit, PI Q105 1 per 250 m3 Linear Shrinkage Q106 1 per 250 m3 Stabilised Material - Drying/Shrinkage Q128 1/source/year Cement Content Q116B 1 per 100 m3 Compaction - Earthworks, Unbound/Stabilised Pavement MDR Q110A 1 per 500 m2 MDR Q110C 1 per 500 m2 (Cement treated) Density Q111A or Q112 1 per 500m² Asphalt - Materials/Mix Design 1/source/year Maximum Density of Asphalt Q307 <200t/source/year- 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year

Bitumen Content and Aggregate Grading, Asphalt Q308A or Q308C <200t/source/year- 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Temperature at time of rolling commencement 6/lot min Asphalt Aggregate 10% Fines Q205B 1/source/year Crushed Particles Q215 1/source/year Grading Q103D 1per 400t Flakiness Index Q201B 1per 400t Polished Aggregate Friction Value Q203 1per 400t Geometrics - Horizontal Straightedge 1 per 10 m (min 1/patch in wheel path and at interface) Depth below Road Surface 1 per 10m per layer Cover Aggregate - 10% Fines Q205B 1/source/year Wet/Dry Strength Q205C 1/source/year Crushed Particles Q215 1/source/year Weak Faces Q217 1/source/year Grading Q103D 1 per 400 t Flakiness Index Q201B 1 per 400 t Precoating Q216 1 per 400 t Bitumen -sample- 1 per tank Bitumen Emulsion Sample 1per 5000 litres Application Rates - Spraying Records. Max. lot size: one (1) day The testing requirements listed for all the materials above shall apply to the cumulative quantities used throughout the contract and not to specific Work Order quantities. Where the Work Order quantity does not reach the required testing frequency, the quantity shall be aggregated with other Work Order quantities from that specific supply source until such time as a test is required. Work Order quantities may be recorded on a materials testing register and testing initiated once the cumulative total for a specific supply source reaches the specified figure.





3. Are there any related defects, e.g. cracking? 4. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance

more appropriate?



Page 17 of 58

5. Mark out the area for repair. On large areas, use a cone penetrometer to determine depth of excavation required. Specify this depth. Consider using a geotextile.




8. Arrange for testing materials. 9. Arrange and specify a disposal area for excavated

material. 10. Specify spray seal or asphalt surface. Specify

asphalt depth.

144 Pavement Repairs (Mechanical) - Major

Description

The repair by machine of shoving pavement or asphalt surfacing of size less than 500 m2 by removal of deteriorated pavement and/or asphalt or surface and replacement with new pavement material and asphalt, bitumen seal treatment, to profile. May include treatment of subgrade materials and reworking, as appropriate. Refers to pavement repairs greater that 200 mm nominal depth.

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • determine the depth of excavation and prepare

pavement design • excavation of the failed area to the approved

pavement design depth including the removal of any loose material from the area to be repaired. Should a road profiler be used only in areas inaccessible by the profiler drum (i.e. generally the corners of the repairs) will be accepted at a lesser depth than that approved. In these areas a minimum depth shall be specified.

• compaction of the excavated surface if applicable

(i.e. where the surface has been loosened).

• preparation of the existing surface including brooming if applicable

• the formation of a vertical face to a minimum depth

equal to the pavement design (measured from the top of the excavation), for the full length of the excavated edges. Where a road profiler is used a nominated reduced depth of vertical face will be accepted in areas where the shape of the profilers drum does not allow the design depth to be achieved. The repairs shall be rectangular in shape.

• the supply and installation of geofabric if required • the supply, placement and compaction of rock fill if

required • the supply, placement and compaction of cement

treated pavement material • the supply and application of a bitumen emulsion


or the supply and application of a bitumen seal treatment to profile, as appropriate










MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.03 Drainage, Retaining Structures and

Protective Treatments. MRS 11.04 General Earthworks. MRS 11.05 Unbound Pavements. MRS 11.08 Plant-mix Stabilised Pavements. MRS 11.11 Sprayed Bituminous Surfacing (Excluding

Emulsions).



Page 18 of 58

MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bitumen Emulsion Surfacing. MRS 11.17 Bitumen MRS 11.19 Bitumen Cutter and Flux Oils MRS 11.21 Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.22 Supply of Cover Aggregate MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements The design of the repaired pavement shall conform with the pavement design standards of Department of Main Roads. Geotextiles on/under subgrade shall comply with the requirements specified for geotextiles under/within embankments in MRS 11.03 Drainage, Retaining Structures and Protective Treatments. Rockfill shall be composed of sound stone pieces, the minimum size of which shall be 75 mm and the maximum size not greater than half the rockfill layer thickness. The unbound pavement material shall be of a quality at least equal to that used in sound sections of the road adjacent to the repairs. Plant-mix stabilised pavement shall be Unbound Pavement as specified in MRS 11.05 stabilised with not less than 2% by mass of cement. The Principal may direct that a paver be employed to place plant-mix stabilised and/or dense graded asphalt pavement material or may approve the use of other equipment for this purpose. Such other equipment shall not cause the mix to segregate. All excavated material shall be disposed of or stored in a neat and tidy manner away from the road formation and drainage lines. Material suitable for reuse shall be stored at nominated stock pile sites unless otherwise agreed.


The finished work shall meet the requirements of the relevant specifications except as provided here under. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with the requirements of MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements with respect to rolling pattern requirements and asphalt temperature at time of rolling commencement. The standard of compaction shall be such that the final passes of the compaction equipment leave no impressions on the restored surface. The finished surface shall conform to the shape of the surrounding surface. The deviation from a 3m straightedge placed along the wheel paths shall be no more than + 8mm, - 5mm, due allowance being made for design shape where relevant. Install TRPM’s and/or Spotting if required.


144 Pavement Repairs (Mechanical) m3 -Major (in place)


Minimum test frequency: Unbound Pavements and materials for stabilisation - 10% Fines Q205B 1/source/year Wet/Dry Strength Q205C 1/source/year Crushed Particles Q215 1/source/year Weak Faces Q217 1/source/year Flakiness Index Q201B 1/source/year CBR Q113A 1/source/year Degradation Factor Q208B 1/source/year Grading Q103A 1 per 250 m3 Liquid Limit Q104A 1 per 250 m3 Plastic Limit, PI Q105 1 per 250 m3 Linear Shrinkage Q106 1 per 250 m3 Stabilised Material - Drying/Shrinkage Q128 1/source/year Cement Content Q116B 1 per 100 m3

Compaction - Earthworks, Unbound/Stabilised Pavement MDR Q110A 1 per 500m2 MDR(Cement treated) Q110C 1 per 500m2 Density Q111A or Q112 1 per 500m² Asphalt/Premix - Materials/Mix Design Q307 1/source/year Maximum Density of Asphalt <200t/source/year- 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Bitumen Content and Aggregate <200t/source/year- Grading, Asphalt Q308A or Q308C 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Temperature at time of rolling commencement 6/lot min Asphalt Aggregate 10% Fines Q205B 1/source/year Crushed Particles Q215 1/source/year Grading Q103D 1per 400t Flakiness Index Q201B 1per 400t Polished Aggregate Friction Value Q203 1per 400t Geometrics- Horizonal Straightedge 1 per 10 m (min 1/patch in wheel path and at interface) Depth below Road Surface 1 per 10m per layer Cover Aggregate -



Page 19 of 58

10% Fines Q205B 1/source/year Wet/Dry Strength Q205C 1/source/year Crushed Particles Q215 1/source/year Weak Faces Q217 1/source/year Grading Q103D 1 per 400 t Flakiness Index Q201B 1 per 400 t Precoating Q216 1 per 400 t Bitumen sample 1 per tank Bitumen Emulsion sample 1per 5000 litres Application Rates - Spraying Records. Max. lot size: one (1) day The testing requirements listed for all the materials above shall apply to the cumulative quantities used throughout the contract and not to specific Work Order quantities. Where the Work Order quantity does not reach the required testing frequency, the quantity shall be aggregated with other Work Order quantities from that specific supply source until such time as a test is required. Work Order quantities may be recorded on a materials testing register and testing initiated once the cumulative total for a specific supply source reaches the specified figure.





3. Are there any related defects, e.g. cracking? 4. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance

more appropriate? 5. Mark out the area for repair. On large areas, use a

cone penetrometer to determine depth of excavation required. Specify this depth. Consider using a geotextile.




8. Arrange for testing materials. 9. Arrange and specify a disposal area for excavated

material. 10. Specify spray seal or asphalt surface. Specify

asphalt depth.

150 Insitu-Stabilisation

Description

The stabilisation in place of a subgrade or an existing pavement (less than 500 m2) by the addition of a hydraulic stabilising agent. May include the addition of paving material to maintain profiles as appropriate. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant,

labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • offsetting the centreline and edge lines for

linemarking purposes • the supply and spreading of the stabilising agent –

2% GP cement (or as requested/approved) • the mixing of the stabilised material • the compaction of the stabilised material • the grading of the compacted pavement to the

correct profile • keeping the surface moist until the seal is applied • the submission of the seal design (emulsion) for

acceptance • application of the emulsion seal • the supply and installation of TRPMs or linespotting

as required • all other operations in the Applicable Specifications • certification that the product meets the requirements

of the Restoration Standards, including all necessary visual inspections, compliance and audit testing. This is to be attached to each Works Order




requirements Where clarification of details in relation to the above Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance in these areas.



Page 20 of 58


MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.05 Unbound Pavements MRS 11.07 In Situ Stabilised Pavements. MRS 11.11 Sprayed Bituminous Surfacing (Excluding

Emulsions) MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bitumen Emulsion Surfacing MRS 11.17 Bitumen MRS 11.19 Bitumen Cutter and Flux Oils MRS 11.21 Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.22 Supply of Cover Aggregate. MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements MRS 11.31 Low Rut Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements.


The finished work shall meet the requirements of the relevant specifications and as provided hereunder. The deviation from a straightedge placed on the finished surface and the adjoining road surface shall not exceed 5 mm.


150 Insitu-Stabilisation m3


Minimum test frequency: Stabilised Material - Cement Content Q116B 1 per 100 m3 Lime Content Q117 1 per 100 m3 Note: Testing for stabilising agent content may be represented by surface spread rate(s) as specified by Clause 1 of Addendum MRS 11.07.1. Compaction - MDR Q110A 1 per 500m² MDR(Cement treated) Q110C 1 per 500m² Density Q111Aor Q112 1 per 500m² (1 per lot min.) Asphalt - Materials/Mix Design 1/source/yr Maximum Density of Asphalt Q307 <200t/source/year- 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Bitumen Content and Q308A or <200t/source/year- Aggregate Grading, Q308C 2/source/year Asphalt >200t/source/year- 4/source/year

Temperature at time of rolling 6/lot min commencement Asphalt Aggregate 10% Fines Q205B 1/source/year Crushed Particles Q215 1/source/year Grading Q103D 1per 400t Flakiness Index Q201B 1per 400t Polished Aggregate Friction Value Q203 1per 400t Geometrics - Horizontal Straightedge 1 per 10m Depth below Road Surface 1 per 10m per layer Cover Aggregate - 10% Fines Q205B 1/source/year Wet/Dry Strength Q205C 1/source/year Crushed Particles Q215 1/source/year Weak Faces Q217 1/source/year Grading Q103D 1 per 400 t Flakiness Index Q201B 1 per 400 t Precoating Q216 1 per 400 t Bitumen - sample 1 per tank Bitumen Emulsion Sample 1per 5000 litres Application Rates - Spraying Records. Max. lot size: one (1) day The testing requirements listed for all the materials above shall apply to the cumulative quantities used throughout the contract and not to specific Work Order quantities. Where the Work Order quantity does not reach the required testing frequency, the quantity shall be aggregated with other Work Order quantities from that specific supply source until such time as a test is required. Work Order quantities may be recorded on a materials testing register and testing initiated once the cumulative total for a specific supply source reaches the specified figure.




construction is scheduled for the area of the defect. 3. Are there any related defects, e.g. shoving? 4. Is an alternative remedy more appropriate? 5. Mark out the area for treatment. Specify the depth

of treatment. Check location/depth of any services. 6. Note if road marking will be required. Schedule


(including quantities of materials) and organise these. Ensure the surface material will give a



Page 21 of 58

texture consistent with the adjoining road, or schedule texturising.

8. Arrange for testing materials. 9. Specify spray seal or asphalt surface. Specify

asphalt depth.

151 Gravel Supply-Insitu Stabilisation

Description

The supply of paving material for Activity numbered 150, Insitu Stabilisation. Includes all costs associated with the winning of the material for the works. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of this Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant,

labour and materials • all operations involved with winning of the

gravel/material for the job site • the provision of traffic control for quarrying operations • all other operations included in the Applicable



Where clarification of details in relation to these Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance. Applicable Specifications MRS 11.05 Unbound Pavements Restoration Standards Nil (supply only)


151 Gravel Supply-Insitu Cubic Metres Loose Stabilisation Testing Requirements Minimum Test Frequency: Grading Q103A 1/250m3 Linear Shrinkage Q106 1/250m3

CBR Q113A 1/source/year

Particular Points to Consider Nil. Winning only.

152 Gravel Cartage-Insitu Stabilisation

Description

The cartage of paving material for Activity numbered 150, Insitu Stabilisation. Includes all costs associated with the loading and cartage of the material to the work site. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of this Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant,

labour and materials • all operations involved with loading and cartage of

the gravel/material for the job site • the provision of traffic control for quarrying, cartage

and delivery operations • all other operations included in the Applicable



Where clarification of details in relation to these Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance. Applicable Specifications MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks MRS 11.05 Unbound Pavements Restoration Standards Nil (cartage only)


152 Gravel Cartage-Insitu Stabilisation Cubic Metres Loose - Kms Testing Requirements Nil. Particular Planning Points to Consider Nil. Load and Cart only.



Page 22 of 58

155 Asphalt Overlay

Description

The repair of existing bituminous roadway exhibiting surface distress through the applications of an asphalt overlay.

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • preparation of the existing surface, including the

installation of offset points for the spotting of the centre and edge lines upon completion of the overlay.

• protection of service facilities (eg. manhole covers

etc.) • all work items as detailed in MRS 11.12 and MRS

11.22 • the supply and application of a bitumen emulsion

tack coat– refer to Applicable Specifications • the supply, laying and compaction of asphalt - refer

to Applicable Specification. The type of asphalt may include any of those listed under the materials section for this Activity.


as required • all other operations in the Applicable Specifications • certification that the product meets the requirements





requirements • Where clarification of details in relation to these Work

Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance.


MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks.

MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bitumen Emulsion Surfacing MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements. MRS 11.31 Low Rut Dense Graded Asphalt

Pavements. MRS 11.33 Stone Mastic Asphalt Pavements MRS 11.34 Open Graded Asphalt Pavements.


As per Applicable Specifications above. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the Applicable Specifications above with respect to rolling pattern requirements and asphalt temperature at time of rolling commencement. The standard of compaction shall be such that the final passes of the compaction equipment leave no impressions on the restored surface. Install TRPM’s and/or Spotting as required


155 Asphalt Overlay tonne


Minimum test frequency: Asphalt/Premix - Materials/Mix Design 1/source/year Maximum Density of Asphalt Q 307 <200t/source/year- 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Bitumen Content and Aggregate <200t/source/year- Grading of Asphalt Q308A or Q308C 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Temperature at time of rolling commencement 6 per lot min Asphalt Aggregate 10% Fines Q205B 1/source/year Crushed Particles Q215 1/source/year Grading Q103D 1per 400t Flakiness Index Q201B 1per 400t Polished Aggregate Friction Value Q203 1per 400t Geometrics - Horizontal 1 per 50 m Vertical-height or thickness 1 per 20 m - straightedge 1 per 20 m - surface evenness 1 per 100 m Max lot size one (1) day The testing requirements listed for all the materials above shall apply to the cumulative quantities used throughout



Page 23 of 58

the contract and not to specific Work Order quantities. Where the Work Order quantity does not reach the required testing frequency, the quantity shall be aggregated with other Work Order quantities from that specific supply source until such time as a test is required. Work Order quantities may be recorded on a materials testing register and testing initiated once the cumulative total for a specific supply source reaches the specified figure.





area, schedule another Activity to repair it. 4. Are there any related defects? 5. Is an alternative remedy more appropriate? 6. Define the area for overlay. 7. Note if road marking will be required. Schedule

another Activity. 8. Arrange for testing materials. 9. Specify the appropriate plant, materials and crew


157 Excavate and Replace Asphalt

Description

The excavation of deteriorated asphalt and the restoration to profile with new asphalt in one operation.

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • excavation of the failed area to a nominal depth

including the removal of any loose material from the area to be repaired. Where a road profiler is used only areas inaccessible by the profiler drum (i.e. generally at corners of the repair) will be accepted at a lesser depth than that approved. In these areas a minimum depth shall be specified.

• where applicable, compaction of the excavated

surface (where the surface has been loosened).

• preparation of the existing surface including brooming

• the formation of a vertical face to a nominated depth

of (measured from the top of the excavation) for the full length of the excavated edges. Where a road profiler is used a nominated reduced depth of vertical face will be accepted in areas where the shape of the profilers drum does not allow the design depth to be achieved. The repairs shall be rectangular in shape.


tack as per Applicable Specifications • the supply, placement and compaction of the asphalt • the supply and installation of TRPM's or line spotting




• the clean up of the site including the disposal of any waste / excavated material in accordance with any State Government legislation or Local Government By-laws that are applicable

• notification to Principal of linemarking requirements Where clarification of details in relation to these Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance.


MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bitumen Emulsion Surfacing MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements. MRS 11.31 Low Rut Dense Graded Asphalt

Pavements. MRS 11.33 Stone Mastic Asphalt Pavemnts. MRS 11.34 Open Graded Asphalt Pavements.


As per Applicable Specifications above The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the Applicable Specifications above with respect to rolling pattern requirements and asphalt temperature at time of rolling commencement. The standard of compaction shall be such that the final passes of the compaction equipment leave no impressions on the restored surface. Install TRPM’s and/or Spotting if required.



Page 24 of 58


157 Excavated and Replace Asphalt tonne Establishment/disestablishment each of paver and paving gang at paving site


Minimum test frequency: Asphalt/Premix - Materials/Mix Design 1/source/year Maximum Density of Asphalt Q307 <200t/source/year- 2/source/year >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Bitumen Content and Q308A or <200t/source/year- Aggregate Grading Q308C 2/source/year of Asphalt >200t/source/year- 4/source/year Asphalt Temperature at time of 6/lot min rolling commencement Asphalt Aggregate 10% Fines Q205B 1/source/year Crushed Particles Q215 1/source/year Grading Q103D 1per 400t Flakiness Index Q201B 1per 400t Polished Aggregate Friction Value Q203 1per 400t Geometrics - Horizontal Straight edge (wheelpath) 1 per 10m (min 1/patch) Horizontal Staightedge (interface) 1 per 10 m (Min 1/patch) Depth below roadsurface 1 per 10m/layer (min 1/patch) Max lot size one (1) day The testing requirements listed for all the materials above shall apply to the cumulative quantities used throughout the contract and not to specific Work Order quantities. Where the Work Order quantity does not reach the required testing frequency, the quantity shall be aggregated with other Work Order quantities from that specific supply source until such time as a test is required. Work Order quantities may be recorded on a materials testing register and testing initiated once the cumulative total for a specific supply source reaches the specified figure.




construction is scheduled for the area of the defect.

3. If crocodile cracking is adjacent to the affected area, schedule another Activity to repair it.


more appropriate? 6. Define the area for treatment. 7. Note if road marking will be required. Schedule





Page 25 of 58

200 UNSEALED SURFACES

201 Light Formation Grading

Description

The light trimming by grader of unsealed formation surface to restore rideability.

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • the removal and re-instatement of roadside furniture

(eg. guide posts, signs etc.) as required. • the light trimming by grader of the existing roadway

to fill holes and other depressions. • all other operations included in the Applicable

Specification • certification that the product meets the requirements



waste/removed material in accordance with any State Government legislation or Local Government By-laws that are applicable





The formation shall be graded to fill holes and depressions and smooth loose material. Minimal loose material shall be left in drains or around roadside furniture.


201 Light Formation Grading km-m width Testing Requirements Visual inspections to ensure the restoration standards are met.




construction is scheduled for the area of the defect. 3. Are there any related defects, e.g. blocked table

drains, missing guide posts? 4. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance

more appropriate? 5. Check that no degrassing of compaction is

required. If it is, schedule a more appropriate Activity such as Medium Formation Grading (Activity Number 202).

6. Check profile and depth of depressions to ensure

no scarifying and addition of imported gravel/material is required in isolated areas.

7. Check that no treatment of adjacent drainage is

required. If either is, schedule a more appropriate Activity such as Heavy Formation Grading (Activity Number 203).

8. Specify and organise appropriate plant, materials

and crew (including quantities of material). 9. Arrange and specify a disposal area for any

excavated material.

202 Medium Formation Grading

Description

The grading of unsealed formation to reinstate the correct profile. Include the degrassing, incorporation of water and compaction. Does not include scarifying or addition of imported gravel/material from outside the work site to build up existing material.

Work Operations



(eg. guide posts, signs etc.) as required. • the degrassing of the existing pavement



Page 26 of 58

• the grading of the existing pavement including watering and compaction

• the trimming and rolling to correct profile of the

compacted formation • all other operations included in the Applicable









The formation crossfall measured using the grader blade or other means shall be within 4% to 6%. Superelevation on curves shall be 4% to 6% also. No water shall pond on the surface. The graded surface shall be watered and rolled to provide a sound tight surface with minimal loose stones and no visible vertical movement. The cross section shall be visually uniform to that shown on the Works Order.


202 Medium Formation Grading km Testing Requirements Crossfall 1 per 50 m





3. Are there any related defects, e.g. blocked table


more appropriate? 5. Check profile and depth of depressions to ensure

no scarifying and addition of imported gravel/material is required in isolated areas. Check that no treatment of adjacent drainage is required. If either is, schedule Heavy Formation Grading (Activity Number 203).

6. Check quality and depth of material to ensure no extra material is required. If it is, schedule Resheeting (Activity Number 205).


and crew (including quantities of material). 8. Arrange and specify a disposal area for excavated

material.

203 Heavy Formation Grading

Description

The grading of unsealed formation to reinstate the correct profile to ensure drainage of the pavement and shoulders and to provide a suitable running course May include the addition of imported gravel/material (Refer Activity No. 204 in areas where the gravel crust is broken or where there is change in surface composition. This Activity also includes the treatment of the adjacent surface drainage.

Work Operations



(eg. guide posts, signs etc.) as required. • the degrassing and tyning of the existing pavement,

the incorporation of gravel (supplied to the work site under Activity 204 or won from site - displaced) and water, mixing, compaction and trimming of the pavement material

• the trimming and rolling to shape the compacted

formation surface • the cleaning and reshaping of adjacent surface

drainage lines. • all other operations included in the Applicable







Page 27 of 58





The formation crossfall measured using the grader blade or other means shall be within 4% to 6%. Superelevation on curves shall be 4% to 6% also. No water shall pond on the surface. The graded surface shall be watered and rolled to provide a sound tight surface with minimal loose stones and no visible vertical movement. The restored layer shall have a minimum depth of 75mm. The cross section shall be visually uniform to that shown on the Works Order. The restoration standard of the adjacent surface drainage shall be the same as per Activity No. 305.


203 Heavy Formation Grading km


Crossfall 1 per 50m






more appropriate? 5. Define area for repair 6. Determine if any areas are of inadequate quality

and, if necessary, schedule removal and replacement as per Activity Number 206.

6. Specify and organise appropriate plant, materials and

crew (including quantities of material).

204 Gravel/Material Supply - Heavy Formation Grading

Description

The supply to the work site of gravel/material that may be required to reinstate the correct profile and level when

carrying out Activity Number 203, Heavy Formation Grading.

Work Operations


labour and materials • all operations involved with winning, loading and

cartage of the gravel/material to the job site. • the provision of traffic control for quarrying, cartage

and delivery operations • all other operations included in the Applicable





MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks SS- Unsealed Formation Gravel MRS 11.05 Unbound Pavements


Nil (supply only)


204 Gravel Supply - Heavy Formation Grading Cubic Metres Loose


Minimum test frequency: Grading Q103A 1/250m3 Linear Shrinkage Q106 1/250m3 CBR Q113A 1/source/year





drains? 4. Is an alternative remedy of major maintenance

more appropriate? 5. Mark out the area that requires additional gravel.



Page 28 of 58

6. Specify and organise appropriate plant, materials and area (including quantities of material).

205 Formation Resheeting

Description

The addition of imported gravel/material to the running surface to reinstate to the correct profile/height above the natural surface, improve the quality of the surface material or to obtain an acceptable running course depth. Includes degrassing, scarifying and preparation of the existing formation and the incorporation of water and proper compaction of the formation and imported gravel/material.

Work Operations



(eg. guide posts, signs etc.) as required. • the degrassing and tyning of the existing pavement,

the incorporation of gravel and water, mixing compaction and trimming of the pavement material

• the trimming and rolling to shape of the compacted

resheeted formation. • all other operations included in the Applicable







MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.04 General Earthworks. MRS 11.05 Unbound Pavements.

All grass and other vegetation shall be removed from the work area and disposed of in an approved manner. The existing formation material shall be shaped to form a surface parallel to the planned finished surface of the shoulder. This surface shall be wide enough to enable the completed formation to conform to the cross-section shape specified on the Works Order. Where the reformed surface is greater than 75 mm below the planned finished surface, the surface shall be watered and compacted to a firm condition with no visible vertical movement under the compaction equipment before material is added. Where the reformed surface is less than 75 mm below the planned finished surface, the surface shall be scarified to a depth of 75 mm below the planned finished surface and watered to enable compaction after new material has been added.


The formation crossfall measured using the grader blade or other means shall be within 4% to 6%. Superelevation around curves shall also be 4% to 6%. No water shall pond on the surface. The graded surface shall be watered and rolled to provide a sound tight surface with minimal loose stones and no visible vertical movement. The cross section shall be visually uniform to that shown on the Works Order. The restored pavement layer shall be a minimum depth of 75mm.


205 Formation Resheeting m3 loose


Crossfall 1 per 50 m and as per specifications






more appropriate? 5. Define area for repair. 6. Determine if any areas are of inadequate quality



and crew (including quantities of material).



Page 29 of 58

206 Remove Formation Material and Replace, if Required

Description

The removal of unsuitable formation material and the reinstatement to correct profile. May include the actual replacement of the existing formation material.

Work Operations



(eg. guide posts, signs etc.) as required. • the degrassing of the existing formation and the

removal from the work area to a specified site of unsuitable formation material.

• the incorporation of replacement gravel, the

incorporation of gravel and water, mixing, compaction and trimming of the pavement material

• the trimming and rolling to shape of the compacted

formation • the cleaning and reshaping of adjacent surface

drainage • all other operations included in the Applicable







MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.04 General Earthworks. MRS 11.05 Unbound Pavements.

All grass and other vegetation shall be removed from the work area and disposed of in an approved manner. Unsuitable formation material shall be removed as designated on the Works Order, and the existing formation material shall be shaped to form a surface parallel to the planned finished surface of the formation. This surface shall be wide enough to enable the completed formation to conform to the cross-section shape specified on the Works Order. Where no additional material is to be added or the reformed surface is greater than 75 mm below the planned finished surface, the surface shall be watered and compacted to a firm condition with no visible vertical movement under the compaction equipment before material is added. Where the reformed surface is less than 75 mm below the planned finished surface and additional material is to incorporated into the surface, it shall be scarified to a depth of 75 mm below the planned finished surface and watered to enable compaction after new material has been added. Additional material shall be added to the surface or incorporated into it, when shown on the Works Order.


The formation crossfall measured using the grader blade or other means shall be 4% to 6%. Superelevation on curves shall also be 4% to 6%. No water shall pond on the surface. The graded surface shall be watered and rolled to provide a sound tight surface with minimal loose stones and no visible vertical movement. The cross section shape shall be visually uniform to that shown on the Works Order. The restored pavement layer shall be a minimum depth of 75mm.


206 Remove Formation Material and Replace if Required m3 loose


As per Applicable Specifications listed.






more appropriate? 5. Define for repair, areas of inadequate quality.



Page 30 of 58

6. Specify and organise appropriate plant, materials and crew (including quantities of material).

215 Light Shoulder Grading - Rural

Description

The grading of unsealed shoulders located in a rural environment (greater than 60 kph speed restriction) to remove vegetation. Includes the removal of any windrows of vegetation and other debris that may otherwise impede drainage or encourage scour.

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • determine the restoration width for the shoulder • the removal and re-instatement of roadside furniture

(eg. guide posts, signs etc.) as required. • the removal of the material from the shoulder to

enable drainage of the pavement and shoulder to the table drain or other appropriate collection point

• the watering and compaction of the surface, if

required • brooming of the sealed surface to remove any loose

material, if required • all other operations in the Applicable Specifications • certification that the product meets the requirements



waste / removed material in accordance with any State Government legislation or Local Government By-laws that are applicable



MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks


At the sealed/unsealed interface, the finished unsealed surface shall be even and within +0, -10 mm of the height of the adjacent seal. Shoulder crossfall measured using the grader blade or other means shall be within +0, -2% (absolute) when compared to the crossfall of the adjacent sealed pavement. Note: Where the cross fall of adjacent sealed pavement is so irregular that the + 0, - 2% (absolute) standard cannot be achieved, the cross fall on the finished unsealed surface shall be consistent with allowing the free drainage of water off the sealed pavement. The graded surface shall be watered and rolled to provide a sound tight surface. No loose material shall be left on the sealed carriageway, in drains or around roadside furniture. The surface of the sealed carriageway shall not be damaged during the work operations.


215 Light Shoulder Grading Shoulder km Side


Crossfall 1 per 500m max. on straights Guide Post frequency max. around curves.







more appropriate? 5. Check shoulder build-up and vegetation growth to

determine if truck and loader are needed to remove material.


and crew (including quantities of material). 7. Arrange and specify a disposal area for excavated

material.



Page 31 of 58

216 Heavy Shoulder Grading - Rural

Description

The grading of unsealed shoulders located in a rural environment (greater than 60 kmph speed restriction) to reinstate the correct profile

Work Operations


labour and material • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • determination of the restoration width for the

shoulder • the removal and re-instatement of roadside furniture

(eg. guide posts, signs etc.) as required. • the degrassing and tyning of the existing shoulder

(including the winning of any suitable material on site adjacent to the width of the shoulder to be maintained), the incorporation of gravel (supplied to the work site under Activity 219 or won from site) and watering, mixing, compaction and trimming of the shoulder material

• brooming of the sealed surface to remove any loose

material • all other operations in the Applicable Specifications • certification that the product meets the requirements






MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks SS Selected Shoulder Gravel


At the sealed/unsealed interface, the finished unsealed surface shall be even and within +0, -10 mm of the height of the adjacent seal. Shoulder crossfall measured using the grader blade or other means shall be within +0, -2%

(absolute) when compared to the crossfall of the adjacent sealed pavement. Note: Where the crossfall of adjacent sealed pavement is so irregular that the + 0, - 2% (absolute) standard cannot be achieved, the cross fall on the finished unsealed surface shall be consistent with allowing the free drainage of water off the sealed pavement. In general, the width of the finished shoulder shall not exceed: - 3m where seal width is less than 4.5m - 2m where seal width is between 4.5 and 5.6m - 1.5m where seal width is greater than 5.6m See "Notes on Finished Cross Sections" below. The graded surface shall be watered and rolled to provide a sound tight surface. No loose material shall be left on the sealed carriageway, in drains or around roadside furniture. The surface of the sealed carriageway shall not be damaged.

Notes on Finished Cross Section

Prior to commencement of work, the Contractor’s maintenance supervisor shall nominate the finished width (or widths) of shoulder for each sub-section to be graded. Where the width of the existing shoulder is greater than the widths specified previously under this Section, the following shall apply: - the specified crossfall for the finished shoulders shall

be provided only for the width specified previously under this Section;

- suitable material which may exist outside the required

shoulder width, and which is winnable, should be considered for use for shoulder resheeting before additional material is brought to the site.

Bus put off areas or widened shoulders at intersections and turnouts are not to be reduced in width. Where the width of the existing shoulder being graded is less than the width specified previously under this Section, the width of the existing shoulder need not be increased to the width given, except where this will be done at no additional cost to the Principal. Overall, finished shoulder width shall be constant and within +300mm/-100mm of the width nominated by the supervisor on the Works Order.


216 Heavy Shoulder Grading Shoulder km Rural side



Page 32 of 58


Crossfall 1 per 50m max on straights Guide post frequency max. around curves






more appropriate? 5. Define area for repair 6. Determine if any areas are of inadequate quality


8. Specify and organise appropriate plant, materials and

crew (including quantities of material).

219 Gravel Supply - Heavy Shoulder Grading

Description

The supply on site of imported gravel that may be required to reinstate the correct profile and/or level when carrying out Activity Numbers 216 or 218, Heavy Shoulder Grading.

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control

(specific to the quarrying, cartage and delivery operations)

• all operations required for the supply of the material (e.g. winning, loading and carting to the required location)



Where clarification of details in relation to these Work Operations is required, the following Applicable

Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance.


SS Shoulder Gravel MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks MRS 11.05 Unbound Pavements


Nil (supply only)


219 Gravel Supply - Heavy Shoulder m3 loose Grading


Minimum test frequency: Grading Q103A 1/250m3 Linear Shrinkage Q106 1/250m3

CBR Q113A 1/source/year The testing requirements listed for all the materials above shall apply to the cumulative quantities used throughout the contract and not to specific Work Order quantities. Where the Work Order quantity does not reach the required testing frequency, the quantity shall be aggregated with other Work Order quantities from that specific supply source until such time as a test is required. Work Order quantities may be recorded on a materials testing register and testing initiated once the cumulative total for a specific supply source reaches the specified figure.





drains? 4. Is an alternative remedy of major maintenance

more appropriate? 5. Mark out the area that requires additional gravel. 6. specify and organise appropriate plant, materials

and area (including quantities of material).

220 Shoulder Pothole Patching

Description

The manual placement and compaction of gravel into isolated potholes in a gravel shoulder.



Page 33 of 58

This Activity would normally be undertaken as a temporary measure to make a road shoulder safe until Activity 216 or 218 (Heavy Shoulder Grading) can be scheduled. It may also be used to prolong the life of a gravel shoulder, delaying the need for more expensive and extensive treatment.

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • preparation of the work area - the removal of any

loose material or water ponding in the hole. • the supply, placement and compaction (by hand

equipment) of gravel (at an appropriate water content) into the failed area.







MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. SS Selected Shoulder Gravel


The finished surface of the gravel placed in the pothole shall be within ± 20 mm of the surrounding gravel. The gravel patch shall be compacted to provide a sound, tight patch.


220 Shoulder Pothole Patching m3(loose)


The minimum testing requirements shall be as follows: Grading Q103A 1/250m³ Linear Shrinkage Q106 1/250m³ CBR Q113A 1/source/year



1. What has caused the defect? Schedule another Activity to correct this if needed.



more appropriate? For example, extensively potholed shoulder should be graded.

4. Define the area for repair. 5. Specify and organise appropriate plant, materials


221 Shoulder Resheeting

Description

The addition of material to unsealed shoulders to correct excess shoulder crossfall, drop off and/or reduced shoulder width. Allows for the cartage of water and gravel/material up to a lead of 20 km.

Work Operations


labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • determination of the restoration width for the shoulder • the removal and re-instatement of roadside furniture

(eg. guide posts, signs etc.) as required. • the removal of vegetation and debris on work area • add new shoulder material, tyne into existing

material, mix, moisten and blade to shape



Page 34 of 58

• compact, trim and roll to shape and crossfall specified on the Works Order

• brooming of the sealed surface to remove any loose material, if required







MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.04 General Earthworks. MRS 11.05 Unbound Pavements. All grass and other vegetation shall be removed from the work area and disposed of in an approved manner. The existing shoulder material shall be shaped to form a surface parallel to the planned finished surface of the shoulder. This surface shall be wide enough to enable the completed shoulder to conform to the cross-section shape specified on the Works Order. Where the reformed surface is greater than 75 mm below the planned finished surface, the surface shall be watered and compacted to a firm condition with no visible vertical movement under the compaction equipment before additional material is added. Where the reformed surface is less than 75 mm below the planned finished surface, the surface shall be scarified to a depth of 75 mm below the planned finished surface and watered to enable compaction after new material has been added.


At the sealed/unsealed interface, the finished unsealed surface shall be within +0, -10 mm of the height of the adjacent seal. Shoulder crossfall measured using the grader blade or other means shall be within +0, -2% (absolute) when compared to the crossfall of the adjacent sealed pavement. Note: Where the cross fall of adjacent sealed pavement is so irregular that the + 0, - 2% (absolute) standard cannot be achieved, the cross fall on the finished unsealed surface

shall be consistent with allowing the free drainage of water off the sealed pavement. The finished shoulder shall have a sound tight surface with no visible vertical movement under the final passes of the compaction equipment. No loose material shall be left on the sealed carriageway, in drains or around roadside furniture. The surface of the sealed carriageway shall not be damaged during the work operations.


221 Shoulder Resheeting m3 loose


Crossfall 1 per 50 m





drains, missing guide posts? 4. Is an alternative remedy more appropriate? 5. Define area for repair 6 Determine if any areas are of inadequate quality






Page 35 of 58

300 DRAINAGE

301 Install Earth Surface Drains

Description

All work and materials associated with the installation of new, or the improvement of existing, earth surface drains. Includes diversion, catch, batter and table drain work. Does not include work associated with the installation of new drainage structures, see Activity Number 320. Includes, where necessary, removal and replacement of guide posts and signs. This Activity excludes non-rippable material. Non-rippable material shall be material which cannot be ripped at a production rate exceeding the rate in the following Table listed against the particular class of excavator.

Class of Excavator Linear metres per hour

> 20 – 25 tonne > 16 – 20 tonne > 2 – 4.5 tonne

50 30 10

Rippable material shall be all material other than non-rippable material. Proving material to be non-rippable shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. The excavator employed shall be equipped with a bucket to manufacturer’s specified standard capacity and fitted with rock teeth. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant

labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • the removal and reinstatement of roadside furniture

(eg. guide posts, signs, etc.) as required • the installation of the new drain to the specified

restoration standard, including the excavation and removal of all necessary material




• the clean up of the site including the disposal of any waste/removed material in accordance with any State Government legislation or Local Government By-laws that are applicable

Where clarification of details in relation to the above Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirement for compliance in these areas.


MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks. MRS 11.04 General Earthworks.


The drain shall be constructed to one of the typical types in Figures 6 and 7 of the NAASRA Guide to Design of Road Surface Drainage. It is recognised in some cases where a shoulder has insufficient width (which cannot be corrected because of physical constraints), it is desirable to lessen the restoration depth and/or batter slope to ensure the drain itself remains trafficable (i.e. 600m wide, 150mm deep, batter slope 1 on 4). In this instance, the installation of the drains should be undertaken to a standard that does not lessen the trafficable surface which is currently available to the road users (i.e. the existing shoulder and/or trafficable drain batter should remain trafficable). The motorists should not perceive that the trafficable width has altered. The drain shall be free of all material that could block the flow of water into the drain and along it. The base shall be evenly sloped to allow water to flow to the outlet. The base of the drain shall be at least 450 mm below the edge of the road shoulder (for earth table drains).


301 Install Earth Surface Drains m


Drain Cross Section 1 per 50m




construction is scheduled for the area of the defect. 3. Are there any related defects? 4. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance

more appropriate? 5. Specify or mark out the length of drain requiring

excavation.



Page 36 of 58

6. Check for services, e.g. overhead wires and buried services. Mark these as appropriate.

7. Specify the appropriate plant, materials and crew



material. 9. Check drain during or immediately after next

rainfall.

305 Clean Earth and Concrete Surface Drains

Description

The restoration of existing earth and concrete drains that are ineffective due to insufficient depth or insufficient grade. Does not include work done on drainage lines treated under Activity Number 203, Heavy Formation Grading. This Activity includes where necessary, removal and reinstatement of guide posts and signs. This Activity excludes non-rippable material. Non-rippable material shall be material which cannot be ripped at a production rate exceeding the rate in the following Table listed against the particular class of excavator.

Class of Excavator Linear metres per hour

> 20 – 25 tonne > 16 – 20 tonne > 2 – 4.5 tonne

50 30 10

Rippable material shall be all material other than non-rippable material. Proving material to be non-rippable shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. The excavator employed shall be equipped with a bucket to manufacturer’s specified standard capacity and fitted with rock teeth. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant

labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • the removal and reinstatement of roadside furniture

(eg. guide posts, signs, etc.) as required

• the restoration of the drain to the specified standard, including the excavation and removal of all necessary material






Where clarification of details in relation to the above Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirement for compliance in these areas.


MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks MRS 11.04 General Earthworks The drain shall be constructed to one of the typical types in Figures 6 and 7 of NAASRA Guide to Design of Road Surface Drainage. It is recognised in some cases where a shoulder has insufficient width (which cannot be corrected because of physical constraints), it is desirable to lessen the restoration depth and/or batter slope to ensure the drain itself remains trafficable (i.e. 600m wide, 150mm deep, batter slope 1 on 4). In this instance, the installation of the drains should be undertaken to a standard that does not lessen the trafficable surface which is currently available to the road users (i.e. the existing shoulder and/or trafficable drain batter should remain trafficable). The motorists should not perceive that the trafficable width has altered.


The drain shall be free of all material that could block the flow of water into the drain and along it. The base shall be evenly sloped to allow water to flow to the outlet. The base of the drain shall be at least 450 mm below the edge of the road shoulder (for earth table drains).


305 Clean Earth and Concrete m Surface Drains


Drain Cross Section 1 per 50m





Page 37 of 58

2. Make sure no other major maintenance or construction is scheduled for the area of the defect.

3. Are there any related defects, e.g. cracked

concrete? 4. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance

more appropriate? 5. Specify or mark out the length of drain requiring

cleaning or excavation. 6. Check for services, e.g. overhead wires and buried

services. Mark these as appropriate. 7. Specify the appropriate plant, materials and crew



material. 9. Check drain during or immediately after next rainfall.

310 Installation and Removal of Erosion and Sediment Control Measures

Description

The installation of erosion and sediment control devices, as required, to control the discharge of sediment and turbidity (to table rains, waterways etc.) contained within run off from areas of exposed earth as a result of maintenance activities. Work Operations The following work operations shall be included as part of this Activity: • site establishment and disetablishment of all plant


(if required) • determination of the work area • the supply and installation of temporary erosion and

sediment control devices to control sediment and turbidity and their removal from site once they are no longer required.

• upon removal of the devices, any reusable materials

are to be stored for the Principal for later application (eg. star pickets, etc)

• all other operation included in the Specifications and

approved Environmental Plan (Maintenance)

• certification that the product meets the requirements of the Restoration Standards, including all necessary visual inspection, compliance and audit testing


waste/collected material in accordance with any State Government legislation of Local Government By-laws that are applicable.

Where clarification of details in relation to the above Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance in these areas.

Application Specifications


MRS 11.51 Environmental Management MR Publication Erosion and Sediment Control Manual

Guidelines 1/98. Erosion and Sediment Control Measures are to be installed to comply with the requirements of the approved Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance).


Installation of and released from the Erosion and Sediment Control Measures shall conform to the requirement of the approved Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance).


310 Installation and Removal of Erosion and Sediment Control Measures. Dollars


Nil


• Are the Control Measures installed to ensure the device is effective?

• Is the sediment fence buried adequately and braced? • Specify the appropriate plan, material and crew • (including quantities of material and organise these. • Have the requirement of the EMP (Maintenance)

been implemented? No other details are listed in the Standard for the Activity.



Page 38 of 58

311 Maintenance of Erosion and Sediment Control Measures

Description

The maintenance of erosion and sediment control devices installed under Activity 310, as required, to ensure that the devices are operating in an efficient and effective manner. Work Operations The following work operations shall be included as part of this Activity: • site establishment and disetablishment of all plant


(if required) • determination of the work area • The inspection and maintenance of the temporary

erosion and sediment control devices including the removal of any built up material and the repair of any damage to the structures.

• All other operation included in the Applicable

Specifications and approved Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance)

• All monitoring, testing and reporting of results • The clean up of the site including the disposal of any

waste/collected material in accordance with any State Government legislation of Local Government By-laws that are applicable.


Application Specifications


MRS 11.51 Environmental Management MR Publication Erosion and Sediment Control Manual

Guidelines 4/98. Erosion and Sediment Control Measures are to be installed to comply with the requirements of the approved Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance). The Contractor shall monitor (including testing and reporting of test results) and inspect installed erosion and sediment control measures after rain events, and at regular intervals during prolonged rain periods.

Inspections are also required to monitor for repair of any damage and to remove excessive sediment deposits. Devices are to be left in place and maintained until their removal will not result in sediment and turbidity discharge greater than the limits specified in the approved Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance)


Control Measures are to be maintained to the Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Guidelines contained in the Environmental Management Plan (Maintenance) The site shall be left clean and tidy.


311 Maintenance of Erosion and Sediment Control Measures Dollars


Not listed


• Are the Control Measures installed to ensure the device is effective?

• Specify the appropriate plant, materials and crew

(including quantities of material) and organise these. • Does the device require removal? • If the erosion and Sediment Control Measures are

regularly damaged, back up measures may need to be implemented to maintain the control measure’s effectiveness.

• Have the requirement of the EMP (Maintenance)

been implemented? • Are other activities programmed for this area? If so,

will new control measures need to be installed. No other details are listed in the Standard for the Activity.

322 Clean Culverts, Pipes and Pits- Major

Description

The cleaning of debris and silt impeding the free flow of water through culverts, pipes and pits and their inlets and outlets. Applies to waterway installations greater than 0.3 m2 waterway opening (equates to 600mm diameter size RCP). Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity:



Page 39 of 58

• site establishment and disestablishment of all plant labour and materials

• establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • the restoration of the drainage structure including the

inlets and outlets to the specified standard, including the excavation and removal of all necessary material




• the clean up of the site including the disposal of any waste/removed material in accordance with any State Government legislation or Local Government By-laws that are applicable

Where clarification of details in relation to the above Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance in these areas. Applicable Specifications MRS 11.02 Provision for Traffic MRS 11.04 General Earthworks


• The culverts, pipes and pits and their barrels, inlets and outlets shall be free from all material that could restrict the flow of water.

• The inlets and outlets shall include the area between

the culvert, pipe or pit (or similar) to the outlet point of the upstream drainage system and the inlet point to the downstream drainage system. Some examples follow:

• Where the outlet continues through a property

boundary after leaving the structure, then the outlet will generally include the area between the structure and the property boundary. A similar area of Maintenance would apply to the inlet.

• Where the outlet flows into a table drain or similar after leaving the structure, then the outlet will generally include the area between the structure and the table drain. A similar area of Maintenance would apply to the inlet.

• For underground drainage systems, the inlet and outlet Maintenance usually relates to the gully pits immediately upstream and downstream of the structure.

• Further clarification may be found in the District’s “Department of Main Roads and Local Government Maintenance Responsibilities Guidelines”.

• The site is to be left clean and tidy.


322 Clean Culverts, Pipes and Pits - m3 / Dollars General Testing Requirements Nil.




construction is scheduled for the area of the defect. 3. Are there any related defects, e.g. damaged

culvert? 4. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance

more appropriate? 5. Specify or mark out the culverts, pipes or pits

requiring cleaning. 6. Specify the appropriate plant, materials and crew



material.

330 Install Subsoil Drains

Description

All work required to excavate the road formation and install subsoil drains, backfill and restore pavement and shoulder as required. Does not include work carried out in conjunction with pavement repair works - see Activities Numbered 140, 143 and 144. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant

labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • excavation of the trench for the subsoil drain in

accordance with MRS 11.03 • the supply and installation of the subsoil drain in

accordance with MRS 11.03 (including concrete outlets/surrounds, markers, etc.)



Page 40 of 58

• all other work operations as detailed in the Applicable Specifications (i.e. MRS 11.03; MRS 11.04 etc.)

• the supply, placement and compaction of backfill • the supply, placement and compaction of cement

treated pavement material (Type 2.5) stabilised with not less than 2% or more than 3% by mass of cement where required (eg. for road crossings)


tack coat at a rate of 0.6 l/m2 residual bitumen where required (eg. for road crossings)

• the supply, placement and compaction of the asphalt

wearing course where required (eg. for road crossings)

• forwarding a copy of “as constructed” details of the

subsoil drain to the Principal • certification that the product meets the requirements






MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks MRS 11.03 Drainage, Retaining Structures and

Protective Treatments. MRS 11.04 General Earthworks. MRS 11.05 Unbound Pavements. MRS 11.08 Plant-mix Stabilised Pavements. MRS 11.11 Sprayed Bituminous Surfacings excl. Emulsions MRS 11.12 Sprayed Bitumen Emulsion Surfacing MRS 11.17 Bitumen MRS 11.19 Bitumen Cutter and Flux Oils MRS 11.21 Bitumen Emulsion MRS 11.22 Supply of Cover Aggregate MRS 11.30 Dense Graded Asphalt Pavements.

Plant-mix stabilised and dense graded asphalt pavement material may be placed by any equipment that does not cause the mix to segregate.


As per specifications except as provided hereunder: a. The standard of compaction shall be such that the

final passes of the compaction equipment leave no impressions on the restored surface.

b. The finished surface shall be within +5 mm of the

height of the surrounding road surface.


330 Install Subsoil Drain m


Minimum testing frequency Compaction Visual 4 per day Straight Edge 1 per 20m




construction is scheduled for the area of the defect.


more appropriate? 5. Obtain details of subsoil drain from your supervisor. 6. Specify or mark out the location of the subsoil

drain. 7. Check for services, e.g. overhead wires and buried services. Mark these as appropriate. 8. Specify the appropriate plant, materials and crew


9. Arrange and specify a disposal area for excavated material.



Page 41 of 58

400 ROADSIDE

401 Tractor Slashing, Rural

Description

The mechanical slashing of vegetation within the road reserve in a rural environment. Excludes herbicide spraying around roadside furniture. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant

labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • slashing the shoulders, sight lines at intersections

with Local Government roads, private accesses in rural areas and the inside of curves and clear zones where achievable. The slashing at major interchanges and other locations may also be required



of the Restoration Standards, including all visual inspections, compliance and audit testing. This is to be attached to each Works Order





Grass and other vegetation shall be mowed and programmed with Activity 407 where necessary so as to, at all times, provide motorists with a clear view of all signs, guide markers and guardrails and to provide Entering Sight Distance as per the Austroads Guide to Traffic Engineering Practice Part 5 - Intersections at Grade (Section 5.2.3). Visibility will however, be limited in many places by earthworks, large trees and other obstructions. All medians, raised islands and drains shall be mowed to meet the agreed intervention levels.

Except by specific direction, slashing is not undertaken for appearance, to reduce bush fire hazard or to remove a snake or vermin habitat. MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks


The extent of tractor slashing should be: • Approximately 3.6m (or two machine passes) on

each side of the carriageway: • Visibility triangles at intersections to establish, where

possible, entering sight distance; • A greater distance on the inside of curves to maintain

stopping sight distance. In general, this distance should be 9.0m, or on tight curves in higher speed environments, 14.0m. The following table gives greater detail.

Speed

Environment (kmh)

Curve Radius (m)

Width of clearing on inside of curve

(m)

100 400 9

100 800 5

130 800 14

130 1200 9

130 2200 5

• 120m in front of official signs is necessary for visibility

to approaching traffic. • 2m around the perimeter of all timber noise barriers When required, a greater width should be mowed to destroy any tree seedlings growing within the clear zone and/or in table drains. In 100kmh speed zones, the width to be slashed in this way is 9.0m from the edge of the traffic lane. The slashed vegetation shall be less than 100 mm high for the areas stated above No debris is to be thrown onto the sealed carriageway.


401 Tractor Slashing, Rural Hectare


Minimum frequency Cut height 1 per day


1. Is an alternative treatment or major maintenance more appropriate e.g. grading of verge?



Page 42 of 58

2. Specify the appropriate plant, materials and crew (including quantities of materials) and organise these.

3. Check for litter and arrange for collection prior to

mowing if appropriate. 4. Activity would normally be done on a set program

to keep vegetation at or below the agreed intervention level.

402 Tractor Slashing, Urban

Description

The mechanical slashing of vegetation within the road reserve in urban built up areas. Includes slashing to a width of 2 metres outside the line of guide posts and herbicide spraying around roadside furniture. Excludes mowing of grass and vegetation by hand mower and/or brush cutter, see No. 404. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant

labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • mowing of vegetation, using self-propelled/ride on

type mowers within the road reserve including medians, drains and around roadside furniture (including sound barrier fencing) or elsewhere as required

• the submission of a mowing program to the Principal

for acceptance showing the areas to be regularly maintained by this Activity



of the Restoration Standards, including all visual inspections, compliance and audit testing. This is to be attached to each Works Order



Where clarification of details in relation to the above Work Operations is required, the following Applicable

Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance in these areas.


Grass and other vegetation shall be mowed so as to, at all times, provide motorists with a clear view of all signs, guide markers and guardrails and to provide Entering Sight Distance as per the Austroads Guide to Traffic Engineering Practice Part 5 - Intersections at Grade (Section 5.2.3). All medians, raised islands and drains shall be mown to meet agreed intervention levels. MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks.


The slashed vegetation shall be less than 75 mm high. No debris shall be thrown onto the sealed carriageway. Restoration Standards for visibility triangles at intersections, visibility of signs and the inside of curves are as per the requirements for Activity No. 401.


402 Tractor Slashing, Urban Hectare








mowing if appropriate. 4. This would normally be done on a set program to

keep vegetation at or below the agreed intervention level.

403 Tractor Slashing - Boom Mower

Description

The tractor slashing of vegetation within the road reserve using a boom mower attachment. Refer to Activity No. 401 for details relating to this Activity. This Activity should generally be used where conventional tractors and slashers cannot gain access to maintain around roadside furniture.





Page 43 of 58


403 Tractor Slashing - Boom Mower Square Metres

404 Hand Mowing

Description

The mowing of grass and vegetation by hand-mower and/or brush cutter (or other hand equipment) in medians, drains and around roadside furniture (including sound barrier fencing) or elsewhere as required (including rest areas owned by the Department). This Activity shall be only undertaken when Activity 401 – Tractor Slashing – Rural and Activity 402 Tractor Slashing – Urban are not applicable. All medians, raised islands and drains shall be mowed to meet the agreed intervention levels. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant

labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • mowing by hand, in medians, drains and around

roadside furniture (including sound barrier fencing) or elsewhere as required

• the submission of a handmowing program to the

Principal for acceptance showing the areas to be regularly maintained by this Activity








Grass and other vegetation shall be mown so as to, at all times, provide motorists with a clear view of all signs, guide markers and guardrails and to provide Entering

Sight Distance as per the Austroads Guide to Traffic Engineering Practice Part 5 -Intersections at Grade (Section 5.2.3). MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks.


All grass shall be mowed to less than 75 mm high. No vegetation shall be thrown onto the sealed carriageway. Restoration Standards for visibility triangles at intersections, visibility at signs and inside of curves are as per requirements for Activity No. 401.


404 Hand Mowing m2




1. Is an alternative treatment or major maintenance more appropriate e.g. herbicide spraying? 2. Specify the appropriate plant, materials and crew



mowing if appropriate. 5. This would normally be done on a set program to

keep vegetation at or below the agreed intervention level.

405 Clearing

Description

The removal or pruning of all roadside vegetation, other than grass, for the purpose of safety or visibility clearing. Includes trees too close to the road and branches/trees likely to fall on the road. Also includes chipping, grading, weeding, burning operations and treating the stump with herbicide to prevent regrowth. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant

labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area



Page 44 of 58

• clearing/pruning of trees and branches within sight lines at intersections with Local Government roads, private accesses in rural areas, on the inside of curves and within clear zones. The clearing within major interchanges and other areas may also be required.

• Clearing of trees too close to the road and

branches/trees likely to fall on the road. Operations also include chipping (i.e. using a mechanical chipper/mulcher) and treating the stump with herbicide to prevent regrowth. Any other proposed methods of disposal will need to be submitted to the Principal for acceptance.








MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks MRS 11.04 General Earthworks The extent of visibility clearing shall be: • The restoration standard required at these locations

will be to remove trees and shrubs from the shoulder of the road to a line 2.0m past the bottom of the table drain, or to 6.0m from the edge of the through lane, whichever is the lesser.

• Visibility triangles at intersections to establish, where

possible, entering sight distance as per Austroads 1989 INTERSECTIONS AT GRADE Section 5.2.3. It is accepted that in some situations this standard may not be practical. (i.e. where a vertical curve limits site, where private property prevents clearing, where environmental issues may prevent or limit such work or where earthworks may be necessary to obtain the specified sight distances.)

A greater distance on the inside of curves to maintain stopping sight distance. In general, this distance should be 9.0m, or on tight curves in higher speed environments, 14.0m.

The following table gives greater detail.

• 120m in front of official signs as necessary for

visibility to approaching traffic. • Trees and shrubs shall be cut near ground level and

the debris removed to a recognised dumping site. Cut stumps and/or regrowth be herbicide treated. Wherever possible the cleared areas are then to be maintained using a slasher as required.


All specified branches/trees removed/trimmed No regrowth. No debris left on the sealed carriageway.


405 Clearing Dollars


None listed


1. Specify or mark out the area requiring cleaning. 2. Check if the trees are of special significance e.g.

memorial. If so, works are to be approved by the Principal.

3. Check for services, e.g. overhead wires and buried

services. Mark these as appropriate. 4. Specify the appropriate plant, materials and crew

(including quantities of materials) and chemical spray rate and organise these.

5. Arrange for safe storage of chemicals 6. Ensure the spray operator has an appropriate

licence. 7. Arrange and specify a disposal area for cleared

material. 8. Determine the traffic control required during the

clearing operations to avoid risk to public. 9. Supervisor must be present on site if operation will

cause temporary road closure.

Speed Environment

(kmh) Curve Radius

(m) Width of clearing on inside of curve

(m)

100 400 9

100 800 5

130 800 14

130 1200 9

130 2200 5



Page 45 of 58

406 Herbicide Spot Spraying - Declared Plants

Description The identification and eradication of declared plants within the road reserve (including rest areas owned by MR). This includes either the sprayed or manual application of chemical herbicide. Excludes the spraying of other plants which is undertaken as Activity 407 – Herbicide Spraying. Other vegetation can be treated subject to the approval of the Principal under Activity No. 407 Herbicide Spraying. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • Site establishment and disestablishment of all plant

labour and materials • Establishment and disestablishment of traffic control. • Determination of the work area • The preparation, submission and maintenance of a

spraying procedure. • Spraying of all declared plants in accordance with the

Restoration Standards and Applicable Specifications • All other operation included in the Applicable

Specifications. • Certification that the product meets the requirements

of the Restoration standards including all necessary visual inspections compliance and audit testing.

• The clean up of the site including the disposal of any

waste material in accordance with any State Government legislation of Local Government By-laws that are applicable.

Where classification of details in relation to the above Work Operations is required, the following Application Specifications and Acts provide additional requirements for compliance in these areas.


MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks Agricultural Chemicals Distribution Control Act 1996 – 1968 Commercial Operator’s Manual Rural Land Protection Act 1985 • All plants declared under the Rural Land Protection

Act 1985 on the road reservation shall be eradicated. • All spray operators shall be licensed to comply with

the Agricultural Chemicals Distribution Control Act 1966 – 1968. Commercial Operator’s Manual.

• The Contractor shall submit full details of the proposed spraying operations including a description of the ares to be treated (and extent thereof), the herbicide to be used, the concentration and application rates to the Principal and shall not commence operations until the details are accepted by the Principal.

. • All chemicals used shall comply with all relevant

Australian Standards. State Government Legislation and Local Authority Regulations

• Herbicides used are to be approved for use on the

target species by the DPI • Herbicide to be used in accordance with the

manufacturers recommendations.


All targeted vegetation as per the approved procedures killed. No other vegetation sprayed or killed.


406 Herbicide Spot Spraying Dollars - Declared Plants


Visual inspections only to ensure the above restoration standards are achieved.


1. Determine the type of chemical spray, concentration and application rate

2. Arrange for safe handling and storage of

chemicals. 3. Check area and adjacent properties for grass,

trees, crops, etc. that must not be affected by chemicals. Make careful note of these on the operator’s Spraying Sheet.

6. Ensure the spray operator has an appropriate

licence. 5. Inspect the area after ten days to confirm that the

spraying has been successful.


Description

The supply and application by spraying of chemical herbicide for the control of vegetation growing around roadside furniture and structures (including rest areas owned by the Department). Excludes the spot spraying of declared plants which is undertaken under Activity No. 406.



Page 46 of 58

Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant

labour and materials • establishment and disestablishment of traffic control • determination of the work area • the preparation, submission and maintenance of a

spraying procedure • spraying of all areas in accordance with the

Restoration Standards and Applicable Specifications • all other operations included in the Applicable







The following provisions shall apply to the spraying of herbicides: 1. All vegetation within 1 metre of all signs, guide

markers and guardrails shall be sprayed. 2. Other vegetation can be treated subject to the

approval of the Principal's Delegate or his representative.

3. All spray operators shall be licensed to comply with

the Agricultural Chemicals Distribution Control Act 1966-1978 and 1983, Commercial Operator's Manual.

4. Only "knockdown" herbicides may be used on the

road reserve. "Residual" herbicides are not permitted.


chemicals. 6. The contractor shall submit full details of proposed

spraying operations to the Principal's Delegate and shall not commence operations until the details are

approved by the Principal's Delegate or his representative.

7. Herbicides are to be used in accordance with the

manufacturers recommendations.


All targeted vegetation killed. No other vegetation sprayed.


407 Herbicide Spraying litres Testing Requirements Visual inspections only to ensure the restoration standards are achieved.




(including type of chemical spray and application rate) and organise these.


chemicals. 4. Check area and adjacent properties for grass,

trees, crops etc. that must not be affected by chemicals. Make careful note of these on the operator's Spraying Sheet.

5. Ensure the spray operator has an appropriate

icence. 7. Inspect the area after ten days to see if the

spraying has been successful.

420 Roadside Litter Collection - Rural

Description

The collection and disposal of litter and rubbish, whether from bins located along the right of way or from the right of way itself, in rural areas. Includes the repair and maintenance of receptacles. See Activity Number 421 for litter collection in urban built-up areas. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant

labour and materials



Page 47 of 58

• establishment and disestablishment of traffic control (if required)

• determination of the work area • the collection, removal from site and the disposal of

all litter from the road reserve in environmentally sensitive areas (i.e. in close proximity to creeks and waterways etc.)

• the collection, removal from site and the disposal of

all litter which is greater in size than 100 cm2 from the sealed carriageway (particularly tyre pieces)








MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks All areas of concentrated litter and rubbish threatening environmentally sensitive areas within the road reserve may be removed. The collection, removal and disposal of tyre pieces and other litter over the size of 100 cm2 on the sealed roadway (which is constructed of a dense material and is likely to become a traffic hazard as a projectile if displaced by a vehicle or if hazardous when struck by a motorcycle) shall take priority over litter that is not located on the sealed surface. This scheduled item includes dumping fees in accordance with Local Government and other Statutory regulations. Restoration Standards

• No litter over the size of 100 cm2 potentially hazardous to traffic (as nominated above) remaining on the sealed roadway

• No litter shall remain in the vicinity of environmentally

sensitive areas • The site shall be left clean and tidy


420 Roadside Litter Collection Dollars


Nil


1. Specify the appropriate plant and crew and organise these.

2. Check for litter and define collection area. 3. This Activity would normally be done on a set

program to keep litter at or below the intervention level.

421 Roadside Litter Collection - Urban

Description

The collection and disposal of litter and rubbish, whether from bins located along the right of way or from the right of way itself in an urban builtup environment. Includes the repair and maintenance of receptacles. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant


(if required) • determination of the work area • the collection, removal from site and the disposal of

all litter from the road reserve in environmentally sensitive areas (i.e. in close proximity to creeks and waterways etc.)

• the collection, removal from site and the disposal of

all litter which is greater in size than 100 cm2 from the sealed carriageway (particularly tyre pieces)









Page 48 of 58


MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks All areas of concentrated litter and rubbish threatening environmentally sensitive areas within the road reserve may be removed. The collection, removal and disposal of tyre pieces and other litter over the size of 100 cm2 on the sealed roadway (which is constructed of a dense material and is likely to become a traffic hazard as a projectile if displaced by a vehicle or if hazardous when struck by a motorcycle) shall take priority over litter that is not located on the sealed surface. This scheduled item includes dumping fees in accordance with Local Government and other Statutory regulations. Restoration Standards

• No litter over the size of 100 cm2 potentially hazardous to traffic (as nominated above) remaining on the sealed roadway

• No litter shall remain in the vicinity of environmentally

sensitive areas The site shall be left clean and tidy


421 Roadside Litter Collection - Urban m3


None listed


1. Specify the appropriate plant and crew and organise these. 2. Check for litter and define collection area. 3. This Activity would normally be done on a set program to keep litter at or below the intervention level.

424 Removal of Unauthorised Signs

Description

The removal of unauthorised signs from the road reservation. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant

labour and materials • the preparation of a report for the monthly review

meeting

• establishment and disestablishment of traffic control (if required)

• determination of the work area • removal of sign and supports (if applicable), including

storage and disposal • the issuing of written advice to repeat offenders

concerning their breach of the relevant Acts • provide notification to the police of vehicle mounted

signs or roadside vendors • all other operations included in the Applicable







MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks Unauthorised Signs 1. Introduction Advertising signs are permitted on declared road reserves when they are authorised by the Director General, Department of Main Roads, under the Transport Infrastructure (Roads) Act 1994. 2. Authorised Signs In general, the only authorised signs are: - static illuminated street name signs ("Identilites") - signs attached to bus shelter sheds - art union signs (Mater Hospital, Endeavour

Foundation, Boys Town, etc.) 3. Unauthorised Signs 3.1 Signs to be removed immediately The Contractor shall immediately remove, from the road reserve, any advertising signs attached to road furniture (i.e. traffic signs, guide posts, guard rail, signal posts, light poles, etc.) The signs shall be removed in such a way as to cause minimal damage to the sign. The signs shall be stored at



Page 49 of 58

the Contractor’s depot until they are collected by the owners or finally destroyed as approved by the Principal. 3.2 Signs to be referred to the Police Regulation 126 of the Traffic Act 1949 gives the Police District Superintendent of Traffic control over handheld or vehicle-mounted advertising devices. Instances of advertising signs mounted on a registered vehicle (motor vehicle or trailer), which is parked on the road reserve for an extended period, shall be referred to the nearest police station. 3.3 Signs to be referred to the Principal's Delegate Any advertising sign not covered by Clauses 3.1 and 3.2 should be referred to the Principal's Delegate. The Principal's Delegate or representative shall then instruct the Contractor on whether or not to remove the sign.


No unauthorised signs on the road reserve except those which have been reported to the police or to the Principal's Delegate.


424 Removal of Unauthorised Signs Each (Sign)


None listed


1. Define the sign for removal. 2. Specify and organise the appropriate plant,

materials and crew (including quantities of materials).

3. Advise Supervisor of signs removed. 4. Ensure signs removed are stacked carefully for

retrieval by owners.


Description

The servicing of all aspects (excluding pavement/seal, vegetation and sign Defects) of rest areas controlled by the Department of Main Roads, necessary for the safety and convenience of the public. Work Operations The following activities shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant,

labour and materials

• determination of the work area • clean and maintain toilet facilities • remove all graffiti • empty garbage bins • report any illegal campers (a list of campers is to be

kept and forwarded at regular intervals to the Principal)



• clean up of rest area including the disposal of any

waste materials in accordance with any State Government legislation or Local Government By-laws that are applicable

• prompt notification to the Principal of illegally camped

persons • rest area shall be regularly inspected and serviced to

ensure that the Restoration Standards are met at all times


Rest area shall be regularly inspected and serviced to ensure that the restoration standards set out below are met at all times.


All defects in rest areas shall be rectified, as follows: • Toilet facilities - clean and functioning. • Graffiti - removed - damaged paintwork repainted. • Pavement defects - Note included in Sealed

Roadway Maintenance. • Vegetation activities - completed as per: 401 Tractor Slashing, Rural 402 Tractor Slashing, Urban 404 Hand Mowing 405 Clearing 407 Herbicide Spraying • Signing defects - repaired as per: 424 Remove Unauthorised Signs 501 Install New and/or Relocate Old Signs 502 Repair and Replace Signs (excl. Guide Signs) 504 Cleaning Signs 506 Repair Guide Signs • Empty garbage bins. • Site tidy - litter removed.



Page 50 of 58

• Buildings and furniture defects requiring repairs and painting - record and report for Additional Maintenance.

• Any illegal campers reported to the relevant authority.


440 Rest Area Servicing Dollars


None listed


1. Define the rest area for repair. 2. Check all aspects of the rest area weekly: - operation of the toilet facilities - presence of graffiti - condition of chairs, tables and fireplaces - condition of access roads - presence of overhanging branches likely to fall - long grass - rest area signing - illegally camped occupants. 3. Specify and organise the appropriate plant,

materials and crew (including quantities of materials).

4. Is a specialist subcontractor required for works eg.

plumber.

452 Emergency Call Out Activities

Description

Activities undertaken following a call out by the Police or the Principal or recognised authority, or where in the opinion of the Contractor an emergency situation exists, to an emergency situation on the road Network to make safe and/or prevent further damage to the road/asset. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant


(if required) • determination of the work area • the rectification of the situation to make the site safe.

Does not include more permanent type work. Permanent rectification is to be undertake using other scheduled Activities according to its respective priority

• the collection, removal from site and the disposal of all litter which is greater in size than 100 cm2 from the sealed carriageway (particularly tyre pieces)






• notification to the Principal within 24 hours of the

callout Where clarification of details in relation to the above Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance in these areas.


MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Queensland) The Contractor shall receive and carry out instructions from the person in charge of the emergency situation. Copies of emergency Work Orders are to accompany the progress claim for that period. The Emergency Gang shall be: - mobile within 15 minutes of receiving a call out,

and - on-site as soon as possible after receiving the call


The emergency situation shall be addressed to the satisfaction of the Police, the Principal's Delegate or other recognised authority. Notify the Principal if major rectification is required.


452 Emergency Call Out Activities Dollars


Nil


1. Specify the appropriate plant, materials and crew (including quantities of materials) required to be available for call out, and organise these.

2. Consider if a scheduled Activity is required.



Page 51 of 58

500 ROAD FURNITURE

501 Install New and/or Relocate Old Signs

Description

The installation of new information, hazard, regulatory and warning signs including the supply of parts and fittings supports. Work under this Activity applies to signs with a face area of less than or equal to on (1) square metre supported on one post support. It does not include work carried out to guide signs; signs greater than one (1) square metre or signs requiring more than one post. Activity Nos.502 or 506 are to be used for the excluded works. Includes a new sign at a new location or the installation of a new sign where both the sign (i.e. face) and support of an existing sign are damaged to the extent that they cannot be repaired (i.e. a new post and sign is required). Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant


(if required) • determination of the work area • the supply and installation of a new sign and

supports including fittings, footings etc. • the removal of damaged components where the sign

and structure are being replaced including storage and disposal (if required)








MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks MRS 11.14 Road Furniture MRS 11.70 Concrete Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Queensland) The design of all new footings shall be approved by the Principal's Delegate Notwithstanding the requirements of MRS 11.14 Road Furniture, supply of road signs and installation of road signs will be measured as specified below for the Activity item or work item. The class of the sign sheeting shall be Class 1, 2 or 2A as detailed. (See Clause 8.3.3.1., MRS 11.14 Road Furniture).


The sign and its support structure shall be erected to the requirements of Specification MRS 11.14 and the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices.


501 Install New Signs Each (Sign) (excluding Guide Signs)


Minimum test frequency: 1 per footing - Geometrics - Footings - diameter, depth, transverse location Posts - location 1 per post Sign placement - longitudinal placement 1 per sign

- transverse location 1 per sign - height 1 per sign - orientation 1 per sign

Maximum Lot Size: A Works Order


1. Define location of the new sign. 2. Check that no work is planned in the immediate

future that would make the sign unnecessary in that location.

3. Specify and organise the appropriate plant,

materials and crew (including quantities of material).

4. Check that the sign is in stock. If not, order one

and allow for the delay in supply. 5. Make sure that the new sign location will not

obscure vision.



Page 52 of 58

502 Repair Signs (excluding Guide Signs)

Description

The repair of damaged and/or supports or replacement of signs with deteriorated faces, excluding guide signs. Includes the replacement of damaged or deteriorated facilities with new signs and/or supports at that location. Applies to signs with a face greater than one (1) square metre or signs requiring more than one (1) post. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant


(if required) • determination of the work area • the removal of the damaged or worn components

including storage (if required) and disposal • the supply and installation of a new sign and

supports including fittings, footings etc., as required, in order to replace worn or damaged components








MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks MRS 11.14 Road Furniture Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Queensland). Notwithstanding the requirements of MRS 11.14 Road Furniture, removal and re-erection of signs, supply of road signs and installation of road signs will be measured as specified below for the Activity item or work item. The class of the sign sheeting shall be Class 1, 2 or 2A as

detailed. (See Clause 8.3.3.1., MRS 11.14 Road Furniture).


The sign and/or its support structure shall be repaired or replaced to the standards specified in Specification MRS 11.14 and the Manual of Uniform Traffic Devices and the Supplementary Specification.


502 Repair Signs Each (sign)/Dollars (excluding Guide Signs)


As per Activity No. 501 where applicable.


1. Examine the sign and its support. Check legibility, reflectivity, location, visibility, damage and alignment.

Should they be repaired or replaced? Can they be repaired off-site and stored for later use? Should they be relocated?

2. Check that no work is planned in the immediate

future that could make the sign unnecessary in that location.



4. Can some of the stored, recovered Principal’s

materials be reused? 5. Check that the sign is in stock. If not, order one

and allow for the delay in supply. 8. If the existing sign is a regulatory sign, the sign

must be replaced immediately the damaged sign is removed.

503 Relocate Existing Signs (excluding Guide Signs)

Description

All work associated with the relocation of existing signs excluding guide signs as authorised by the Principal. Work under this Activity applies to signs with a face area of less than or equal to one (1) square metre supported on one post support. It does no include work carried out to guide signs; signs greater than one (1) square metre or signs requiring more than one post, Activity 502 is to be used for the excluded works.



Page 53 of 58



(if required) • determination of the work area • the removal of existing sign, posts, footings (as

required) including restoration of area to match surrounding area

• the storage for re-use of suitable components • installation of existing sign to area authorised by

Principal (includes any worn or damaged components)

• installation of new supports, footings, fittings, etc. as

required • all other operations included in the Applicable







MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks MRS 11.14 Road Furniture MRS 11.70 Concrete Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Queensland) The design of all new footings shall be approved by the Principal. Notwithstanding the requirements of MRS 11.14 Road Furniture, removal and re-erection of signs will be measured as specified below for the Activity item or work item.


The sign and its support structure shall be erected to the requirements of Specification MRS 11.14 and the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices.


503 Relocate Existing Signs each (sign) (excluding guide signs)


Minimum test frequency: Geometrics - Footings - diameter, depth, transverse 1 per footing location Posts - location 1 per post Sign placement - longitudinal placement 1 per sign - transverse location 1 per sign - height 1 per sign - orientation 1 per sign Maximum Lot Size: Works Order


1. Define new location of the sign. 2. Check that no work is planned in the immediate

future that would make the sign unnecessary in that location.

3 Specify and organise the appropriate plant,


4. Check the legibility, reflectivity and damage to the

existing sign. If condition is deficient, schedule Activity Number 502 and order another sign.

5. Make sure that the new sign location will not

obscure vision. 8. Remove traffic control

- clean/repair as necessary

504 Cleaning Signs

Description

The cleaning of sign faces to remove dirt, graffiti and other contaminants to restore the reflectivity and appearance of signs. May also require the removal of graffiti from the back of the sign.



Page 54 of 58



(if required) • determination of the work area • the cleaning of the sign faces (or backs if graffiti

exists) to remove dirt, graffiti and other contaminants to restore the reflectivity and appearance of signs

• includes supply of all cleaning agents and materials • all other operations included in the Applicable







MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks The Contractor shall supply all cleaning agents and materials. All foreign material shall be removed from the sign face. Any damage caused by the cleaning process shall be repaired by the Contractor.


The sign face shall be cleaned in such a way that all dirt and contaminants are removed.


504 Cleaning Signs Each (Sign) Testing Requirements Visual inspections to ensure the restoration standards are met.


1. Define the signs for cleaning. 2. What has caused the defect? Schedule another

Activity to correct this, if needed (sign too close to unsealed shoulder, etc).


materials and crew (including the quantities of materials).

506 Repair Guide Signs

Description

The repair of damaged or deteriorated guide sign faces and supports. Includes the replacement of damaged or deteriorated facilities with new signs and/or supports at that location. Excludes regulatory, warning and hazard signs (included under Activity No. 502) Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant


(if required) • determination of the work area • the removal of damaged or worn components

including storage (if required) and disposal • the supply of information to the Principal regarding

the design of new signs, including survey information if breakaway bases are required

• the supply and installation of a new sign and

supports including fittings, footings (including the supply, manufacture and installation of breakaway bases if required) etc., in order to replace worn or damaged components. May include the refacing of the sign of the sign is structurally intact or can be easily repaired






Page 55 of 58

• the clean up of the site including the disposal of any waste material in accordance with any State Government legislation or Local Government By-laws that are applicable



MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks MRS 11.14 Road Furniture Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Queensland). Notwithstanding the requirements of MRS 11.14 Road Furniture, removal and re-erection of signs, supply of road signs and installation of road signs will be measured as specified below for the Activity item or work item. The class of the sign sheeting shall be Class 1, 2 or 2A as detailed. (See Clause 8.3.3.1., MRS 11.14 Road Furniture). Works which require the sign face to be replaced must firstly be approved by the Principal. Signs subject to this approval shall have all damaged components collected and stored at the Contractors depot during the approval process.


The sign and/or its support structure shall be repaired or replaced to the standards specified in Specification MRS 11.14 and the Manual of Uniform Traffic Devices and the Supplementary Specification.


506 Repair Guide Signs Dollars


As per Activity No. 501 where applicable


1. Examine the sign and its support. Check legibility, reflectivity, location, visibility, damage and alignment. Should they be repaired or replaced? Can they be repaired off-site and stored for later use? Should they be re-located?

2. Check that no work is planned in the immediate

future that could make the sign unnecessary in that location.

3. Specify and organise the appropriate plant, materials and crew (including quantities of material).

4. Check that the sign is in stock. If not, order one

and allow for the delay in supply.

512 Repair or Replace Guide Markers

Description

The repair or replacement of guide markers or their respective components to restore delineation of the road alignment. Excludes raised pavement markers (see Activity No. 740).

Work Operations

The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant



and disposal • the supply and installation of new components,

including fittings • all other operations included in the Applicable





Where clarification of details in relation to the above Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance in these areas. Applicable Specification

MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks MRS 11.14 Road Furniture Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Queensland). The repair of guide markers shall consist of restoring the posts to the vertical and replacing delineators, if applicable. Delineators shall conform to the requirements of AS 1906 - Part 2 - 1981 "Retro reflective Devices (non-pavement applications)" and shall be a type approved by the Principal's Delegate.



Page 56 of 58


The guide marker shall be repaired or replaced to the requirements specified for road edge guide posts in MRS 11.14 Road Furniture The Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Queensland), the Supplementary Specification and as specified above.


512 Repair or Replace Guide Each (Marker) Markers Testing Requirements Visual inspections to ensure the restoration standards are being met.


1. Define the area requiring the repair or replacement of guide markers.

2. What has caused the defect? Schedule another

Activity if this is needed. 3. Check no other maintenance or permanent work is

scheduled for the area of the defect. 4. Specify and organise the appropriate plant,

material and crew (including quantities of materials).

522 Repair or Replace Guardrail, Barrier Furniture

Description

The repair or replacement of damaged guardrails/barrier furniture. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • site establishment and disestablishment of all plant



including storage (if required) and disposal • the supply and installation of new components,

including fittings, footings, excavation for footings etc.

• all other operations included in the Applicable Specifications





Where the terminal end of the guardrail is significantly damaged and requires replacing, a MELT end should be used. A joint inspection should take place on site to determine the repair required. Where clarification of details in relation to the above Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance in these areas.


MRS 11.02 Control of Vehicular Traffic at Roadworks MRS 11.14 Road Furniture Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Queensland) Relevant Standard Drawings The work shall include: a. Removal of damaged guardrail components b. Supply of new guardrail components c. Straightening of existing posts d. Installation of new posts e. Erection of new guardrail f. Transport of old components to the nearest

maintenance depot


The guardrail and its support structure shall be replaced to the requirements of Specification MRS 11.14 and the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices.


522 Repair or Replace of Guardrail, Dollars Barrier Furniture.


Minimum test frequency: Geometrics 1 per footing - Footings - Diameter, depth, transverse location Placement 1 per section - Longitudinal placement 1 per section - transverse location 1 per post - height 1 per 10 m



Page 57 of 58


1. Define the guardrail/barrier for repair/replacement. 2. What has caused the defect? Schedule another

Activity to correct this, if needed. 3. Make sure no other major maintenance or

construction is scheduled for the area of the defect. 4. Are there any related defects. 5. Is an alternative remedy or major maintenance

more appropriate? 6. Specify or mark out the length of guardrail/barrier

requiring repair/replacement. 7. Specify and organise the appropriate plant,

materials and crew (including the quantities of materials).

No other details are listed in the Standard for this Activity.



Page 58 of 58

900 OVERHEADS

912 Payment of Permits and Fees (Environmental)

Description The reimbursement of permits and fees paid by the Contractor as a result of compliance with the applicable Federal, State and Local Government Legislation. Work Operations The following operations shall be included as part of the above Activity: • payment of the fees/permits by the Contractor • the provision of evidence for payment of the above

fees/permits (including a copy of the permit etc.) to the Principal for reimbursement of the fee/permit amount

• demonstrated evidence that the requirements in

relation to the receipt of permits/fees as detailed in the EMP Maintenance have been complied with


Specifications Where clarification of details in relation to the above Work Operations is required, the following Applicable Specifications provide additional requirements for compliance in these areas. Applicable Specifications All relevant legislative Acts and documents applicable to the obtaining of permits and fees. Restoration Standards Documented evidence of the payment of permits/fees is to accompany any claim for reimbursement. Activity and Unit of Measure 912 Payment of Fees/Permits Dollars (Environmental) Testing Requirements Nil. Particular Points to Consider 1. As part of the stewardship role, the Contractor shall

notify the Principal of the relevant fees/permits necessary for attainment prior to applying and paying the fees/permits.




Part 7

Other Documents and Forms

Document Reference

Number of Pages

Title (or Description) Of Document

C6292 C6296 C6297 C6298 C6299

2 1 1 1 1

Performance Report Form Progress Pay Summary Progress Claim (Network Schedule) Progress Claim Dayworks (Summary) Progress Claim Dayworks (Details)

Note: The forms in this Part 7 are samples only. They provide a guide to the type of information required. Changes may be made to suit local requirements.



Performance Report


Contractor Name Invitation Number

District

Assessment Period From

To

Date of Report

Purpose of Report This Performance report will be used to provide regular information on the extent to which the contractor satisfied Department of Main Roads requirements as set out in the contract documents. The Report may concern quantitative data as well as comparative assessments. Reports may be used:- • as the basis for discussion at a Contract Review Meeting • as input to the pre-agreement stage of subsequent terms • to rectify less than satisfactory performance • as a basis form termination of the Contract where unacceptable performance is identified. The Contractor must be given an opportunity to comment on a completed Performance Report. Supporting comments (and attached documents) must accompany report showing less than satisfactory performance. Ratings Legend 1. Did not satisfy requirements (less than satisfactory) 2. Marginal – some problems but acceptable 3. Satisfactory 4. Above average performance

Principal’s Summary / Declaration I declare that the information contained in this report is a fair and accurate assessment of the Contractor’s performance during the assessment period.

Name / Position

Signature

Date

To be discussed at Contract

Review Meeting on

No further action

Review at next Contract Review Meeting

Send Show Cause notice

Contractor’s Acknowledgement I have read this Performance Report

Name / Position

Signature

Date

C6292




Assessment Criteria - Road Maintenance Performance Contract (Open)

Rating Network Stewardship 1 2 3 4

• Liaison / Co-operation with Principal

• Comprehensive Knowledge of Network

• Sound Exercise of Discretion

Management / Supervision

• Quality of Records

• Systematic Approach to Management

• Adherence to Intervention Levels/Response Times

• Financial Management

Operations

• Response to Emergencies

• Traffic Management / Public Consultation

• Quality of Completed Work

• Adherence to Quality Plan, Safety Plan, EMP

(Maintenance)

Supporting Comments (Principal)

Comments (Contractor)

C6292




Progress Claim Summary


Contractor Name

Invitation Number

District

Progress Claim for period from to

Routine Maintenance

Network Schedule 1 (includes Dayworks) (National Highways) Completed Work $

Network Schedule 10 (includes Dayworks) (Other State-controlled Roads) Completed Work $

Routine Maintenance Total $

Variations Completed Work $

Total Completed Work Amount $

Less Amount Previously Paid (excluding GST) $

Sub Total $

Emergency Activities for this Progress Claim $

Amount this Progress Claim $

GST Amount this Progress Claim $

Completed Activity

Disk File Name

Contact Officer Telephone Facsimile

Authorisation

Name

Position

Signature

Date

Page of

C6296 June 2001

Page 1 of 1



Progress Claim (Network Schedule)



District

Fund Category

Network Schedule or

Multiple Schedule

Progress Claim for Period from

to

Note: Show amounts in whole dollars only. Treat 50 cents and over as next dollar.

Activity No. Description Unit Unit Rate

$ ¢ Quantity Amount ($)

Quantity Complete to

Date

Value of Completed Work ($)


Total / Carried Forward $

Completed Dayworks (from C6298) $

Schedule Completed Work Total $

Authorisation Name Position

Signature Date

Page of

C6297 June 2001

Page 1 of 1



Progress Claim Dayworks (Summary)



District

Fund Category

Network Schedule or

Multiple Schedule

Progress Claim for Period from

to


Activity No. Description Unit Notional

Quantity Activity

Subtotal ($)

Value of Completed Work ($)



Schedule Completed Dayworks Total $

Authorisation

Name Position

Signature Date

Page of

C6298 June 2001

Page 1 of 1



Progress Claim Dayworks (Details)



District

Fund Category Road

Number

Network Schedule or

Multiple Schedule

Location from

to

Activity Number

Notional Completed Quantity


Reference No. Description Unit Rate

($) Quantity Amount ($)



Activity Sub Total $

Authorisation Name Position

Signature Date

Page of

C6299 June 2001

Page 1 of 1




Part 8

Registration of Interest



June 2001

Registration Brochure Road Maintenance Services

Provision of

Road Maintenance Services

in the (insert area name) area

Registration of Interest

District

Reference



June 2001

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Description

1.0 Introduction

2.0 Nature of Agreement

3.0 Selection Process 3.1 Applications

3.2 Assessment

3.3 Selection Criteria

3.4 Explanation of Selection Criteria

− Track Record (Maintenance or Maintenance Type Construction

− Understanding of Scope of the Road Maintenance Service

− Key Personnel

− Safety Record

− Quality Management System

− Environmental Management System (Maintenance)

4.0 Enquiries Prior to Lodgement of Application

5.0 Lodgement of Applications

6.0 Important Dates

7.0 Network Plan

Proposed Maintenance Network Invitation Number ID***

Road Maintenance Performance Contract

− Registration Application Form and Schedules

Application for Registration

− Road Maintenance Services

Assessment Schedules Schedule 1 – Maintenance

Schedule 2 – Maintenance – Type Construction

Schedule 3 – Key Personnel

Schedule 4 – Safety Record

Schedule 5 – Quality management System

Schedule 6 – Environmental Management System

Key Selection Criteria




1.0 Introduction The Department of Main Roads invites interested parties (including any nominated Subcontractors) who satisfy defined requirements, to apply for registration to provide an Offer for the services described in Section 2. The Applicant or its nominated road maintenance Subcontractor must have a relevant Quality System that applies to road maintenance operations based on ISO 9002. Third Party Accreditation must be in place at the date of the letter of acceptance. The selection of a Contractor will involve a two stage process. The first stage will consider all Applicants and result in the selection of a short list of Registered Applicants. In the second stage, the short listed Registered Applicants will be invited to provide a formal Offer. This document provides information about the basis of carrying out the short-listing process as well as the proposed Contract arrangements, and sets out the requirements for applications by persons interested in seeking registration to provide an Offer. The information contained herein is a statement of general intention only and is not binding on the Principal or prospective Registered Applicants.

2.0 Nature of Agreement The proposed agreement will require the successful applicant to maintain the State-controlled roads (as set out in the attached Network Plan and as described below) for a period of two years, with an option for the Principal to extend the duration for up to a further two years (cost adjustment will apply for any extended period).

Road No. Description Start Ch.

(km) End Ch.

(km)

Approx. C’Way

Lengths (km)

Road Category




Road No. Description Start Ch.

(km) End Ch.

(km)

Approx. C’Way

Lengths (km)

Road Category

Note: (i) – Interchange ramps not included in the above carriageway lengths, but included in maintenance network.

The successful Contractor will be reimbursed through monthly progress payments based on claims for quantities completed and agreed Schedule of Rates, Daywork Rates and Lump Sums. The average annual maintenance expenditure for the past two years on the Network is of the order of $ (insert amount) M including $ (insert amount) M for National Highways. Work includes maintenance of the carriageways, drainage and roadside assets but not maintenance of (insert details eg. road markings, traffic signals, lighting or bridge assets on the network).

3.0 Selection Process 3.1 Applications Applications for registration must be made by completing the attached Application Form and Assessment Schedules and returning them in an envelope to the nominated place before the nominated closing time (see Section 5). Clear, concise responses in point form is the preferred method of completing the Assessment Schedules. Applicants may submit additional documentation supporting their responses for any specific Assessment Schedules. However, such additional documentation should be kept brief. Failure to respond to all the Assessment Schedules may result in the Application being rejected. 3.2 Assessment Assessment of applicants will be made using the following: • Information contained in the Application Form and Assessment Schedule(s); • Documented evidence held by the Principal of the Applicant’s or its nominated Sub-contractor’s

previous performance on road maintenance or road construction carried out for the Principal.




3.3 Selection Criteria Assessment will be based on the Selection Criteria set out below. The relative importance of each of these Selection Criteria to the assessment of Applicants is indicated by the nominated Weighting Factors set out below. • Track Record on Road Maintenance or Weighting Factor 35%

Maintenance Type Construction Work • Understanding of Scope of the Road Weighting Factor 15% Maintenance Services • Key Personnel Weighting Factor 15% • Safety Record Weighting Factor 15% • Quality Management System Weighting Factor 10% • Environment Management System Weighting Factor 10% A copy of these Key Selection Criteria detailing a further breakdown of these weighting under each selection criteria is attached for the Applicants use in preparing their Offer. Note: It is important that applicants ensure their applications address each of the breakdown items

of all key selection criteria to show their applications to maximum advantage. 3.4 Explanation of Selection Criteria To assist applicants in completing the Assessment Schedules, explanations of the Selection Criteria follow: • Track Record (Maintenance or Maintenance Type Construction)

Applicants should complete Assessment Schedules 1 and 2 and provide all relevant information on applicable work by the applicant or its nominated subcontractor. Two or three examples in each Schedule will be sufficient. It is important that the work listed in Assessment Schedules 1 and 2 should demonstrate recent experience (post 1995) in the activities required by this project. The following information is required for each example listed: (a) Job Description (b) Name of Principal

(c) Name and Telephone Number of Principal’s Contact Officer

(d) Date Commenced, Contract Completion Date of each maintenance type construction

project, Actual Completion Date

(e) Contract Value at Award of each maintenance type construction project, Contract Value at Completion, reason for any major differences

(f) Aspects of construction jobs relevant to this Project (e.g. experience with pavement

construction)




(g) Description of (and term of) maintenance works undertaken (e.g. RMPC’s rehabilitation works, etc.).

(h) Any other points considered relevant to this project, e.g. the time required to mobilise in order to commence works.

• Understanding of Scope of the Road Maintenance Services

Applicants should complete Assessment Schedule 3 and provide a resume of its understanding of the scope of the Road Maintenance Services and particularly the various roles and responsibilities of the Contractor. The resume should include information which sets out the methodology for assessment of Defects and programming of Activities. The resume should also include a brief summary of the proposed implementation and contents of a maintenance management system in relation to the Applicant’s proposed work under the Contract as well as its understanding of key stakeholder relationship expectations under the Contract.

• Key Personnel

Applicants should complete Assessment Schedule 4 and provide all relevant information including nominated subcontractor personnel where applicable. Key positions in the organisation should be nominated covering management, supervision and operational roles. Where actual personnel have not been determined at the time of application, a shortlist of names should be nominated and relevant information provided for all. The following information is required for each key position listed: (a) Name (b) Qualifications

(c) Recent Relevant Experience (CV’s should be brief)

(d) Current Location and Project on which engaged

(e) Availability for this Project

(f) Contact name and telephone number of person in client organisation who can verify

experience in at least one recent relevant project. • Safety Record

Prior safety history of the Applicant or Subcontractor outlining at least two recent examples, in carrying out road maintenance or road construction must be detailed in Assessment Schedule 5. A Traffic Management Plan from a previous project should be submitted to demonstrate the applicants ability in this area.

• Quality Management System

Applicants should indicate clearly in Assessment Schedule 6 the current status of their (or their nominated Subcontractor’s) Quality System including: (a) Level of Assessment, e.g. Desktop Systems Audit, Third Party Assessments. (b) Name of Assessor including organisation, individual and experience.

(c) Quality System Standard e.g. ISO 9002.

(d) Outline of Plans to further develop the Quality System.

(e) A summary of recent audits on the Quality Management System together with related

responses.




(Note that a suitable Quality Management System must be in place at the date of the letter of acceptance).

• Environmental Management System

Applications should indicate clearly in Assessment Schedule 7 the current status of their (or their nominated subcontractors) environmental system, including:

(f) Level of assessment, e.g. desktop systems audit, third party assessments.

(g) Name of assessor including organisation, individual and experience.

(h) Quality system standard e.g. ISO14001.

(i) Outline of plans to further develop the environmental management system.

(Note that a suitable Environmental Management System must be in place at the date of the letter of acceptance)

3.5 Assessment Process The assessment of the Application for Registration submissions will be undertaken in accordance with Section 3.0 of the Registration Brochure using a comparative analysis technique known as the Matrix Comparative Method. The Matrix Comparative Method compares the attractiveness of each Applicant in a comparative scoring technique where Applicants are directly compared against each other, rather than being measured against pre-set scale of expectations. In comparing Applicants the following guidelines apply. • Where two Applicants (Applicant 1 and Applicant 2) are considered to be generally equivalent in their

relative capability or attractiveness to the Department in respect of a particular issue, then both Registrants score one point each in respect of that issue.

• Where Applicant 1 is considered to be superior to Applicant 2 in its relative capability or attractiveness to

the Department in respect of a particular issue, then Applicant 1 scores two points and Applicant 2 scores zero points in respect of that issue. Note that ‘superior’ indicates that a significant and meaningful differentiation between the two Applicants can be identified.

• Where Applicant 1 is considered to be inferior to Applicant 2 in its relative capability or attractiveness to

the Department in respect of a particular issue, then Applicant 1 scores zero points and Applicant 2 scores two points in respect of that issue. Note that ‘inferior’ indicates that a significant and meaningful differentiation between the two Applicants can be identified.




4.0 Enquiries Prior to Lodgement of Application

Name Position

Telephone Facsimile

5.0 Lodgement of Applications Applicants consisting of fully completed Assessment Schedules, marked (Road Maintenance Performance Contract – Expressions of Interest for ID***) should be addressed to:

Tender Box Department of Main Roads (insert address)

or hand delivered to:

Tender Box Department of Main Roads (insert address)

Applications must be received no later than:

(insert time) on (insert date) Applications should consist of one original and three complete copies of the Application Form and Schedules. Any application lodged after the nominated closing time will not be considered, however if there is evidence satisfactory to the Principal that a late application had been dispatched to the nominated lodgement box in sufficient time to reach that place under normal circumstances and was still in the course of delivery at the specified closing time then the Principal may consider that application

6.0 Briefing A briefing for interested Applicants on the Principal’s expectations and the roles and responsibilities of the Contractor undertaking an RMPC Open Competition for the Department will be held (insert time and date), at (insert place).




7.0 Important Dates Main Roads target dates associated with this project are as follows: Invite Applications for Registration (e.g. Start of week 1) (insert date) Briefing for Applicants (e.g. End of week 2) (insert date) Close Applications for Registration (e.g. Say end of week 4) (insert date)

(e.g. Say start of week 10) (insert date) Advise Unsuccessful Applicants/ Invite Offers from Registered Applicants Close Offers from Registered Applicants (e.g. Say start of week 14) (insert date) Award Contract (e.g. Say start of week 23) (insert date) Work Commences on Site (e.g. Say end of week 26) (insert date)

8.0 Network Plan The Network Plan is highlighted on the following page.



June 2001

PROPOSED MAINTENANCE NETWORK INVITATION NUMBER ID***

(INSERT PLAN)



June 2001

ROAD MAINTENANCE PERFORMANCE CONTRACT

(INSERT AREA)

Registration Application Form and Schedules


Application for Registration Road Maintenance Services To:

Reference:

District:

Closing Time

District Director Department of Main Roads Insert Address Details

To be completed by the Applicant I/We

Individual Partnership

Business

Company

Name (Full Name in Block Letters)

Of Individual

All Proprietors’/ Partners’ addresses

Principal Place of Business

Street Address

Austra

Postal Address

apply for registration for: The provision of road maintenance services on a specified Network in

and include the following Assessment Schedules 1 to Name/Position Signature


June 2001

on

Joint Venture

Trustee Company

Registered Office

of Company

Please supply the lian Business Number (ABN)

the (insert name) District.

7 in that regard

Date

C6262.1 June 2001

Page 1 of 1




Assessment Schedule 1

Applicant’s Track Record (Maintenance) Please provide brief details in accordance with Section 3.4 of the Registration Brochure.





Applicant’s Track Record (Maintenance – Type Construction) Please provide brief details in accordance with Section 3.4 of the Registration Brochure.





Undertaking of Scope of the Road Maintenance Services Please provide brief details in accordance with Section 3.4 of the Registration Brochure.





Key Personnel Please provide brief details in accordance with Section 3.4 of the Registration Brochure.





Safety Record Please provide brief details in accordance with Section 3.4 of the Registration Brochure.





Quality Management System Please provide brief details in accordance with Section 3.4 of the Registration Brochure.





Environmental Management System Please provide brief details in accordance with Section 3.4 of the Registration Brochure.




KEY SELECTION CRITERIA

WEIGHTING

FACTOR A

TRACK RECORD

35

(i) Two or Three examples provided including the relevant information as specified in (a) to (h) (ii) Information in (i) above is applicable to road maintenance or road maintenance type construction

Conforms Yes No

Conforms Yes No

Track Record – Road Maintenance 25

Planning and Supervision Demonstrated ability in the following areas:

(i) Prioritising Work including backlogging of Defects (ii) Scheduling / Programming Works (iii) Preparation of Budget (Cash Flows etc.) Operational Demonstrated ability in the following areas: (j) Delivery of the above program on time and within budget

including management of variations (ii) Report preparation including timeliness of presentation (iii) Quality of Work (iv) Liaison with Local Government and DMR personnel (v) Auditing of product and procedures

12 5 4 3

13 5 1 5 1 1

Track Record – Road Maintenance Type Construction 10

Demonstrated ability in the following areas:

(i) Pavement construction / repair (ii) Other applicable road maintenance type works

5 5




B

UNDERSTANDING OF SCOPE OF THE ROAD MAINTENANCE

SERVICES

15

Understanding of scope of the Contractors role and responsibilities in the following areas: (i) Stakeholder relationships including community/road users and

network stewardship role for the Department (ii) Planning and Supervision (see ‘A’ for key areas) (iii) Operational (see ‘A’ for key areas)

5 5 5

C

KEY PERSONNEL

15

(i) Key Personnel including Manager, Supervisor and Operational personnel have been included. (ii) Details have been included for (i) above as required under (a) to (f). (iii) Subcontractor’s have been nominated and appropriate details (ie. (a) to (f)) included. Management Supervisor Operational

Conforms

Yes No

Conforms Yes No

Conforms Yes No

5 5 5

D

SAFETY RECORD

15

(i) Two recent examples have been provided (ii) Copy of Traffic Management Plan provided Particular points to consider:

(i) Accident history on work sites (ii) Effective Safety Plan including safety

audit procedures (iii) Results of any Safety audits (iv) Understanding of Traffic Management

requirements in relation to road maintenance

Conforms

Yes No

Conforms Yes No

5 3 2 5




E

QUALITY SYSTEM STATUS

10

(i) The current status has been nominated in accordance with (a) to (d). Particular points to consider: (i) Is a current Quality System (suitable for road maintenance) already in use or available?

(ii) Is it working effectively? or is a suitable Quality System likely to be developed within the necessary timeframe?

Conforms

Yes No 7 3

F

ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS STATUS

10

The current status has been nominated in accordance with (a) to (d). Particular points to consider: (i) Is a current Environment System (suitable for road maintenance) already in use or available? (ii) Is it working effectively? or Is a suitable Environment System likely to be developed within the necessary time? (iii) Nominated personnel and appropriate qualifications

Conforms Yes No

5 3 2

EVALUATION INDEX

100